俱舍論 義疏通講 · 冊2Abhidharmakośabhāṣya · Exposition Throughout · Vol. 2
根義·諸門分別Meaning of a Faculty and Distinctions through the Several Gates
全文五層 →Full five layers →界品剛剛把十八界一一列完,卷三一開口卻是一個很小的問題:「即於此中根是何義?」——「根」這個字,到底什麼意思?
一部論的性格,常常就在這種地方露出來。世親不先說有幾根,先問「根」是什麼;答案也只有六個字:「最勝自在光顯名根」。頌疏把這六個字拆成三層,說「根體勝故名為最勝,根用勝故名為自在也」,體用雙勝才叫光顯。光記則從聲明學上拆,說「最勝、自在是字界,光顯是字緣」——字界是詞根、字緣是詞尾,合起來才成一個「增上」之義。
「增上」二字是這一卷的鑰匙。它不是『重要』,也不是「有作用」。論主自己下了定義:「夫增上用謂勝自在」——要在那件事上壓得住、作得了主,才算增上。所以底下一切分別,問的都不是『這是什麼東西』,而是『在這件事上,誰說了算』。
也因此,這一卷的體例是先立、再改立、再別立,然後用六道門與六種雜分別把二十二根從頭到尾篩一遍。頌疏總結全卷的骨架是五段——釋根義、明根廢立、明根體、辨諸門、雜分別。底下十九節,就依這個骨架走。
一、五根管四件事,四根管兩件事,五受八根管染淨兩邊〔正1〕
先問:說眼根是「根」,憑什麼?答案不是『因為能看見』,而是四件事:「一莊嚴身、二導養身、三生識等、四不共事」。眼耳沒有了,「謂若盲聾身醜陋故」,身相就殘;有眼耳,才能「謂因見聞避險難故」,身體才養得住;眼耳能發起眼耳二識,能各別見色聞聲——四件事上都作得了主,這才叫根。鼻舌身同此,只是導養一項換成受用段食。
女男命意四根各管兩件事。女男根管「有情異」與「分別異」,論主自釋:「有情異者,由此二根令諸有情女男類別」,「分別異者,由此二根形相言音乳房等別」。光記在這裡替我們分了一刀,說「前有情異約總相,後分別異約別相」——前者說類別,後者說相貌。命根管眾同分之「能續及能持」;意根管「能續後有及自在隨行」。樂等五受管雜染邊,「貪等隨眠所隨增故」;信等八根管清淨邊,「諸清淨法隨生長故」。
最易讀漏的是頭兩個字。頌起句作「傳說五於四」——「傳說」不是湊字。長行末尾也照樣收一句「毘婆沙師傳說如此」。古德於這二字讀出論主與所述之說的距離:寶疏總判「言傳說者,顯己不信」,於本卷末句下又標「第四結上所說,是毘婆沙師也」,並引《順正理》「初傳說言:顯樂後說」而斷之曰「顯世親師樂後說也」——論主心許的是後出的異說,不是毘婆沙師這一路。此讀出於唐疏,非論文自道。這一卷底下還會再遇見好幾次,讀俱舍第一課就是留意這種用字。
二、意根憑什麼能接上下一輩子——一段經證與一首偈〔引頌·心能導世間〕
先問:命根管一期生命的相續,那意根的「能續後有」又管什麼?論主不自己說理,直接搬經:中有現前投胎時,「時健達縛於二心內隨一現前,謂或愛俱、或恚俱等」——接上下一期的那一念,不是別的,就是意。至於「自在隨行」,也搬經,而且搬的是一首偈:「心能導世間,心能遍攝受,如是心一法,皆自在隨行。」
這裡要排一個誤解。這首偈是長行裡引來作證的經頌,不是本論的本頌;本論的本頌是那二十二首五言。論主凡引經頌,前面一定有「如契經言」「如有頌言」這樣的徵語,這是判本頌與引頌的機械標記,不必憑義理猜。
落在讀法上:一部以「法」為單位的毘曇,講到有情如何從這一生接到下一生時,交出來的答案居然是「心一法,皆自在隨行」——四根之中意根最後說,卻是分量最重的一根。往後唯識立末那、立阿賴耶,所處理的正是這一句話留下的空缺:既然是心接住了後有,那麼在兩期之間、在無心定中,接住它的又是誰。
三、換一套理由重立同樣的二十二根〔正2–4〕
先問:前面四件事、兩件事講得好好的,為什麼馬上有人推翻?因為有餘師說:避險難是識的功勞不是眼的功勞——「識了方能避於險難」;見色也不離識,所以「不共事」立不住。四事去了兩事,眼等就不成根了。
於是換一套。新的第一條理由是「了自境者,謂六識身」——眼等五根對能了別各別境的識有增上,意根對能了別一切境的識有增上,六根因此立。有人立刻反問:色聲香味也助成識,為什麼不算根?論主答得極乾脆:「境於識中無增上用」,接著給出判準——一個眼根能為了別種種色的諸識作通因,識又隨著眼根而明昧;色境兩點都反過來。這是全論最漂亮的一次「增上」示範:不是誰參與了,是誰說了算。
第二條理由是「從身立二根」。女男根體性不離身根,「身一分中立此名故」,只因它在女性男性上有增上,才從身根裡切出來。頌疏在「作業」「志樂」二字下給了很具體的例子,說女性「作業者,縫衣等也。志樂者,樂脂粉也」,男性「作業者,書寫等業也。志樂者,樂弓馬也」——古德舉的是七八世紀的風俗,我們讀的是那個判準:性別之為根,落在整套生活形態的分歧上,不只在形體。
第三條理由把命根、五受、信等五、後三根一併收進來:住由命根、雜染由五受、清淨由信等五、後後道與涅槃由三無漏根。
四、六個尺度一次收攏——為什麼無明與手足不能算根〔正5〕
先問:照『有增上就立根』這條走,會走到哪裡去?論主自己把難處攤開:無明對行有增上,該立根;語具對說話、手足對拿取行走、大小便處對排洩生樂都有增上,也該立根。若照單全收,「根」這個概念就爛掉了。
論主的回答是一首頌六個尺度:「心所依者,眼等六根」——這是第一個尺度;此依之差別由女男根,此一期之住由命根,此之成雜染由五受,此清淨之資糧由信等五,此清淨之成由後三根。六格填滿,論主一句收束:「由此立根事皆究竟」。
排誤:這六個尺度不是六條並列的標準,是一條線。它先問『心靠什麼站住』,再問『這個依有什麼差別』『能撐多久』『往哪邊倒』『靠什麼翻身』『翻到哪裡為止』。無明有增上,卻不在這條線上任何一格;手足有力用,也不在。所以論主答責難時不是逐條駁,而是說它們「非增上」——寶疏在此另補一刀,說內六處是有情本故是心所依,「外六處非有情本故非心所依」,內外一簡,語具手足自然出局。
落地:這一頌是全卷的定義閘。往後諸門所篩的,都只是這六格裡已經站住的二十二個。
五、還有第三套講法——流轉還滅各配四義〔正6〕
先問:同樣二十二根,還能怎麼排?餘師說能。論主標明「或言顯此是餘師意,約流轉還滅立二十二根」——「或」字一出,就知道底下不是自宗。
這一套只用四個字:所依、生、住、受用。流轉這一邊:所依是眼等六根,生由女男根,住由命根,受用由五受——恰好十四。還滅那一邊照樣四義:所依是信等五根,三無漏根之中第一個令生、第二個令住、第三個令受用——恰好八。十四加八,論主收一句「根量由此無減無增」。
排誤:這不是『另一個學派的錯誤說法』被列出來挨打。論主既沒有破它,還說「即由此緣經立次第」——經中二十二根的排列次序,正好合這一套。俱舍記錄異說時常常如此:兩造並存,讀者自己看哪一套更能解釋經文的編排。
落地:兩套排法的差別,其實是兩種看有情的眼光。前一套是靜態的解剖——心、依、住、染、淨;這一套是動態的旅程——生、住、用、翻身。同一批零件,換一個問題就換一張圖。學會這一手,讀往後六因四緣、業品隨眠品都用得上。
六、三受為什麼要開成五受,而三無漏根為什麼共用九根〔正7·正8〕
先問:受不是苦、樂、不苦不樂三種嗎,怎麼變成五種?論主的刀口在「身」與「心」。「身謂身受,依身起故,即五識相應受」;身上的不悅叫苦根——「言不悅者是損惱義」;身上的悅叫樂根——「所言悅者是攝益義」。心上的不悅另立一根,叫憂:「意識相應能損惱受,是心不悅,名曰憂根」。心上的悅本該叫喜,但第三靜慮是例外:那裡沒有身受,「第三定中無有身受,五識無故心悅名樂」,而且那份心悅「安靜,離喜貪故唯名樂根」;下三地的心悅「麁動有喜貪故,唯名喜根」。
那捨受呢?苦樂憂喜都身心分家了,捨為什麼不分?論主的理由極素樸:「此受在身心,同無分別故」。他還補了一條經驗證據——「在心苦樂多分別生,在身不然,隨境力故」,而且阿羅漢身上也照樣如此;捨則「無分別任運而生」,身心一個樣,所以合為一根。光記把這一刀說得更直白,釋此云「此捨受在身、心,同無分別,故不別立」。
這是全卷最值得記住的一個手法:分不分家,不看名字,看有沒有分別介入。
後半頌接著立三無漏根。體是同樣九根——意、樂、喜、捨、信等五;換的是位置。見道上「有未曾知當知行轉故,說彼名未知當知」;修道上已無未曾知,只是「即於彼境復數了知,是故說彼名為已知」;無學道上「知己已知故名為知,有此知者名為具知」。光記在此把見道的量給死了,釋此云「知者是智,謂在見道十五剎那」。
排誤:三無漏根不是三樣新東西。同一組九根,因為所處的道位不同而得三個名字——這正是本卷『根=作得了主的位置』這一義的最好註腳。
七、有漏無漏門——順帶一場關於信等五根的爭論〔正9〕
先問:二十二根裡哪些是無漏?答:只有後三根。論主順手釋名——「體唯無漏是無垢義。垢之與漏名異體同」。七有色根(眼等五加女男)與命、憂、苦一向有漏;意、樂、喜、捨與信等五,兩邊都通。
有趣的是那句『兩邊都通』惹出一場爭論。有餘師說信等五根也只是無漏,並且搬世尊的話作證:完全沒有這五根的人「住外異生品」。論主的反駁分兩層。第一層:「此非誠證,依無漏根說此言故」——那句經是先依無漏信等五根建立聖位之後才說的。第二層更漂亮,把「異生」拆成兩種——「內謂不斷善根,外謂善根已斷」,經文說的是「外異生」,並不涵蓋一切凡夫。再加兩條經證:佛未轉法輪時已說世間有情有上中下諸根差別;又若信等唯是無漏,就不該有「集沒味過患出離」這種只施於有漏法的觀察。
落地:這一段示範了俱舍最典型的作業方式——不是比誰的宗派大,是逐字扣經文的適用範圍。讀到「有餘師說」四字,就該預備看論主如何拆解對方所引的經。
八、只有命根決定是異熟——連帶引出留壽捨壽的傍論〔正10〕
先問:二十二根裡,哪一個一定是過去業感來的?答只有一個:「唯一命根定是異熟」。
這一答立刻被自己絆住。阿羅漢能「留多壽行」,把命拉長;那被拉長的命根是誰的異熟?論主先引本論交代作法——布施衣鉢、發願、入第四邊際靜慮,出定時心念口言「諸我能感富異熟業,願皆轉招壽異熟果」,於是感富之業轉成感壽之果;捨壽行則反過來。接著錄妙音的解釋:是引色界大種入身,順壽則留、違壽則捨。最後論主自出一解:是把宿業所生諸根大種的住時勢分換掉,另引定力所起的勢分——「故此命根非是異熟,所餘一切皆是異熟」。
傍論並不到此為止。留壽是「為利益安樂他故,或為聖教久住世故」;能作此事的人也有嚴格範圍——「謂三洲人女男相續,不時解脫得邊際定諸阿羅漢」。命與壽有沒有分別?論主錄了三說而不裁,其中一說徑引本論「云何命根?謂三界壽」。最後一句「傍論已竟,正論應辯」,才把話頭拉回來。
排誤:不要把這一段讀成神通異事。它真正在問的是——一個由業決定的量,能不能被定改寫?論主給的答案是『換勢分』,而不是『改業』;業果的原則沒有讓步。
九、一首偈裡的死亡態度〔引頌·梵行妙成立〕
先問:捨壽行是什麼心情?論主在說完「或為病等苦逼自身」之後,只引了一首頌:「梵行妙成立,聖道已善修,壽盡時歡喜,猶如捨眾病。」
這首偈同樣是引頌,不是本頌,前有「如有頌言」為徵。四句裡前二句是條件、後二句是結果——梵行立、聖道修,然後壽盡時才歡喜。次序不能倒過來讀成『因為厭世所以歡喜』。
落地:一部通篇在數法相的論,在這裡忽然給了一個比喻——放下一身的病。二十二根講到這裡,恰好是命根那一節;論主用一首舊偈提醒:這些數目最後要落在一個人怎麼面對自己壽命將盡上。全卷再無第二處這樣的抒情,故值得停一下。
十、憂根決定有異熟——並且它為什麼被提前講〔正11〕
先問:上一門說憂根不是異熟,這一門怎麼又說憂根有異熟?兩句不衝突:前者問憂是不是果,後者問憂會不會招果。這是全卷最容易混的一組門,務必分清「是異熟」與「有異熟」。
論主說憂「定有異熟」,並且解釋頌裡為什麼要下一個「定」字——「依唯越義頌說定聲」。「唯」是說憂只有有異熟這一種,沒有無異熟的份;「越」是說它被越次提前講。為什麼越次?因為它兼具兩義——「憂非無記,強思起故;亦非無漏,唯散地故」。既非無記、又非無漏,那就只剩下有異熟一條路。
其餘的:眼等前八無異熟因為無記,後三無異熟因為無漏;意根、其餘四受、信等五共十根,善惡有漏者有異熟,無記無漏者無異熟。
落地:「唯」與「越」兩個字,是讀頌文的技術。頌是五言二十字,字字有職務;一個「定」字既標唯、又標越次,這種密度正是本頌被稱作聰明論的地方。往後讀頌,遇到看似冗餘的虛字,先問它擔了什麼職務。
十一、善不善無記門——一門三行字,卻藏著一個編排問題〔正12〕
先問:二十二根的性質怎麼分?答很短:信等八根一向善,憂根通善與不善,意根與其餘四受通三性,眼等八根唯無記。
短歸短,論主卻停下來解釋了一件編排上的小事:「信等八根一向是善,數次雖居後,乘前故先說」——信等八根在二十二根的序列裡排在最後,頌文卻把它放在第一句講。理由是「乘前」:上一門的長行末後正說到信等五根的有異熟、無異熟,光記釋作「乘次前文明信等五文勢便故」——話頭順著這股文勢下來,就先接這八根。
排誤:憂根「唯通善不善性」——它不通無記。這一條與上一門的「非無記,強思起故」正好對得上;兩門之間是互相扣住的,不是各說各的。
落地:一部論的頌文排序,有時服從法數的自然次第,有時服從上下文的接續。讀者若拿頌次去反推法數次第,就會被誤導。這也解釋了為什麼三疏都要先出科判再釋文——科判正是為了防這種錯位。
十二、三界繫門——色界為什麼沒有女男根〔正13〕
先問:二十二根分屬三界,怎麼分?答用減法。欲界除後三無漏,「由彼三根唯不繫故」,剩十九;色界再除女男憂苦,剩十五;無色界再除五色根與喜樂,剩八——意、命、捨與信等五。
減法之外,論主一一給理由。色界除女男,理由是「色界已離婬欲法故、由女男根身醜陋故」。這裡立刻有人問:那經上為什麼說大梵是男?論主搬經:「無處無容女身為梵,有處有容男身為梵」;他的會通是——那是另有一種男相,就是欲界男身所有的相貌,不是說色界真有男根。無苦根因為「身淨妙故,又彼無有不善法故」——一句說沒有苦的所依,一句說沒有苦的境;無憂根因為「由奢摩他潤相續故,又彼定無惱害事故」——同樣是依與境兩面。
排誤:這一門是本卷校勘最熱鬧的一處。此頌首句在大正底本作「界」而明本作「繫」;第四句底本作「并除色喜樂」,而古德所引的同一句多作「并餘」。異讀並存,取捨不在此處作(詳見承衍)。讀者只須知道:頌文的字面在傳本之間確有出入,而這一門的義理——三界依次減根——並不因此翻轉。
十三、見修所斷門——最後三根為什麼連「斷」都談不上〔正14〕
先問:斷煩惱時,二十二根跟著被斷嗎?分三路。意、喜、樂、捨一一通三——見所斷、修所斷、非所斷都有。憂根「唯通見修所斷,非無漏故」。七色根、命根、苦根「唯修所斷,不染污故、非六生故、皆有漏故」——三個理由層層收緊:不是染污的所以不歸見道斷,不是六種煩惱所生的所以不隨見惑走,但畢竟有漏所以修道還要處理。信等五根或修所斷或非所斷,看它有漏無漏。最後三根「唯非所斷,皆無漏故」。
排誤:「非所斷」不是『斷不掉』,是『不在被斷之列』。論主給的理由是沒有過失的法不是所斷。把非所斷讀成頑強的煩惱,整門就翻反了。
落地:這一門是把二十二根接到修道論上的接口。往後賢聖品講見道十五心、修道九品,所用的正是這裡篩出來的根;此處若含糊,那裡就讀不動。到此,六道門篩完,論主收一句「已說諸門義類差別」。
十四、投胎那一刻,最先拿到幾根〔正15〕
先問:一個有情剛受生時,身上有幾根是異熟?答:欲界胎生、卵生、濕生「唯得身與命二異熟根,由此三生根漸起故」——眼耳鼻舌是後來才長的。
有人立刻追問:那意根、捨根呢?受生時心不是也在嗎?論主答「此續生時定染污故」——續生那一念是染污的,染污心不是異熟,所以不計入異熟根。這一答最容易漏掉,卻是全門的樞紐:問的是「異熟根」而不是『有沒有』。
化生不同,一出生諸根就齊:無形者得六(眼耳鼻舌身命),如劫初的人;一形者得七,如諸天;二形者得八。有人不信竟有二形受化生者,論主只答一句「惡趣容有二形化生」——正是把二形限在惡趣。色界如前欲界化生無形者所說得六;無色界則只得命根一種。
落地:這一門把抽象的二十二根按在最具體的一個時刻上——受生的那一剎那。往後世間品講中有入胎、業品講引業滿業,用的都是這一格。
十五、臨終那一刻,最後放下幾根〔正16〕
先問:死的時候諸根怎麼滅?無色界三根——命、意、捨最後滅;色界八根——前三加眼等五,因為「一切化生必具諸根而生死故」;欲界要看死法。頓死的:二形者滅十根,一形者九根,無形者八根。漸死的最後只捨四——身、命、意、捨,而且「此四必無前後滅義」,一定同時。
還有一個補正。以上都是就染心或無記心而死說的;「若在三界善心死時,信等五根必皆具有」,所以每一格都要再加五:無色界增至八,欲界漸終增至九,中間依此類推。
光記在這裡替我們解了一個字,釋此云「滅之言捨,最後死位體現在前,滅入過去令不現前故名為捨」——所謂滅,不是化為烏有,是現在的體落入過去、不再現前。
排誤:本門與上一門看似對稱,其實口徑不同——受生門只問異熟根,命終門則通三性。所以受生時意捨不算,命終時意捨要算。兩門並讀而不辨口徑,數目一定對不上。
十六、證四果各用幾根〔正17〕
先問:沙門四果各由幾根證得?論主先解頌裡的邊與中——「邊謂預流、阿羅漢果,於沙門果居初後故」,中則是一來與不還。預流由九根得:意、捨、信等五、未知當知、已知。關鍵在後兩根的分工——未知根在無間道、已知根在解脫道,「此二相資得最初果」。阿羅漢果也九根,換成已知在無間道、具知在解脫道,喜樂捨中隨取一。中間二果則七、八、九不定:依世間道七根,依出世道八根,超越證者九根。
這一門末尾有一場對本論的追問:《發智》問由幾根得阿羅漢,答十一根,為什麼這裡說九?論主的會通是——「實得第四,但由九根」,本論說十一是「依一身中容有故說」,就是同一個人數退數證,前後用到樂喜捨三受,合計才十一;而「然無一時三受俱起,是故今說定由九根」。
落地:這是全卷唯一一處論主與根本阿毘達磨正面對帳的地方,而他的解法不是改本論的數字,是分清「一時」與「一身」兩個口徑。讀毘曇時遇到數目打架,先查口徑,再談對錯。
十七、有一根就一定有另外幾根〔正18–20〕
先問:成就一根,能推出成就哪些根?論主給了一個底盤:「命、意、捨中隨成就一,彼定成就如是三根」——這三根同進同退,缺一不可。寶疏解此云「此三於一切處、時、位等皆定成也」。有了底盤,其餘就好算:成樂根或身根加一,共四;成眼耳鼻舌或喜根共五;成苦根共七(身命意加除憂之外的四受);成女、男、憂、信等各共八;成已知或具知共十一;成未知當知根共十三——多出的身與苦,是因為未知當知根必在欲界。
論主同時把「不成就」的條件排乾淨:眼耳鼻舌四根生無色界不成,身根生無色界不成,女男生上二界不成,樂根異生生第四定以上不成,喜根異生生三四定以上不成,苦根生上二界不成,憂根一切離欲貪者不成,信等五根斷善根者不成,三無漏根各有其不成之位。
排誤:這一門不是背誦表。它問的是諸根之間的蘊含關係——哪些是底盤,哪些是加項。看懂了底盤是命意捨,整張表自己就長出來了。
十八、最少能少到幾根〔正21〕
先問:一個有情最少剩幾根?答八。有兩種人剛好都是八,而內容完全不同。一種是「已斷善根名為無善」的人,他的八根是五受加身、命、意;論主順手釋「受」字——「受謂能受,能領納故」。另一種是「愚生無色界」的異生,他的八根是信等五加命、意、捨;論主釋「愚」字——「愚謂異生,未見諦故」。
有人問:信等五既然一向是善,那三無漏根不也是善,怎麼不算進來?論主答得極簡:這裡是依「八根」而說,而且說的是愚生無色界——異生沒有無漏根。
排誤:同樣是八,一個是欲界斷善的人、身受俱在而善根全無;一個是無色界的凡夫、善根宛然而身受俱無。數目相同,處境相反。若只記「極少八」三字,這一門就白讀了。
落地:這一節其實是全卷最好的一次示範——法數不是清單,是坐標。同一個數字落在不同的界、不同的性上,指的是完全不同的兩個人。
十九、最多能多到幾根,以及聖者為什麼反而不能滿〔正22〕
先問:誰成就的根最多?答十九。二形的人眼等諸根齊備,除三無漏,正好十九;論主釋無漏何以名淨——「無漏名淨,離二縛故」,並斷定「二形必是欲界異生,未離欲貪故有十九」。
只有這一種嗎?還有一種:未離欲的有學聖者,也是十九——他除的是二無漏根與一形。住見道者除已知與具知,住修道者除未知與具知;女男二根隨除一種,因為「以諸聖者無二形故」。
排誤:兩個十九,來路正好相反。二形之所以能到十九,是因為他還是凡夫、還帶著二形;聖者之所以只有十九,是因為他必定不是二形、且三無漏根一時只成就其一。根多不等於位高——這一卷用一個數字把這件事說完了。
落地:全卷至此收筆——「因分別界根非根差別,乘茲廣辯二十二根竟」。從「根是何義」問起,到『誰能成就最多』收束,中間走完六道門與六種雜分別。二十二個名目,量的是同一件事:在有情這一團相續裡,什麼地方作得了主。
讀這一卷的人可以帶走什麼
一是把「增上」當成一把尺。它不問誰在場,只問誰說了算。往後讀六因四緣的能作因、讀業品的引業滿業,這把尺一路都用得上。
二是留意論主的用字溫度。「傳說」「有說」「有餘師說」「毘婆沙師傳說如此」——這些不是套語;唐疏一致把它讀作世親在標示自己與所述之說的距離(寶疏:「言傳說者,顯己不信」)。
三是分清相鄰兩門的口徑。是異熟與有異熟、受生與命終、一時與一身——本卷有三組門都因口徑不同而數目相反,讀毘曇栽跟頭多半栽在這裡。
承衍:三疏之鏡
以上是本卷自身之義。此下另以古德之疏、異譯之本、系內之辯旁照——鏡非論,只是換幾種讀法看同一段文。本卷之特別,在於四疏之中神泰疏卷三適闕:泰疏現存目次列卷一、二、四、五、六、七、十七,卷三不在其列,故本卷無泰疏可繫。此處據實標闕,不以他卷之文充之。
三疏之科判互異。光記判根品為三大節——明二十二根、明俱生諸法、明六因四緣;寶疏則以頌數立節,說「此品總有七十四頌,分為三節」,初二十二頌正分別根。頌疏於品題下先立體用之序,說「界品明諸法體,根品明諸法用,依體起用,故次明根」。三家皆以卷四首為當品大文第二之始,故本卷正當大文第一。
異說之屬,三家不同。正2–4 那一段究竟出於誰?光記標「此下第二敘異師。有餘識見等家作如是說」,繫之於主張識見的一路;寶疏則明繫部派,說「初之一頌述婆沙師建立、第二三頌述曇無德建立」,並引真諦之說作經部;頌疏但作敘異說而不繫其人。三說並錄,不判。
信等五根唯無漏之異部,光記與寶疏同指其人,寶疏標「此敘化地部計」,光記更出其異名為分別論師。又寶疏於有漏無漏門下對本論之釋另有補簡,說「詳此釋義不盡。無漏無表亦色蘊攝,是無漏故」——這是古德對論文周延性的意見,不是論之所說。
留捨壽行一段,三家詳略最懸。光記與寶疏皆廣釋,光記於妙音之說明標「此即初師不正義也」並出二解以通宗;頌疏則於異熟門與有異熟門之間整段略去此傍論。詳略之差如此,本身即是一項可讀的事實。
眾賢之辯,與本卷界同。順正理論卷九〈辯差別品第二之一〉起句與俱舍同作因界已列諸根,末頌亦止於極多十九,其後即入俱生法——與本卷同起同止。眾賢正面立處與俱舍所取相同,如釋根名所本之「此增上義,界義顯成」,光記寶疏皆引之;又如還滅之義作「生死止息是還滅義,即是六處畢竟斷滅」。至於反破,本卷範圍內明標經主者四處:責亦爾之類顯,作「又經主釋亦爾言者,類顯一一各能為根,亦不應理」;責等言之異門,作「經主又釋等言為顯復有異門。云何異門」;責命根非異熟,作「而經主言由勝定力引取未曾諸根大種住時勢分,如此命根非是異熟,餘是異熟。此言非理」;憂非異熟則正面立,作「何緣定謂憂非異熟、此是異熟?不應理故」。又於色界無女男之由,眾賢不取身醜陋一說,作「有說:由此身醜陋故。此說不然,陰藏隱密非醜陋故,前說為善」,而釋梵王之為男作「離欲威猛似男用故」。二造之說各有其理,此處並錄,不判勝負。
頌文之二處異字。其一,俱舍正1 首句作「傳說五於四」,順正理論引頌同作「傳說五於四,四根於二種,五八染淨中,各別為增上」;而眾賢自造之顯宗論則作「五根於四事,四根於二種,五八染淨中,各別為增上」——首句異而餘三句同。其二,界繫門之頌,底本第四句作「并除色喜樂」,而順正理論〔作「欲色無色界,如次除後三,兼女男憂苦,并餘色喜樂」〕、顯宗論同文、頌疏所錄〔作「兼女男憂苦,並餘色喜樂」〕、光記牽文〔作「如是已說至并餘色喜樂」〕四家皆作餘而不作除。二處皆為文本事實,誌之而不推其意,取捨屬譯者。
真諦舊譯之鏡。真諦本與玄奘本分卷同界,而體例大異——玄奘整頌先出、真諦偈句嵌釋。釋根名處真諦分作二層,作「說二十二根已。根義云何?最勝自在為義」,下另出光飾一義。意根引頌,真諦作「意引將世間,意轉令變異,是意根一法,一切法隨行」,第二句所顯與玄奘之遍攝受不同。餘師別說,真諦說得更顯部執,作「復言為顯諸部別執。餘部說:生死依者,所謂六根」。捨根合立,真諦增一層自性義,作「捨受者,若人不分別,由自性生,或在身或在心地,故合二為一根」。三無漏根之名,真諦作「於見道中名未知欲知根,於修道中名知根,於無學道中名知已根」。無漏釋名,真諦作「無流是無垢義,垢者是流別名故」。妙音一名,真諦存音寫作「大德瞿沙說」。捨壽之頌,真諦作「修梵行已竟,聖道已善修,由捨命歡喜,如人病得差」。二譯優劣不判,取捨屬譯者。
一則譯語之互讀。本論三無漏根之首作未知當知根,真諦作未知欲知根;而瑜伽師地論所出之三根,其首亦作未知欲知根。同出玄奘譯場而用語有異,此唯誌錄,不作定論。
各鏡並列,各還其位。
The Chapter on the Elements has only just finished enumerating the eighteen elements one by one, and Fascicle Three opens with a very small question: “Here, what is the meaning of ‘faculty’?”—what, after all, does the word “faculty” mean?
The character of a treatise often shows itself in just such a place. Vasubandhu does not first say how many faculties there are; he first asks what a faculty is. And the answer runs to only six characters: “supreme, sovereign, manifestly evident—these are called a faculty.” Yuanhui’s Verse Commentary splits those six into three layers, saying that “because the entity of a faculty is excellent it is called supreme, and because the function of a faculty is excellent it is called sovereign”; only when entity and function are both excellent is it manifestly evident. Puguang’s Record splits them grammatically instead, saying that “‘supreme’ and ‘sovereign’ are the verbal base, and ‘manifestly evident’ is the affix”—the base is the root, the affix is the ending, and only joined together do they form the single sense of ‘dominance.’
The word ‘dominance’ is the key to this fascicle. It does not mean ‘important,’ nor even ‘having a function.’ The author of the treatise lays down his own definition: “Dominant function means being supreme and sovereign”—only what holds down and exercises mastery in the matter at hand counts as dominant. Every analysis that follows therefore asks not ‘what kind of thing is this?’ but ‘in this matter, who has the say?’
For this reason the fascicle proceeds by first establishing, then re-establishing, then establishing otherwise, and finally sifting the twenty-two faculties from beginning to end through six doctrinal gates and six miscellaneous analyses. Yuanhui’s Verse Commentary sums up the skeleton of the whole fascicle in five sections—explaining the meaning of faculty, establishing and rejecting faculties, explaining the entities of the faculties, analyzing the several gates, and miscellaneous analysis. The nineteen sections below follow that skeleton.
1. Five Faculties Govern Four Matters, Four Faculties Two, and the Five Feelings and Eight Faculties the Two Sides of Defilement and Purification〔Stanza 1〕
Ask first: on what grounds is the eye faculty called a “faculty”? The answer is not ‘because it can see,’ but four matters: “first, adorning the body; second, guiding and sustaining the body; third, producing consciousness and the rest; fourth, exclusive activity.” Without eyes and ears, “if one is blind or deaf, the body is unsightly,” and the bodily form is maimed; with eyes and ears one can “by seeing and hearing avoid dangers and calamities,” and the body can be sustained; eye and ear give rise to the two consciousnesses of eye and ear, and each separately sees form and hears sound—in all four matters they exercise mastery, and only this is called a faculty. Nose, tongue, and body are the same, save that guiding and sustaining is replaced by the use of food taken in portions.
The female, male, life, and mental faculties each govern two matters. The female and male faculties govern “difference among sentient beings” and “difference in characteristics,” which the author of the treatise explains himself: “Difference among sentient beings means that these two faculties divide sentient beings into female and male classes,” and “difference in characteristics means that through these two faculties, bodily shape, spoken sound, breasts, and the rest differ.” Puguang’s Record makes a cut for us here, saying that “the earlier, difference among sentient beings, is stated in terms of the general characteristic; the later, difference in characteristics, in terms of the particular”—the first speaks of classes, the second of appearances. The life faculty governs the “continuing and sustaining” of the commonality of sentient beings; the mental faculty governs “continuing later existence and sovereign following.” The five feelings beginning with pleasure govern the side of defilement, “because greed and the other latent tendencies increase by attachment to them”; the eight faculties beginning with confidence govern the side of purification, “because the various purifying dharmas arise and grow through them.”
What is most easily read past are the first two words. The stanza opens with “it is transmitted that the five are dominant with respect to four”—“it is transmitted” is not there to fill the line. The prose commentary likewise closes with “so the Vaibhāṣikas transmit it.” The ancient masters read in these two words a distance between the author of the treatise and the account he reports. Fabao’s Commentary judges of the whole, “to say ‘it is transmitted’ is to show that he does not himself credit it,” and beneath the closing sentence of this fascicle marks, “the fourth part concludes what has been said above, which is the Vaibhāṣikas’ position”; he further cites the Treatise Conforming to Correct Principle—“the opening words ‘it is transmitted’ show that he favors the later account”—and settles it thus: “this shows that Master Vasubandhu favors the later account.” What the author of the treatise inwardly assents to is the alternative account stated later, not the Vaibhāṣika line. This reading comes from the Tang commentaries and is not said by the treatise itself. The like will be met several times more below in this fascicle; the first lesson in reading the Kośa is to watch for such usage.
2. On What Grounds the Mental Faculty Can Join On to the Next Life—A Scriptural Proof and a Stanza〔Quoted stanza · Mind can lead the world〕
Ask first: the life faculty governs the continuity of one life-span; what, then, does the mental faculty’s “continuing later existence” govern? The author of the treatise does not argue the point himself but brings in scripture directly: when the intermediate existence becomes present and takes rebirth, “at that time the gandharva has present one of two minds, either accompanied by craving or accompanied by hostility, or the like.” The thought that joins on to the next life is nothing else but mind. As for “sovereign following,” he again brings in scripture, and this time a stanza: “Mind can lead the world; mind can gather in all things everywhere. Such is this single dharma, mind: all dharmas follow it under its sovereignty.”
One misreading must be cleared away here. This stanza is a scriptural verse quoted within the prose commentary as proof; it is not a root stanza of this treatise. The root stanzas of this treatise are those twenty-two five-syllable verses. Whenever the author of the treatise quotes a scriptural verse, he always sets a marker before it, such as “as the sūtra says” or “as a stanza says.” This is the mechanical mark by which root stanza and quoted stanza are told apart; no doctrinal guesswork is needed.
As for how to read it: a treatise whose unit of analysis is the dharma, asked how a sentient being joins from this life to the next, delivers as its answer “this single dharma, mind: all dharmas follow it under its sovereignty.” Among the four faculties the mental faculty is stated last, and yet it carries the most weight. When the Yogācāra tradition later establishes the manas and the ālaya, what it is handling is precisely the gap this sentence leaves: if it is mind that catches later existence, then who catches it between two lives, and within an absorption where mind is absent?
3. Re-establishing the Same Twenty-Two Faculties on a Different Set of Reasons〔Stanzas 2–4〕
Ask first: the four matters and the two matters have just been well set out—why is the account overturned at once? Because certain other masters say that avoiding dangers is the work of consciousness and not of the eye—“only after consciousness has discerned can one avoid danger”—and that seeing form too does not occur apart from consciousness, so that “exclusive activity” will not stand. With two of the four matters gone, the eye and the rest no longer amount to faculties.
So another set is put in their place. The first reason of the new set is “discerning one’s own object means the six bodies of consciousness”—the five faculties beginning with the eye are dominant with respect to the consciousness that discerns each its own object, and the mental faculty with respect to the consciousness that discerns every object; the six faculties are established on this ground. Someone objects at once: form, sound, odor, and flavor also help bring consciousness about—why do they not count as faculties? The author of the treatise answers with great directness: “an object exercises no dominance over consciousness,” and then supplies the criterion—one eye faculty serves as the common cause for the many consciousnesses that discern many forms, and consciousness is sharp or dull according to the eye; the form-object is the reverse on both points. This is the finest demonstration of ‘dominance’ in the whole treatise: the question is not who took part, but who has the say.
The second reason is “setting up two faculties out of the body.” The entities of the female and male faculties are not apart from the body faculty—“this name is merely set up upon one portion of the body”—and it is only because they are dominant with respect to femaleness and maleness that they are cut out of the body faculty. Yuanhui’s Verse Commentary supplies very concrete examples under the words “activity” and “inclinations,” saying of femaleness that “activity means sewing clothes and the like; inclinations means a liking for powder and rouge,” and of maleness that “activity means writing and the like; inclinations means a liking for bow and horse.” What the ancient master offers are the customs of the seventh and eighth centuries; what we read is the criterion behind them—that sex counts as a faculty because it falls across a whole divergence in forms of life, and not upon bodily shape alone.
The third reason takes in the life faculty, the five feelings, the five beginning with confidence, and the last three faculties all together: abiding by the life faculty, defilement by the five feelings, purification by the five beginning with confidence, and each successive path together with nirvāṇa by the three faculties without outflows.
4. Six Measures Gather It All In at Once—Why Ignorance and the Limbs Cannot Count as Faculties〔Stanza 5〕
Ask first: where does the rule ‘whatever is dominant is established as a faculty’ lead? The author of the treatise lays out the difficulty himself: ignorance is dominant with respect to the formations and so should be a faculty; the organ of speech with respect to speaking, hands and feet with respect to grasping and walking, the organs of excretion and of urination with respect to excreting and producing pleasure—all are dominant and so should be faculties. Admit them all, and the very concept of “faculty” rots away.
The author of the treatise answers with one stanza of six measures: “the support of mind means the six faculties beginning with the eye”—that is the first measure; the distinction of that support comes from the female and male faculties; the abiding of this life-span from the life faculty; its becoming defiled from the five feelings; the provision for its purification from the five beginning with confidence; and the accomplishment of that purification from the last three faculties. With the six slots filled, the author of the treatise closes in one sentence: “by this the matter of establishing faculties is fully accounted for.”
Clearing a misreading: these six measures are not six parallel standards but a single line. It asks first what mind stands upon, then what distinguishes that support, how long it can hold, which way it tips, what it turns itself around by, and how far that turn goes. Ignorance is dominant, yet occupies no slot on this line; hands and feet have power, and likewise occupy none. This is why, in answering the objection, the author of the treatise does not refute item by item but says simply that they “are not dominant.” Fabao’s Commentary adds a further cut here, saying that the six internal sense fields are the root of a sentient being and therefore the support of mind, whereas “the six external sense fields are not the root of a sentient being and therefore are not the support of mind.” Once inner and outer are so distinguished, the organ of speech and the limbs drop out of themselves.
Where it lands: this stanza is the definitional gate of the whole fascicle. Everything the later gates sift is only the twenty-two that have already taken their stand within these six slots.
5. And Yet a Third Account—Four Senses Apiece for Cyclic Existence and Return to Cessation〔Stanza 6〕
Ask first: how else might the same twenty-two faculties be arranged? Certain other masters say it can be done. The author of the treatise marks it plainly: “the word ‘or’ shows that this is the intent of other masters, who establish the twenty-two faculties in terms of cyclic existence and return to cessation.” Once the word ‘or’ appears, one knows that what follows is not his own school’s position.
This account uses only four terms: support, arising, abiding, and experience. On the side of cyclic existence: the support is the six faculties beginning with the eye, arising is by the female and male faculties, abiding by the life faculty, and experience by the five feelings—exactly fourteen. On the side of return to cessation the same four senses apply: the support is the five faculties beginning with confidence, and among the three faculties without outflows the first causes arising, the second abiding, and the third experience—exactly eight. Fourteen plus eight, and the author of the treatise closes with a sentence: “by this the number of the faculties is neither diminished nor increased.”
Clearing a misreading: this is not ‘another school’s mistaken view’ set out to be beaten. Not only does the author of the treatise not refute it; he even remarks that “it is on just such grounds that the sūtra lays out the sequence”—the order in which the sūtra arranges the twenty-two faculties fits this account exactly. The Kośa often records alternative accounts in this way: both parties stand side by side, and readers judge for themselves which account better explains the arrangement of the scripture.
Where it lands: the difference between the two arrangements is really a difference between two ways of looking at a sentient being. The first is a static anatomy—mind, support, abiding, defilement, purification; this one is a dynamic journey—arising, abiding, use, and turning about. The same parts; change the question and the diagram changes. Learn this move and it will serve throughout the six causes and four conditions, the chapter on action, and the chapter on latent tendencies.
6. Why Three Feelings Are Opened into Five, and Why the Three Faculties without Outflows Share Nine〔Stanzas 7 and 8〕
Ask first: are feelings not the three—painful, pleasant, and neither painful nor pleasant? How do they become five? The author of the treatise sets his blade at “body” and “mind.” “‘Body’ means bodily feeling, because it arises in dependence on the body, that is, feeling associated with the five consciousnesses.” Bodily displeasure is called the pain faculty—“‘displeasure’ means causing harm and distress”; bodily pleasure is called the pleasure faculty—“‘pleasure’ means embracing and benefiting.” Mental displeasure is set up as a faculty of its own, sorrow: “feeling associated with mental consciousness that causes harm and distress is mental displeasure and is called the sorrow faculty.” Mental pleasure ought to be called joy, but the third meditative absorption is the exception: there is no bodily feeling there, for “in the third absorption there is no bodily feeling, since the five consciousnesses do not arise, and so the mental pleasure is called pleasure,” and that mental pleasure is “settled and still, free of the craving for joy, and so is called only the pleasure faculty,” whereas the mental pleasure of the three lower levels is “coarse and agitated and still has the craving for joy, and so is called only the joy faculty.”
And equanimous feeling? Pain, pleasure, sorrow, and joy have all been divided between body and mind—why is equanimity not divided? The author of the treatise’s reason is starkly plain: “this feeling is without discrimination alike in body and mind.” He adds a piece of experiential evidence—“pain and pleasure in the mind arise mostly from discrimination; in the body it is not so, but follows the force of the object”—and this holds in the body of an arhat as well; equanimity “is without discrimination and arises spontaneously,” being the same in body and in mind, and so is combined into one faculty. Puguang’s Record states the cut still more bluntly, explaining that “this equanimous feeling is without discrimination alike in body and in mind, and therefore is not set up separately.”
This is the move in the fascicle most worth remembering: whether or not a thing is divided depends not on its name but on whether discrimination has entered in.
The second half of the stanza then establishes the three faculties without outflows. The entity is the same nine faculties—mind, pleasure, joy, equanimity, and the five beginning with confidence; what changes is the position. On the path of seeing, “a mode directed toward knowing what has never yet been known operates, and so he is called one who comes to know what is not yet known”; on the path of cultivation there is nothing never yet known, only that “one repeatedly knows those same objects, and so he is called one of what is known”; on the path beyond training, “because one knows that one has known, it is called knowing; one who possesses this knowing is called one of full knowledge.” Puguang’s Record fixes the measure of the path of seeing here, explaining that “‘knowing’ is cognition, that is, the fifteen moments on the path of seeing.”
Clearing a misreading: the three faculties without outflows are not three new things. One and the same set of nine faculties acquires three names because it stands at three different stations on the path—which is the best gloss there is on this fascicle’s sense that a faculty is a position from which mastery is exercised.
7. The Gate of With and Without Outflows—and a Dispute over the Five Faculties Beginning with Confidence〔Stanza 9〕
Ask first: which among the twenty-two faculties are without outflows? Answer: only the last three. The author of the treatise glosses the name in passing—“its entity is exclusively without outflows, meaning stainless; stain and outflow differ in name but are one in substance.” The seven faculties that are form (the five beginning with the eye plus female and male) together with life, sorrow, and pain are invariably with outflows; mind, pleasure, joy, equanimity, and the five beginning with confidence extend to both.
What is interesting is that the phrase ‘extend to both’ provokes a dispute. Certain other masters hold that the five faculties beginning with confidence too are only without outflows, and cite the World-Honored One’s words as proof: one wholly without these five “stands in the class of outer ordinary beings.” The author of the treatise’s rebuttal has two layers. The first: “this is not a reliable proof, for that statement was made with reference to the faculties without outflows”—that scriptural sentence was spoken only after the distinctions of noble station had been established in dependence on the five faculties beginning with confidence that are without outflows. The second layer is finer still: it divides “ordinary being” into two—“‘inner’ means those who have not cut off their wholesome roots; ‘outer’ means those whose wholesome roots are already cut off”—and the scripture speaks of “outer ordinary beings,” which does not cover every worldling. Two further scriptural proofs are added: before the Buddha turned the wheel of Dharma he had already said that sentient beings in the world have faculties superior, middling, and inferior; and if confidence and the rest were without outflows alone, there could be no such examination as “origin, disappearance, gratification, danger, and escape,” which is applied only to dharmas with outflows.
Where it lands: this passage demonstrates the Kośa’s most characteristic mode of work—not a contest over whose school is greater, but a word-by-word test of the scope within which a scriptural sentence applies. On reading the words “certain other masters say,” one should be ready to watch how the author of the treatise takes apart the scripture his opponent has cited.
8. Only the Life Faculty Is Definitely Maturation—and the Incidental Discussion on Prolonging and Relinquishing the Lifespan That Follows from It〔Stanza 10〕
Ask first: which among the twenty-two faculties must have been brought about by past karma? The answer names only one: “only the life faculty is definitely maturation.”
This answer trips over itself at once. An arhat can “prolong many life-formations” and so extend his life; of whose karma is the life faculty thus extended the maturation? The author of the treatise first cites the root treatise for the procedure—giving away robe and bowl, making a vow, entering the fourth limit-stage meditative absorption, and on rising thinking and saying aloud, “whatever karma of mine could bring about the maturation of wealth, may it all be turned to bring about the maturation-result of lifespan,” whereupon the karma that would bring wealth is turned into karma bringing lifespan; relinquishing the life-formations reverses this. He then records Ghoṣa’s explanation: the great elements of the form realm are drawn into the body, and where they accord with the lifespan it is retained, where they run counter it is relinquished. Finally the author of the treatise offers a solution of his own: the portion of duration belonging to the great elements of the faculties produced by past karma is exchanged, and a portion of duration produced by the power of concentration is drawn in instead—“therefore this life faculty is not maturation, while all the rest are maturation.”
The incidental discussion does not end there. Prolonging the lifespan is “for the benefit and ease of others, or so that the noble teaching may long endure in the world”; and those who can do this fall within a strict range—“arhats among the humans of the three continents in a female or male continuum, who are liberated not dependent on circumstance, and who have attained the limit-stage concentration.” Is there a difference between the vital principle and the lifespan? The author of the treatise records three accounts without adjudicating, one of which cites the root treatise directly: “What is the life faculty? Lifespan in the three realms.” Only with the closing sentence—“the incidental discussion is ended; the main discussion should now be taken up”—is the thread drawn back.
Clearing a misreading: this passage should not be read as a tale of marvels. What it really asks is whether a quantity fixed by karma can be rewritten by concentration. The answer the author of the treatise gives is ‘exchange the portion of duration,’ not ‘alter the karma’; the principle of karmic result yields nothing.
9. An Attitude toward Death within a Single Stanza〔Quoted stanza · The holy life has been excellently established〕
Ask first: in what frame of mind is the lifespan relinquished? After saying “or he is oppressed by the suffering of illness and the like in his own body,” the author of the treatise quotes only a single stanza: “The holy life has been excellently established; the noble path has been well cultivated; when the lifespan is exhausted he rejoices, as one who lays down a whole body of illnesses.”
This stanza too is a quoted stanza and not a root stanza, with “as a stanza says” before it as its marker. Of the four lines, the first two are the condition and the last two the result—the holy life established, the noble path cultivated, and only then rejoicing when the lifespan is exhausted. The order must not be reversed into ‘rejoicing because one is weary of the world.’
Where it lands: a treatise that spends itself throughout on counting the marks of dharmas suddenly offers a simile here—laying down a whole body of illness. The twenty-two faculties have reached exactly the section on the life faculty, and the author of the treatise uses an old stanza as a reminder: all these numbers are in the end to come down to how one person faces the exhaustion of his own lifespan. Nowhere else in the fascicle is there a second passage like it, and so it is worth pausing over.
10. The Sorrow Faculty Definitely Has Maturation—and Why It Is Stated Ahead of Its Turn〔Stanza 11〕
Ask first: the preceding gate said the sorrow faculty is not maturation; how does this gate say the sorrow faculty has maturation? The two do not conflict: the first asks whether sorrow is a result, the second asks whether sorrow will bring a result about. This is the pair of gates most easily confused in the whole fascicle; ‘is maturation’ and ‘has maturation’ must be kept apart.
The author of the treatise says sorrow “definitely has maturation,” and explains why the stanza sets down the word ‘definitely’—“the word ‘definitely’ is stated in the stanza on the senses of ‘only’ and ‘out of turn.’” ‘Only’ says that sorrow has nothing but the having-maturation kind, with no share that lacks maturation; ‘out of turn’ says that it is brought forward ahead of its place. Why ahead of its place? Because it possesses two features at once—“sorrow is not indeterminate, for it arises from forceful volition; and it is not without outflows, for it belongs only to the unconcentrated levels.” Being neither indeterminate nor without outflows, only the having-maturation road is left to it.
As for the rest: the first eight beginning with the eye do not have maturation because they are indeterminate; the last three do not because they are without outflows; the mental faculty, the remaining four feelings, and the five beginning with confidence—ten in all—have maturation if wholesome or unwholesome and with outflows, and do not if indeterminate or without outflows.
Where it lands: the two words ‘only’ and ‘out of turn’ are a technique for reading the stanzas. A stanza is twenty syllables in five-syllable lines, and every syllable has a duty; the single word ‘definitely’ marks both exclusivity and displacement in the order. Such density is why these root stanzas are called an astute composition. In reading stanzas hereafter, when a particle looks redundant, first ask what duty it is carrying.
11. The Gate of Wholesome, Unwholesome, and Indeterminate—Three Lines of Text Concealing a Question of Arrangement〔Stanza 12〕
Ask first: how are the qualities of the twenty-two faculties divided? The answer is very short: the eight beginning with confidence are invariably wholesome; the sorrow faculty extends to the wholesome and the unwholesome; the mental faculty and the remaining four feelings extend to all three qualities; the eight beginning with the eye are indeterminate only.
Short as it is, the author of the treatise pauses to explain a small matter of arrangement: “the eight faculties beginning with confidence are invariably wholesome; although they stand later in the enumeration, they are stated first because the discussion carries on from what precedes.” The eight beginning with confidence stand last in the sequence of the twenty-two faculties, yet the stanza puts them in its first line. The reason is that the discussion “carries on from what precedes”: the prose of the previous gate ended precisely on whether the five beginning with confidence have maturation, and Puguang’s Record explains this as “taking advantage of the momentum of the immediately preceding passage on the five beginning with confidence”—the thread runs on with that momentum, and so these eight are taken up first.
Clearing a misreading: the sorrow faculty “extends only to the wholesome and the unwholesome”—it does not extend to the indeterminate. This tallies exactly with the previous gate’s “not indeterminate, for it arises from forceful volition”; the two gates are locked together and are not each speaking on its own.
Where it lands: the order of a treatise’s stanzas sometimes obeys the natural sequence of the numbered dharmas and sometimes the continuity of the surrounding discussion. A reader who infers the sequence of the numbered dharmas from the order of the stanzas will be misled. This also explains why all three commentaries set out the outline before explaining the text—the outline exists precisely to forestall such a dislocation.
12. The Gate of the Three Realms—Why the Form Realm Has No Female or Male Faculty〔Stanza 13〕
Ask first: how are the twenty-two faculties distributed among the three realms? The answer works by subtraction. The desire realm excludes the last three without outflows, “because those three faculties are unbound to any realm,” leaving nineteen; the form realm further excludes female, male, sorrow, and pain, leaving fifteen; the formless realm further excludes the five faculties that are form together with joy and pleasure, leaving eight—mind, life, equanimity, and the five beginning with confidence.
Beyond the subtraction, the author of the treatise gives a reason in each case. The form realm excludes female and male because “the form realm is already free of the dharmas of sexual desire, and because female and male faculties make the bodily form unsightly.” Someone at once asks: then why does scripture call the Great Brahmā male? The author of the treatise brings in scripture: “there is no principle and no possibility that a female body should be Brahmā; there is such a principle and such a possibility that a male body should be Brahmā”; and his reconciliation is that this refers to another kind of male appearance, namely the features possessed by a male body in the desire realm, and not that the form realm actually has a male faculty. There is no pain faculty because “the body there is pure and subtle, and because there are no unwholesome dharmas there”—one clause says there is no support for pain, the other that there is no object of pain; there is no sorrow faculty because “calm abiding moistens the continuum, and because there is definitely nothing there that harms or injures”—again support and object on both sides.
Clearing a misreading: this gate is the liveliest place in the fascicle for textual collation. The first line of this stanza reads 「界」 tr. “realm” in the Taishō base text but 「繫」 tr. “bound” in the Ming edition; the fourth line reads 「并除色喜樂」 tr. “and excludes form, joy, and pleasure” in the base text, whereas the same line as cited by the ancient masters mostly reads 「并餘」 tr. “and the remaining.” The variant readings stand side by side, and the choice is not made in this place (see Further Resonances). The reader need only know that the letter of the stanza does differ among the transmitted editions, and that the doctrine of this gate—the faculties reduced realm by realm—is not overturned by that difference.
13. The Gate of Abandonment through Seeing and through Cultivation—Why the Last Three Faculties Are Not Even Subject to Abandonment〔Stanza 14〕
Ask first: when the afflictions are abandoned, are the twenty-two faculties abandoned along with them? There are three routes. Mind, joy, pleasure, and equanimity each extend to all three—abandoned through seeing, abandoned through cultivation, and not subject to abandonment. The sorrow faculty “extends only to what is abandoned through seeing and through cultivation, because it is not without outflows.” The seven faculties that are form, the life faculty, and the pain faculty are “abandoned through cultivation only, because they are not defiled, are not produced by the six, and are all with outflows”—three reasons closing in one upon another: not being defiled, they do not fall to abandonment through seeing; not being produced by the six kinds of affliction, they do not follow the afflictions of view; but being with outflows after all, they must still be dealt with in cultivation. The five faculties beginning with confidence are either abandoned through cultivation or not subject to abandonment, according as they are with or without outflows. The last three faculties are “not subject to abandonment only, because all are without outflows.”
Clearing a misreading: “not subject to abandonment” does not mean ‘cannot be abandoned’; it means ‘not among the things to be abandoned.’ The reason the author of the treatise gives is that a dharma without fault is not something to be abandoned. Read “not subject to abandonment” as a stubborn affliction and the whole gate turns upside down.
Where it lands: this gate is the joint by which the twenty-two faculties are attached to the theory of the path. When the chapter on the noble persons later expounds the fifteen minds of the path of seeing and the nine grades of the path of cultivation, the faculties it uses are exactly those sifted here; vagueness at this point makes that passage unreadable. Here the six doctrinal gates have all been sifted, and the author of the treatise closes with the sentence “the distinctions of meaning under the several gates have now been explained.”
14. At the Moment of Taking Birth, How Many Faculties Are First Received〔Stanza 15〕
Ask first: when a sentient being has just taken birth, how many faculties on its body are maturation? Answer: birth from the womb, from an egg, and from moisture in the desire realm “obtain only the two maturation faculties of body and life, because in these three modes of birth the faculties arise gradually”—eye, ear, nose, and tongue grow only later.
Someone presses at once: and the mental faculty and the equanimity faculty? Is mind not present at the moment of taking birth? The author of the treatise answers, “the mind at the moment of continuing into birth is necessarily defiled”—that thought is defiled, and a defiled mind is not maturation, so it is not counted among the maturation faculties. This answer is the easiest to overlook and yet is the pivot of the whole gate: what is asked concerns “maturation faculties,” not ‘whether they are there at all.’
Birth by transformation is different: at birth the faculties are complete. One without sexual form obtains six (eye, ear, nose, tongue, body, and life), as with the humans at the beginning of an aeon; one with a single sexual form obtains seven, as with the gods; one with both obtains eight. Someone doubts that birth by transformation could come with both sexes at all, and the author of the treatise answers with a single sentence: “within the bad destinies birth by transformation with both sexes is admitted”—confining it precisely to the bad destinies. The form realm obtains six, as was said for one without sexual form born by transformation in the desire realm; the formless realm obtains the life faculty alone.
Where it lands: this gate presses the abstract twenty-two faculties down upon the most concrete of moments—the instant of taking birth. When the chapter on the world later expounds the intermediate existence entering the womb, and the chapter on action the projecting and completing karma, this same slot is what they use.
15. At the Moment of Dying, How Many Faculties Are Last Laid Down〔Stanza 16〕
Ask first: how do the faculties cease at death? In the formless realm three—life, mind, and equanimity cease last; in the form realm eight—those three plus the five beginning with the eye, because “all who are born by transformation are born and die with their faculties complete”; in the desire realm it depends on the manner of dying. For those who die all at once: one of both sexes ceases with ten faculties, one of a single sex with nine, one without sexual form with eight. For those who die gradually, only four are laid down last—body, life, mind, and equanimity, and “these four have definitely no principle of ceasing one before another”; they must cease together.
There is a further correction. All the above is stated for those who die with a defiled or an indeterminate mind; “if one dies with a wholesome mind in the three realms, the five faculties beginning with confidence are necessarily all present,” and so five must be added to every slot: the formless realm rises to eight, gradual death in the desire realm rises to nine, and the counts between follow by the same reasoning.
Puguang’s Record unpacks one word for us here, explaining that “‘cease’ means to relinquish: at the final moment of death the entity is present, and because it falls into the past and no longer appears it is called relinquishing”—what is called ceasing is not a vanishing into nothing but the present entity falling into the past and appearing no more.
Clearing a misreading: this gate and the preceding one look symmetrical, but their terms of reference differ—the gate of taking birth asks only about maturation faculties, while the gate of dying extends to all three ethical qualities. Hence mind and equanimity are not counted at birth but are counted at death. Read the two gates together without distinguishing the terms of reference and the numbers will never agree.
16. How Many Faculties Are Used in Realizing Each of the Four Fruits〔Stanza 17〕
Ask first: by how many faculties is each of the four fruits of the ascetic life attained? The author of the treatise first explains ‘edge’ and ‘middle’ in the stanza—“‘edges’ means the fruits of stream-entry and arhatship, because among the fruits of the ascetic life they stand first and last”—while ‘middle’ means once-return and non-return. Stream-entry is attained by nine faculties: mind, equanimity, the five beginning with confidence, coming to know what is not yet known, and what is known. The crux lies in the division of labor between the last two—the faculty of coming to know what is not yet known is on the uninterrupted path, the faculty of what is known on the path of liberation, and “these two aid one another in attaining the first fruit.” Arhatship likewise takes nine, with the faculty of what is known on the uninterrupted path and the faculty of full knowledge on the path of liberation, and any one of joy, pleasure, and equanimity. The two middle fruits are indefinite at seven, eight, or nine: seven by the mundane path, eight by the supramundane path, and nine for one who realizes them by leaping over.
At the end of this gate there is a pressing question put to the root treatise: the Treatise on the Development of Wisdom asks by how many faculties arhatship is attained and answers eleven—why is nine said here? The author of the treatise’s reconciliation is that “in actual fact the fourth fruit is attained by nine faculties only,” and that the root treatise says eleven “with reference to what may be present within a single body”—that is, one and the same person falls away and realizes again and again, using pleasure, joy, and equanimity over the course of it, so that eleven are counted in all; whereas “there is no principle by which three feelings arise at one time, and so it is said here that it is definitely attained by nine faculties.”
Where it lands: this is the one place in the fascicle where the author of the treatise squares accounts face to face with the root Abhidharma, and his solution is not to alter the root treatise’s number but to distinguish two terms of reference, ‘at one time’ and ‘within one body.’ When numbers clash in reading Abhidharma, check the terms of reference before arguing about right and wrong.
17. Possess One Faculty and Certain Others Must Follow〔Stanzas 18–20〕
Ask first: from possessing one faculty, which faculties can be inferred? The author of the treatise supplies a base plate: “whoever possesses any one among life, mind, and equanimity necessarily possesses these three faculties”—these three come and go together and none may be lacking. Fabao’s Commentary explains this as “these three are necessarily possessed in every place, time, station, and the like.” With the base plate laid, the rest is easy to reckon: possessing the pleasure faculty or the body faculty adds one, making four; possessing eye, ear, nose, tongue, or joy makes five; possessing pain makes seven (body, life, mind, and the four feelings apart from sorrow); possessing female, male, sorrow, or confidence and the rest makes eight in each case; possessing what is known or full knowledge makes eleven; possessing the faculty of coming to know what is not yet known makes thirteen—the extra body and pain being because that faculty is necessarily in the desire realm.
The author of the treatise at the same time clears out the conditions of ‘not possessing’: the four faculties of eye, ear, nose, and tongue are not possessed by one born in the formless realm; the body faculty is not possessed by one born in the formless realm; female and male are not possessed by one born in the two upper realms; the pleasure faculty is not possessed by an ordinary being born in the fourth absorption or above; the joy faculty is not possessed by an ordinary being born in the third or fourth absorption or above; the pain faculty is not possessed by one born in the two upper realms; the sorrow faculty is not possessed by anyone free of the craving of desire; the five beginning with confidence are not possessed by one whose wholesome roots are cut off; and each of the three faculties without outflows has its own station of non-possession.
Clearing a misreading: this gate is not a table to be memorized. What it asks is the relation of entailment among the faculties—which are the base plate and which the additions. Once it is seen that the base plate is life, mind, and equanimity, the whole table grows of itself.
18. How Few Can the Faculties Become〔Stanza 21〕
Ask first: what is the fewest number of faculties a sentient being can retain? Answer: eight. Two kinds of person come to exactly eight, and their contents are wholly different. One is the person “whose wholesome roots are already cut off and who is called without wholesome roots”; his eight are the five feelings plus body, life, and mind, and the author of the treatise glosses the word ‘feeling’ in passing—“‘feeling’ means what receives, because it takes in.” The other is the ordinary being who is “a fool born in the formless realm”; his eight are the five beginning with confidence plus life, mind, and equanimity, and the author of the treatise glosses the word ‘fool’—“‘fool’ designates an ordinary being, because he has not yet seen the truths.”
Someone asks: if the five beginning with confidence are invariably wholesome, are not the three faculties without outflows wholesome too—why are they not counted in? The author of the treatise answers with the utmost brevity: the statement here is made with reference to ‘eight faculties,’ and what is spoken of is a fool born in the formless realm—an ordinary being has no faculty without outflows.
Clearing a misreading: both are eight, but one is a person of the desire realm whose wholesome roots are cut off, body and feeling intact and wholesome roots wholly gone; the other is an ordinary being of the formless realm, wholesome roots intact and body and feeling wholly absent. The number is the same and the situations are opposite. Remember only the three words “fewest is eight,” and this gate has been read for nothing.
Where it lands: this section is in fact the fascicle’s best demonstration that numbered dharmas are not a list but a set of coordinates. One and the same number, falling in a different realm and a different quality, points to two entirely different persons.
19. How Many the Faculties Can Become at Most, and Why a Noble One Instead Cannot Be Full〔Stanza 22〕
Ask first: who possesses the most faculties? Answer: nineteen. A person of both sexes has all the faculties beginning with the eye complete; excluding the three without outflows, exactly nineteen. The author of the treatise explains why what is without outflows is called pure—“without outflows is called pure because it is free of the two bonds”—and concludes that “a person of both sexes is necessarily an ordinary being of the desire realm, not yet free of the craving of desire, and so has nineteen.”
Is that the only kind? There is another: a noble one still in training who is not yet free of desire also has nineteen—what he excludes is two faculties without outflows and one sexual form. One abiding on the path of seeing excludes what is known and full knowledge; one abiding on the path of cultivation excludes coming to know what is not yet known and full knowledge. One of the two faculties female and male is excluded, “because no noble one is of both sexes.”
Clearing a misreading: the two nineteens come by exactly opposite roads. The person of both sexes reaches nineteen because he is still a worldling and still carries both sexes; the noble one has only nineteen because he is necessarily not of both sexes and because only one of the three faculties without outflows is possessed at a time. More faculties does not mean a higher station—this fascicle settles the point with a single number.
Where it lands: here the fascicle lays down its brush—“because the distinction between faculties and non-faculties arose in analyzing the elements, the twenty-two faculties have on that occasion been extensively analyzed to their conclusion.” From the opening question “what does faculty mean?” to the closing question of who can possess the most, it has walked through six doctrinal gates and six miscellaneous analyses. Twenty-two names measure one and the same thing: within this bundle of continuity that is a sentient being, where is mastery exercised?
What a Reader of This Fascicle May Carry Away
First, take ‘dominance’ as a measuring rod. It does not ask who was present, only who has the say. It will serve all the way through the enabling cause among the six causes and four conditions, and through the projecting and completing karma of the chapter on action.
Second, attend to the temperature of the author’s wording. “It is transmitted,” “some say,” “certain other masters say,” “so the Vaibhāṣikas transmit it”—these are not stock phrases; the Tang commentaries read them with one voice as Vasubandhu marking his distance from the account he reports (Fabao’s Commentary: “to say ‘it is transmitted’ is to show that he does not himself credit it”).
Third, keep the terms of reference of adjacent gates apart. Is maturation and has maturation; taking birth and dying; at one time and within one body—three pairs of gates in this fascicle yield opposite numbers because their terms of reference differ, and most stumbles in reading Abhidharma happen just here.
Further Resonances: A Mirror of the Three Commentaries
The above is the sense of this fascicle in itself. What follows illuminates it from the side with the ancient masters’ commentaries, the alternative translation, and the debate within the lineage—a mirror is not the treatise, only a change of reading upon the same passage. What is peculiar to this fascicle is that among the four commentaries, Shentai’s falls away precisely at Fascicle Three: the surviving table of contents of Shentai’s commentary lists fascicles one, two, four, five, six, seven, and seventeen, and fascicle three is not among them, so that for this fascicle there is no Shentai commentary to attach. The absence is marked here as it stands, and is not filled out from his other fascicles.
The three commentaries divide the outline differently. Puguang divides the Chapter on the Faculties into three major sections—the twenty-two faculties, the dharmas that co-arise, and the six causes and four conditions; Fabao sets his sections by stanza count, saying that “this chapter has seventy-four stanzas in all, divided into three sections,” of which the first twenty-two stanzas directly analyze the faculties. Yuanhui, under the chapter title, first sets up the sequence of entity and function, saying that “the Chapter on the Elements explains the entities of dharmas and the Chapter on the Faculties their functions; because function arises in dependence on entity, the faculties are explained next.” All three take the beginning of Fascicle Four as the start of the chapter’s second major division, so that this fascicle falls exactly within the first.
On whose the alternative account is, the three differ. Whose position is that passage at Stanzas 2–4? Puguang marks it “from here, second, the alternative masters are set forth; certain masters who hold that consciousness sees speak thus,” attaching it to the line that maintains consciousness as what sees; Fabao attaches it plainly to schools, saying that “the first stanza states the Vaibhāṣika masters’ establishment, the next three stanzas state the Dharmaguptaka establishment,” and cites Paramārtha’s account as Sautrāntika; Yuanhui merely says that alternative accounts are being set forth, without attaching them to anyone. All three are recorded together, without adjudication.
On the alternative school that holds the five faculties beginning with confidence to be without outflows only, Puguang and Fabao name the same party, Fabao marking it “this sets forth the Mahīśāsaka position,” while Puguang further gives their other name as the Vibhajyavādins. Fabao also adds a supplementary qualification to the treatise’s explanation under the gate of with and without outflows, saying that “examined closely, this explanation is not exhaustive: nonmanifest form that is without outflows is also included in the aggregate of form, since it is without outflows.” This is an ancient master’s opinion on the completeness of the treatise’s statement, not something the treatise itself says.
In the passage on prolonging and relinquishing the life-formations, the three differ most widely in fullness. Puguang and Fabao both expound it at length, Puguang marking Ghoṣa’s account “this is the first master’s incorrect position” and offering two solutions to bring it into accord with the school; Yuanhui omits the entire incidental discussion between the gate of maturation and the gate of having maturation. Such a difference in fullness is itself a fact worth reading.
Saṅghabhadra’s debate has the same boundaries as this fascicle. The first part of the Chapter on Differences in Fascicle Nine of the Treatise Conforming to Correct Principle opens, as the Kośa does, with the faculties already enumerated by reason of the elements, and its closing stanza likewise stops at “most is nineteen,” after which it enters the dharmas that co-arise—beginning and ending with this fascicle. Where Saṅghabhadra establishes positively, what he holds agrees with what the Kośa takes over, as with the basis for explaining the name faculty, “this sense of dominance is made evident by the sense of the verbal base,” which both Puguang and Fabao cite; and again with the sense of return to cessation, “the stilling of birth and death is the sense of return to cessation, that is, the final cessation of the six sense fields.” As for his counter-refutations, within the scope of this fascicle the Sūtra-master is expressly named in four places: on the objection to the extension of “likewise so,” “again, the Sūtra-master explains the words ‘likewise so’ as showing by extension that each can severally be a faculty, which too is unreasonable”; on the objection to the alternative sense of “and the rest,” “the Sūtra-master further explains ‘and the rest’ as showing that there is another sense; what other sense?”; on the objection that the life faculty is not maturation, “yet the Sūtra-master says that by the power of superior concentration one draws out a portion of duration of great elements of the faculties never had before, so that this life faculty is not maturation while the rest are maturation—this statement is unreasonable”; and on sorrow not being maturation he establishes positively, “on what ground is it definitely held that sorrow is not maturation? Because holding this to be maturation is unreasonable.” Again, as to why the form realm has no female or male, Saṅghabhadra does not take the account of the unsightly body, saying that “some say it is because the body is thereby unsightly; this is not so, for the hidden organ is concealed and not unsightly, and the earlier account is better,” while he explains Brahmā’s being male as “because, being free of desire, his majesty resembles the function of a male.” Both parties’ accounts have their reasons; here they stand side by side, with no verdict on who prevails.
Two places where the stanza text differs. First, the opening line of Stanza 1 in the Kośa reads “it is transmitted that the five are dominant with respect to four,” and the Treatise Conforming to Correct Principle cites the stanza with the same opening—“it is transmitted that the five are dominant with respect to four; four faculties with respect to two kinds; the five and the eight, in defilement and purification, are each severally dominant”—whereas the Treatise Revealing the Doctrine, composed by Saṅghabhadra himself, reads “the five faculties with respect to four matters; four faculties with respect to two kinds; the five and the eight, in defilement and purification, are each severally dominant”—the first line differing while the other three agree. Second, in the stanza of the gate of realm affiliation, the fourth line of the base text reads 「并除色喜樂」 tr. “and excludes form, joy, and pleasure,” whereas the Treatise Conforming to Correct Principle〔reading 「欲色無色界,如次除後三,兼女男憂苦,并餘色喜樂」 tr. “the desire, form, and formless realms, excluding in order the last three, together with female, male, sorrow, and pain, and the remaining form, joy, and pleasure”〕, the Treatise Revealing the Doctrine with the same wording, the text recorded by Yuanhui〔reading 「兼女男憂苦,並餘色喜樂」 tr. “together with female, male, sorrow, and pain, and the remaining form, joy, and pleasure”〕, and the lemma drawn by Puguang〔reading 「如是已說至并餘色喜樂」 tr. “thus has been said … down to ‘and the remaining form, joy, and pleasure’”〕—all four read “remaining” and not “excludes.” Both places are textual facts, recorded without pressing their significance; the choice belongs to the translator.
The mirror of Paramārtha’s older translation. Paramārtha’s version divides its fascicles at the same boundary as Xuanzang’s, but the format differs greatly—Xuanzang sets out the whole stanza first, while Paramārtha embeds the explanation line by line. Where the name faculty is explained, Paramārtha divides it into two layers, reading “the twenty-two faculties having been stated: what is the sense of faculty? Its sense is supreme and sovereign,” and bringing out the sense of illumination and adornment separately below. In the stanza quoted for the mental faculty, Paramārtha reads “thought draws the world along; thought turns it and makes it change; this single dharma, the mental faculty—all dharmas follow it,” the second line showing something other than Xuanzang’s gathering in everywhere. For the other masters’ alternative account, Paramārtha states its sectarian character more openly, reading “the word ‘again’ is to show the several schools’ distinct positions; another school says: the support of birth and death is the six faculties.” On combining the equanimity faculty, Paramārtha adds a layer of intrinsic nature, reading “as for equanimous feeling: if a person does not discriminate, it arises from its own nature, whether on the ground of body or of mind, and so the two are combined into one faculty.” For the names of the three faculties without outflows, Paramārtha reads “on the path of seeing it is called the faculty of desiring to know what is not yet known; on the path of cultivation, the faculty of knowing; on the path beyond training, the faculty of having known.” Explaining the name ‘without outflows,’ Paramārtha reads “without flow means stainless, because stain is another name for flow.” For the name of Ghoṣa, which Xuanzang renders by sense, Paramārtha keeps the transcription, reading “the Bhadanta Qusha says.” For the stanza on relinquishing the lifespan, Paramārtha reads “the holy life is brought to its end; the noble path has been well cultivated; through relinquishing life he rejoices, as a sick man who is cured.” No verdict is passed on the merits of the two translations; the choice belongs to the translator.
One cross-reading of translated terms. The first of the three faculties without outflows is in this treatise the faculty of coming to know what is not yet known, and in Paramārtha the faculty of desiring to know what is not yet known; and the first of the three faculties set out in the Yogācārabhūmi likewise reads the faculty of desiring to know what is not yet known. The same translation bureau under Xuanzang, and yet a difference in wording: this is recorded only, and no conclusion is drawn.
Each mirror set beside the others, each returned to its own place.
俱生·心心所Co-Arising · Mind and Mental Factors
全文五層 →Full five layers →翻開這一卷,世親先不立宗、不破他,只問了一句:
「今應思擇,一切有為如相不同,生亦各異,為有諸法決定俱生、有定俱生。」
一切有為法相狀各別、生起各異——這是常識。既然各異,就不該綁在一起;那麼,有沒有哪些法是非得一起生不可的?答案給得極快:有。而答案一出口,全論的骨架就跟著出來了——「謂一切法略有五品:一色、二心、三心所、四心不相應行、五無為。」
五品之立,就是後世所稱七十五法的綱。無為不生,所以本卷不談;剩下四品,一品一品地問『你們是怎麼一起生的』。光記把這一段標作當品的第二大段,說它是「即約俱生辨用」——前面界品是就體說一切法,這裡是就用說一切法。同一批法,換一個角度重看一遍。
下面十九個義理節點,就是這一次重看的全部內容。
一、一粒最小的物質,也不是一個東西
先問:世間最小的一塊物質,最少要幾樣東西才站得住?
論答:「色聚極細立微聚名,為顯更無細於此者。此在欲界無聲無根,八事俱生隨一不減。」八事就是四大種——地水火風——加上四樣所造色:顏色、香、味、觸。若這一聚裡含身根,就是九事;若含眼耳鼻舌其中一根,就是十事(含眼根處必也含身根,所以九加一)。若其中有聲,各再加一,成九、十、十一。
最容易讀錯的是「微聚」二字。它不是「極微」。光記在此分得很清楚:「應知微有二種:一色聚微,即極少八事俱生不可減也,此論據斯說。二極微微,即色極少更不可分,《正理》據此說。」本論說的是最小的一聚,不是最小的一粒;所以光記又說「微聚是假,假必依實」——這個名字底下本來就有八樣實法在。頌疏把「欲」字也點出來:「欲謂欲界,微是細義,非極微也。」
第二個易誤處:既然四大不相離,為什麼摸金子只覺堅、摸水只覺濕?論的答覆不是『其餘三大不在』,而是「於彼聚中勢用增者明了可得,餘體非無」——並舉了兩個日常譬喻:針尖與竹籌綁在一起去觸,只覺得針;鹽與麵粉合在一起去嘗,只嘗得鹹。顯不顯是勢用的事,有沒有是體的事,兩件事不可混。再問一步『怎麼知道其餘三大真的在』,論答「由有攝熟長持業故」——水收攝、火成熟、風增長、地任持,四種業用都還在作,所以四大都在。
落到讀法上:這一節是全卷的定調。它先在物質上示範一次『法不孤起』,後面心法的「必俱」才不是新說,而是同一條理路推到心上。而末後一問尤堪玩味——「事」到底依體說還是依處說?論答一分依體、一分依處,而後逕自止諍:「何用分別如是語為?語隨欲生,義應思擇。」名言之數目可以爭,義理不在數目上。
二、心與心所,闕一不起
先問:一個念頭裡,是心先起,然後帶出受想思,還是它們一起亮?
論答:「心與心所必定俱生,隨闕一時餘則不起。」沒有先後。頌的下半句「諸行相或得」,講的是另外兩件事:一切有為諸行生起時,必與生住異滅四相同起;而諸行之中「唯有情法與得俱生」,非情之法則不然——所以只能說「或」。
這裡有一個讀頌的機關。「諸行相或得」五字看起來像三個詞並列,其實不是。頌疏把它點破了:「故前句『必俱』二字流至於此,應言『諸行相必俱』。」也就是說,上句的「必俱」要一路貫下來讀——諸行與四相是必俱,諸行與得只是或俱。一個「或」字不是含糊,是簡別:石頭也是行,石頭沒有得。
落地處在哪裡?在於它取消了一種很自然的想像——以為有一個叫「心」的主體,先站在那裡,然後生出種種心理活動。論說沒有這回事:心王與心所是同一叢裡同時亮起的燈,抽掉任何一盞,整叢都不亮。後面全卷數心所的數目、辨心所的品類,都建立在這一句上;若心所可以離心而有、心可以離心所而起,那些數目就全無意義了。
三、心所為什麼分五品——「地」是一個範圍詞
先問:心所何止幾十個,為什麼偏偏分成五品?依什麼分?
論答:「諸心所法且有五品。何等為五?一、大地法;二、大善地法;三、大煩惱地法;四、大不善地法;五、小煩惱地法。」而分品的樞紐在一個「地」字:「地謂行處,若此是彼所行處,即說此為彼法地。」
最容易誤解的是「大地」二字。它不是廣大之地,它指心王。光記把三個層次拆得很細——單說「大」,指受等十法;說「大地」,指心王;說「大地法」,又回到受等十法。所以「大地法」的意思是:在『大法所行之地』上出現的那些法。同理,大善地就是善心、大煩惱地就是染污心、大不善地就是不善心、小煩惱地就是一小部分染污心。
第二個易誤處:五品不是價值排序,也不是善惡分類。它是按出現範圍分的。光記於此有一句很要緊的話:「今依此論,各以一義廢立大地法等。此乃論能,非關人解。」古來諸師分五品,有立五義的、八義的、九義的(神泰疏把這些古師之數都記了下來),本論只用一義——遍不遍、唯不唯——就把五品分乾淨了。
落地:這是一套心理分類學的方法論。它不問『這個心所好不好』,只問『它出現在多大的範圍裡』。懂了這一層,下面五節的每一個「唯」字、每一個「遍」字,都不再是修辭,而是判準。
四、大地法十——每一念都有的十個面
先問:哪些心所是每一個心、每一剎那都少不了的?
論列十法:「受謂三種領納:苦、樂、俱非」「想謂於境取差別相」「思謂能令心有造作」「觸謂根境識和合生,能有觸對」「欲謂希求所作事業」「慧謂於法能有簡擇」「念謂於緣明記不忘」「作意謂能令心警覺」「勝解謂能於境印可」「三摩地謂心一境性」。
這一節有四處最容易讀走。其一,論在列十法之前先下了兩個字:「傳說:如是所列十法,諸心剎那和合遍有。」一個「傳」字,古德一致讀為論主與所述之說留了距離:光記於本段直判「毘婆沙師傳說如是:所列十法」……「論主意朋經部,非信十法皆有別體,故言傳說」,寶疏亦云「謂傳婆沙師說,故言傳說」。這一讀法出自唐疏,非論文自道;讀俱舍要對這類字眼保持敏感。其二,「慧」不是道德意義上的智慧,只是簡擇——所以它能與「疑」同時在一個心裡;正因為在猶豫的兩邊都作了推度,才叫猶豫。其三,「三摩地」不等於入定;頌疏釋作「三摩地者,此云等持,平等持心於一境轉,亦持心所,從強說心」——散亂心裡也有它,只是弱。其四,十法不是十個步驟,是同一剎那的十個側面;論自己已預先擋住這個誤讀:「諸心心所異相微細,一一相續分別尚難,況一剎那俱時而有。」
落地:這十個名字給了你一副拆解自心的工具。任取當下一念,都可以問:這一念領納到的是苦是樂還是不苦不樂(受)?取了什麼相(想)?把心推向哪裡(思)?碰上了什麼(觸)?想要什麼(欲)?在分辨什麼(慧)?記著什麼(念)?被什麼喚醒(作意)?認定了什麼(勝解)?心停在哪一境上(三摩地)?——十問問完,這一念就攤開了。
五、大善地法十——善心的十個指標
先問:一個心憑什麼算作善心?
論答:唯有十法是『遍善心而且唯善心』的——信、不放逸、輕安、捨、慚、愧、無貪、無瞋、不害、勤。逐一:「信者令心澄淨」,或說是「於諦寶業果中現前忍許」;不放逸是「修諸善法離諸不善法」,而所謂修,是「於善專注為性」;輕安是「心堪任性」;捨是「心平等性、無警覺性」;無貪無瞋名為二根;不害是「無損惱」;勤是「令心勇悍為性」。
信最容易被讀成『相信某個對象』。論給的第一義不是對象,是狀態——令心澄淨。頌疏設了一個很好的譬喻來說這件事:「信者,澄淨也,如水清珠能清濁水,心有信珠,令心澄淨。」光記引《入阿毘達磨》的同一喻更具:「如水清珠置於池內,令濁穢水皆即澄淨。如是信珠在心池內,心諸濁穢皆即除遣。」——信是那顆珠,不是那池水裡的某一樣東西。
第二個易誤處:「捨」不是無所謂、不是冷漠,是心的平等性;而它與「作意」(有警覺性)同在一心,論自己也覺得難,特地設了一番問答:「如何可說於一心中有警覺性、無警覺性?作意與捨二相應起。」答覆是「此有警覺於餘則無,二既懸殊有何乖反」——警覺屬作意,不警覺屬捨,各在各的體上,不在同一體上打架。
第三個易誤處:三善根少了無癡,不是因為無癡不算善根。論說得明白:「無癡善根慧為性,故前已說在大地法中,不重說為大善地法。」它以慧為體,慧已經在大地法裡了,不重複立。
落地:這十個字可以當成一張自查表。心是不是澄的(信)?有沒有在守(不放逸)?身心是否堪用(輕安)?有沒有偏(捨)?對己知恥否(慚)?對罪知怖否(愧)?不黏(無貪)不惱(無瞋)不損他(不害)?有沒有在使力(勤)?——十項齊,才叫善心;缺一項,那一念就不是完整的善。
六、大煩惱地法六——一切染心的共同底色
先問:不論貪心、瞋心、邪見心,凡是染污的心,共同的底色是什麼?
論答只有六個:「癡逸怠不信,惛掉恒唯染。」癡就是無明、無智、無顯;逸是放逸,正是不放逸所對治;怠是懈怠,正是勤所對治;不信正是信所對治;惛是惛沈——論引本論定義「身重性、心重性,身無堪任性、心無堪任性」;掉是掉舉,「令心不靜」。
這裡有一個看似矛盾的地方,必須解開。根本《阿毘達磨》說大煩惱地法有十,還不說惛沈;本論說六,還加了惛沈——看起來又減又增。論主的回答不客氣:「天愛!汝今但知言,至不閑意旨。」(「天愛」是西方戲稱愚人的話,光記與神泰疏都記了這個俗語。)意旨在哪裡?在於那十個裡的失念、心亂、不正知、非理作意、邪勝解根本就是大地法的染污分——染污的念叫失念,染污的等持叫心亂,染污的慧叫不正知,染污的作意與勝解叫非理作意與邪勝解。既已在大地法中說過,不該重立。所以不是減了四個,是把重複的五個歸位了。
第二個易誤處:惛沈之說「身」。論設問「此是心所。如何名身」,自答「如身受言,故亦無失」——受本是心所,與五識相應時就叫身受;惛沈也如此。「身」是就相應之識說,不是說它是色法。
第三個易誤處在末尾一段。有人主張惛沈該入而不入,是因為它順等持;論主追問「誰惛沈行非掉舉行?誰掉舉行非惛沈行?」——二者從不單行。對方退一步說是「隨增說行」。論主的收束極要緊:「雖知說行隨用偏增,而依有體建立地法,故此地法唯六義成。」說『某人是惛沈行者』可以隨偏強說,但立「地法」必須依有體之法立——描述可以粗略,建制不可以。
落地:修行時要盯的常駐者只有六個。貪瞋等是客,來了又走;這六個是主,只要心一染,它們就在。
七、大不善地法二——羞恥心是最後一道門
先問:染污的心不見得都是惡的(比如與身見相應的有覆無記心),那麼使「染」升級為「惡」的,是什麼?
論答只有兩個:「唯二心所但與一切不善心俱,謂無慚、愧,故唯二種名此地法。」
這一節極短,卻最容易被輕輕帶過。要點在於「唯遍」二字同時成立:無慚無愧既遍一切不善心,又唯在不善心。前面六個大煩惱地法遍一切染心,卻不唯不善(有覆無記心也染);忿等唯不善,卻不遍。兩個條件同時滿足的,全部心所裡只有這兩個。這就是為什麼一品只裝兩個法,仍要單獨立一品——不是湊數,是判準逼出來的結果。
第二個易誤處:「無慚無愧」不是『沒有禮貌』。論在後面正頌三十三會詳釋,此處只說「此二法相如後當辯」。而正因為它是不善心的充要標記,它反過來說明了一件事:善心裡的慚與愧,不是附加的修養,是善心之所以成立的門檻。
落地:一切惡行,追到最裡面,都要通過『不覺得羞、不覺得怕』這一關。守住這一關,惡心就起不來——所以慚愧在經中被稱為世間二白法,不是修辭。
八、小煩惱地法十——為什麼叫「小」
先問:忿、覆、慳、嫉、惱、害、恨、諂、誑、憍,這十個明明兇得很,為什麼叫「小」?
論答給了三個條件:「如是類法唯修所斷,意識地起、無明相應、各別現行,故名為小煩惱地法。」頌疏把它列成三義:「謂有三義:一唯修所斷、二意識地起與無明相應、三各別現行。」
「小」不是輕,是範圍小。這是本節的第一個排誤。與大煩惱地法對照就清楚了:那六個遍一切染心,這十個只與「少分染污心」相應。論在立名時就說了:「此中若法小煩惱地所有名小煩惱地法,謂法少分染污心俱。」
第二個易誤處是「各別現行」。它的意思是一次只起一個——忿起時恨不同時起,慳起時嫉不同時起。這一條後面在數心所時會直接用到:忿等相應品之所以是「二十如不共,加忿等隨一」,正因為只加一個。
第三個易誤處:為什麼慢與疑不算小煩惱地法?光記依本論之判說得乾淨:「今依此論,一義廢立少煩惱地法十,謂唯修所斷。」慢通見修二斷、疑唯見斷,都不合「唯修所斷」;惡作雖唯修所斷,卻通善性、不唯與無明相應。三義缺一即出局,所以只有十個。
落地:既然各別現行,就可以逐個對治——這十個不是一團亂麻,是十個可以一個一個拆的結。論也預告了「此法如後隨煩惱中當廣分別」,此處只給坐標。
九、一個念頭裡到底有幾個心所
先問:說了半天品類,具體到欲界的一念心,究竟有幾個心所同時在?
論把欲界心分五類,逐類報數:善心必二十二(十大地法、十大善地法、尋、伺),有惡作時二十三;不善的不共無明品與見相應品各二十(十大地法、六大煩惱地法、二大不善地法、尋、伺);貪瞋慢疑四煩惱品、忿等隨煩惱品、不善惡作品各二十一;有覆無記品十八;無覆無記品十二;睡眠通三性,隨在哪一品都增一。
第一個排誤在『見不增數』。不善見相應心裡明明多了一個邪見,為什麼還是二十?論答「非見增故有二十一,以即於十大地法中慧用差別說為見故」——見不是第十一個法,是慧的作用差別。這一條同時解釋了為什麼有覆無記品(與身見邊見相應)也只有十八。
第二個排誤在「惡作」二字。惡作不是「作惡」,也不是追悔本身的行相。論給了三重解釋:從所緣立名(「應知此中緣惡作法說名惡作,謂緣惡作心追悔性」,如緣空之定叫空解脫門、緣不淨之無貪叫不淨);從所依立名(如說一切村邑國土都來集會,其實來的是人);從果體假立因名(如說六觸處名宿作業)。頌疏把第一義點得最直白:「惡作是境,非追悔也。今名追悔為惡作者,從境為名也。」而且所緣未作之事也可以叫惡作——「如追悔言我先不作如是事業,是我惡作」。
第三個排誤在「不共無明」。它不是『不與人共有的無明』,是獨頭的無明——「謂此心品唯有無明,無有所餘貪煩惱等」。
落地:這一節把心從一團感覺變成一張可以數的表。它的教學價值不在背下數字,而在建立一個習慣——問一念心『有幾個心所』是一個有答案的問題。至於外方諸師許惡作通無記而成十三,論如實記下而不判,這也是讀法的一課。
十、上界心所的遞減——修定的地圖
先問:進了禪定,心所會變多還是變少?
論答是遞減:「初靜慮中於前所說諸心所法,除唯不善、惡作、睡眠,餘皆具有。」「唯不善者」指瞋,以及除諂誑憍之外的忿等七個小煩惱,加上無慚無愧。中間靜慮再除尋。第二靜慮以上乃至無色界再除「伺等」——「等」字所除是諂與誑。
易誤處一:遞減不等於心變弱。減掉的是不能在那一地存在的心所,不是心的功能被削。光記把理由說得很清楚:「定所滋潤,無瞋等惑不善法故無不善,無憂根故無惡作,無叚食故無睡眠。」頌疏更把兩條對應點明:「除惡作者,惡作與憂根相應,色界離憂,故無惡作。除睡眠者,色界無段食,故無睡眠也。」——每一項脫落都有它的所以然,不是憑空規定。
易誤處二:諂誑「極至梵天」不是在說梵王壞。論引了一段極生動的經:馬勝苾芻問大梵王「此四大種當於何位盡滅無餘」,梵王不知道,當眾「便矯亂答:我於此梵眾是大梵,自在作者、化者、生者、養者,是一切父」,說完把人拉出眾外,「引出眾外諂言愧謝,令還問佛」。這一段是要證成一件事——只要還有君臣尊卑「眾相依」的結構,就還有諂誑的餘地;二禪以上沒有這結構,所以沒有這兩個心所。
落地:這是一張修定的地形圖。它告訴修行人:某些煩惱不是靠對治斷掉的,是到了某一地它就無處可依。反過來說,若還在欲界而想要初靜慮的心相,那就要看瞋、惡作、睡眠這三樣還在不在。
十一、無慚無愧與愛敬——對人的心與對法的心
先問:慚與愧到底差在哪裡?愛與敬又差在哪裡?
論給無慚無愧兩重解釋。第一重就境分:「於諸功德及有德者,無敬無崇、無所忌難、無所隨屬,說名無慚」——對的是德與有德者;「為諸善士所訶厭法說名為罪,於此罪中不見怖畏說名無愧」——對的是罪與罪果。第二重是「有餘師說」:自觀無恥名無慚,觀他無恥名無愧。
易誤處一:「不見怖」不是在說見或不見。論設了一個很細的問答:若是『見了而不怖』,那顯的該是邪智;若是『不見其怖果』,那顯的該是無明——兩邊都有過。論主的答覆是:「此言不顯見與不見……此顯有法是隨煩惱為彼二因,說名無愧。」這句話是要指出另有一個法在,它是邪智與無明的近因,不是在描述見不見。
易誤處二:愛不等於貪。論說「愛謂愛樂,體即是信」,隨即分二:「有染謂貪,如愛妻子等。無染謂信,如愛師長等。」並作四句:緣苦集之信是有信非愛(忍可它是苦,卻不可愛樂);諸染污愛是有愛非信;緣滅道之信是信愛俱通;除此為第四句。同一個「愛」字,染與不染要分開讀。
易誤處三:愛敬「唯於欲色有」,不是說信與慚在無色界沒有。論自己設難自答:「愛敬有二,謂緣於法補特伽羅,緣法愛敬通三界有。此中意說緣補特伽羅者,故欲色有,無色界無。」——緣人的愛敬才受界限,緣法的不受。
落地:論在此處把「對人」與「對法」分成兩軌,還就人作了四句——於妻子有愛無敬、於他師有敬無愛、於自師父母有愛有敬、餘為第四句。這四句不是分類遊戲,是提醒:敬與愛可以各自單獨出現,一段關係裡有沒有敬,和有沒有愛,是兩個問題。
十二、尋伺與慢憍——一個「不許」與一個『對誰』
先問:尋是心之麁、伺是心之細,麁細相違,怎能在同一個心裡?
論記了兩家的解釋。第一家設喻:冷水上浮著熟酥,上面又有烈日照著,「酥因水日非釋非凝」——一個心也如此,由尋故不太細、由伺故不太麁。第二家說尋伺是語言行,引經「要有尋伺方有語言」,麁者名尋、細者名伺。
這一節最要緊的,是論主對兩家都不放過。對第一家:水與日只是凝釋之因,「日體非凝釋」——那麼尋伺也只是麁細之因,不是麁細之體。又麁細是相待而立的,界地上下互相對照,「乃至有頂應有尋伺」。對第二家:若真有麁細二別體類,理上無違;「然無別體類,故成違理,一體類中無容上下俱時起故」。最後收成一句:「由是應知,尋伺二法定不可執一心相應。」有人再引經「初靜慮具足五支」來反問,論答「具五支言就一地說,非一剎那」。
易誤處在這裡:不要把尋伺讀成『思考』與「專注」。論定的是麁細二性,不是兩種功能;正因為只是麁細,論主才能用「相待而立」把它問倒。
慢與憍是另一對。「慢謂對他心自舉性,稱量自他德類差別」;「憍謂染著自法為先,令心傲逸無所顧性」。分別只在一個字:慢對他,憍對自。慢要有比較的對象,憍不必——自己染著自己的種姓、色力就夠了。論還記了餘師一個譬喻:「如因酒生欣舉差別說名為醉,如是貪生欣舉差別說名為憍。」
落地:這兩對合看,教的是同一件事——讀論要留意「有作是釋」「有餘師說」「有說」這些字。本節四家之說俱在,論主取捨分明;不辨這些標記,就會把某一家的話當成論的定說。
十三、心意識體一,相應之義有五
先問:心、意、識是三個東西,還是一個東西的三個名字?
論答得極簡:「集起故名心,思量故名意,了別故名識。」又記第二說:「淨不淨界種種差別故名為心,即此為他作所依止故名為意,作能依止故名為識。」結論是「故心、意、識三名所詮,義雖有異而體是一」。
同樣的道理再推一次:心心所也有四個名字——有所依(託所依根)、有所緣(取所緣境)、有行相(於所緣品類差別等起行相)、相應(等和合)。而「相應」之義有五:「謂心心所五義平等故說相應,所依所緣行相時事皆平等故。」
易誤處一:「體一」不是說沒有分工。三個名字各有所詮之義,只是不另立三個體。神泰疏用一個樹喻來說「集起」:「集起故名心,如樹有心能集起枝條花果」——樹心不是另一樣東西,卻是枝條花果所從出。
易誤處二:「行相」不是「所緣」。這是本節最易走的一步。光記設了一個鏡喻把它分開:「猶如明鏡對眾色相皆現鏡面,此所現像而非所照,然約像現說鏡能照」——鏡面上現的像,不是鏡所照的那個物;「此所現者名為行相」。頌疏說得更直白:「如緣青境心及心所,皆帶青上影像,此識上相名為行相。」行相在能緣這一邊,所緣在那一邊。
易誤處三:「事平等」不是數目相等。論自己補了一句:「事平等者,一相應中如心體一,諸心所法各各亦爾。」意思是各各都只有一個——一個相應之中不會有兩個受、兩個想。
落地:五義平等是有部判定「相應」的定義式。往後凡遇『某法與某法相應』,都可以回頭用這五條驗一遍:同依、同緣、同行相、同時、各一。
十四、既不是色也不是心的那一類
先問:得、非得、同分這些既非色又非心的東西,到底算什麼?
論答:「如是諸法心不相應,非色等性,行蘊所攝,是故名心不相應行。」頌先總列:「心不相應行,得非得同分,無想二定命,相名身等類。」頌疏把十四個名字列全:得、非得、同分、無想果、無想定、滅盡定、命根、生、住、異、滅、名身、句身、文身。
易誤處一:「不相應」不是『與心無關』。它是說不與心相應——即不具備上一節那五義平等。它們仍然依心色分位而立,仍在有為法中,只是不入心所之列。
易誤處二:不要把它讀成無為。論在此已明說「行蘊所攝」,是有為;無為是第五品,本卷開頭就說了「無為無生,此中不說」。
易誤處三:本卷只總標,不遍釋。論總列十四之後,立刻收縮:「於中且辯得非得相」——後面十四個裡只講頭兩個,其餘留到下卷。一個「且」字要看見。
落地:這一品是有部法系裡最受質疑的一位——把『有沒有』『同不同類』『活不活著』這些關係與狀態,都立成了獨立的法。也正因為它最受質疑,本卷接下來才會用極長的篇幅,只為辯護頭一個「得」。讀懂了得,就讀懂了這一整品的立法動機。
十五、「得」是什麼——擁有這件事被立成了一個法
先問:說『我有戒』『我有慧』,那個「有」是什麼?
論答:「得有二種,一者未得已失今獲、二者得已不失成就。」今時到手叫獲(未曾得、或得而復失者),保持不失叫成就,兩者合稱得;非得與此相違。至於它在哪裡有:「於自相續及二滅中。」
易誤處一:得不是所得之法。得是另一個法,它使某法「屬於」某個相續。所以論要問「於何法中有得非得」,而不是問『什麼法是得』。
易誤處二:範圍極嚴。只在自己的相續裡——「非他相續,無有成就他身法故」;不在非情上——「非非相續,無有成就非情法故」。無為法裡也只有擇滅、非擇滅二者有得,虛空沒有:「決定無有成就虛空,故於虛空不言有得,以得無故非得亦無。」理由是本宗「宗明得非得,相翻而立故」——沒有得,就連非得也不能說。
易誤處三:一切有情都成就非擇滅。論引對法論說:除了見道最初剎那那位具縛聖者、以及一切具縛異生之外,「諸餘有情皆成擇滅」;而非擇滅則「一切有情無不成就」——因為每一剎那都有法因缺緣而永不生。
落地:這一節在做一件很大的事——把「擁有」從一個描述詞變成一個實法。斷了煩惱、得了戒、證了滅,這些說法在有部這裡都不再只是說法,而各有一個「得」在承擔。理解了這個動機,下一節那場長諍才有分量。
十六、別物之諍——同一段裡的兩宗與論主的雙印
先問:憑什麼說另有一個東西叫「得」?
有部先舉聖言:「契經說故。如契經言:聖者於彼十無學法,以生以得以成就故,已斷五支。」經部立刻反難:那麼「有轉輪王成就七寶」怎麼說?輪寶珠寶是非情、象馬女主是他相續,難道也成就?有部退到「自在」:「此中自在說名成就,謂轉輪王於彼七寶有自在力,隨樂轉故。」經部追一句:既然那裡「自在」就夠了,別處為什麼要另立一物?
接著經部改用量破:「所執得無體可知,如色聲等或貪瞋等;無用可知,如眼耳等,故無容有別物名得。」——看不到,也推不出。再破『得是生因』之說:若得是生因,無為不生就該沒有得;界地轉易、離染時法無得,將來又怎麼生;若說俱生得是生因,那四相中的生與生生還作什麼;非情無得就該永不生;具縛者三品煩惱現起的差別也該沒有,因為得無差別。有部退守到「於差別為建立因」——沒有得,就沒法區分異生與聖者。經部答:差別在所依身,不在得——「令所依身轉變異本」,「猶如種子火所焚燒,轉變異前無能生用」,所以「如是二種但假非實」。
於是「種子」一詞被逼了出來:「此中何法名為種子?謂名與色於生自果所有展轉隣近功能,此由相續轉變差別。」論還逐字自釋三義——轉變是「相續中前後異性」,相續是「因果性三世諸行」,差別是「有無間生果功能」。
最要緊的一步在收尾。毘婆沙師堅持二種「皆有別物實而非假」,而論主下了一句雙印:「如是二途皆為善說。所以者何?不違理故、我所宗故。」——不違理,說的是經部;我所宗,說的是有部。
易誤處:這一段常被讀成『論主破了有部』。論文並沒有這樣說。它給的是兩個理由並列,一句話裡放了兩宗的位置。至於這一句到底偏向誰、偏多少,是後代四疏各自著力之處,此處不判。
落地:這是全卷最值得慢讀的一段。它示範了一種論辯體例——立、難、退、再難、再退、雙印。而「種子」在這裡第一次以正式定義出現,它後來走了多遠,是另一段公案;本卷只要記住:它是在為「擁有」找一個不必立實法的解釋時被逼出來的。
十七、得的五門差別——一張通用的分別法式
先問:得本身是什麼性、屬什麼世、繫什麼界?
論用五門作答。三世門:「三世法得各有三種,謂過去法有過去得、有未來得、有現在得」,未來現在亦爾。三性門:「善等法得唯善等」。界繫門:「有繫法得唯自界」,而「無繫法得通四種」——三界得加無漏得。三學門:有學法得唯有學,無學法得唯無學,非學非無學之得則通三。三斷門:見修所斷法各有見修所斷之得,非所斷法之得則通二。
易誤處一:『得隨所得判性』不是唯一規則。論在界繫門裡就分了三路:「非擇滅得,通三界繫。若擇滅得,色無色繫及與無漏。道諦得,唯無漏故。」為什麼不一致?因為擇滅本身無作用,它的得隨能證之道判;非擇滅也無作用,它的得隨所依身判;有為法的得才隨所得之法判。光記把這三條並列而說,正是為了防止讀者把一條規則推到底。
易誤處二:頌文與長行不等量。頌只說「非學無學三,非所斷二種」,長行卻把三學、三斷都具說了。這不是長行多說,是頌文字窄——讀頌要知道它省了什麼。
落地:三世、三性、界繫、三學、三斷——這五門是俱舍全論通用的分別法式。此處第一次完整示範,後面每遇一法都可以照這五門追問一遍。
十八、無記之得為何只能俱起
先問:既然說三世法各有三世之得,是不是每一法都如此?
論立刻簡別:「無覆無記得唯俱起,無前後生,勢力劣故。」法在過去得也過去,法在現在得也現在。但有例外:「除眼耳通及能變化」——天眼通、天耳通之慧與能變化之心,「勢力強故、加行差別所成辦故」,雖是無覆無記,卻有前後得與俱起得。工巧處、威儀路若極為數習者,也許如此。有覆無記的表色之得也只有俱起,因為「雖有上品而亦不能發無表故勢力微劣」。欲界繫的善色不善色則「無前起」,只有俱生與後起之得。
易誤處一:「除二通變化」不是說二通不屬無記。它們仍是無覆無記,只是勢力強,所以在得的三世上例外。
易誤處二:「勢力」是一個解釋槓桿,不是一個玄詞。論用它來區分兩類無記:任運而起的(異熟生等)勢力劣,加行修來的(二通變化、極數習的工巧威儀)勢力強。強弱之別落在『是不是靠功夫得來的』上。
落地:這一節示範了論的一種手法——先立通則,再逐一簡別例外,而每個例外都給得出理由。這種『通則加簡別』的寫法,往後在業品、隨眠品裡會反覆出現。
十九、非得、異生性,與那個「無窮過」
先問:凡夫之所以是凡夫,是多了什麼,還是少了什麼?
論的答案是:少了。「由許聖道非得,說名異生性故。」異生性不是一個實德,是聖道的非得——沒有得到聖法的那個「沒有」,被立成了一個法。論引本論為證:「云何異生性?謂不獲聖法。」並補一句「不獲即是非得異名」。
非得本身的差別也用門說:三性上「一切非得皆唯無覆無記性攝」;三世上「過去未來各有三種,謂現在法決定無有現在非得」——因為法既現在,必是所得者,必有得;界繫上三界法與不繫法「各三非得」,隨所依身而定。
易誤處一:「不獲一切」與「純」字。有人問:不獲哪些聖法才算?論答「謂不獲一切,不別說故」,並解釋「此不獲言,表離於獲」——若不是這樣,諸佛也不成就聲聞獨覺種性聖法,豈不也叫異生。又有人說本論該加個「純」字,論答不必:「此一句中含純義故,如說此類食水食風。」——說某類眾生食水食風,不加「純」字也知道是純食。
易誤處二:論主此處印可的是經部。第二家說不獲苦法智忍及俱生法名異生性,論主評「若爾,重說唐捐其功」,隨即說「如經部師,所說為善」,並記其義:「謂曾未生聖法相續分位差別名異生性。」——這是論文直說的取捨,不是後人的推斷。
易誤處三:「無窮過」不是真的無窮。得復有得、非得復有非得,豈不無窮?論答不無窮,因為「許得展轉更相成故」——法生時三法俱起:「第一本法、第二法得、第三得得」;法得成就本法與得得,得得成就法得,互相成就,鏈條就收住了。光記把兩個名字分開:「法之得故名為法得,即是大得。大得之得名為得得,即小得也。」第二剎那六法、第三剎那十八法,「如是諸得後後轉增」。論末以一句收:諸得「無對礙故互相容受。若不爾者,一有情得虛空不容,況第二等」。神泰疏於此設了一個很美的喻——如秋細霧遍滿十方。
落地:這一節把凡與聖之別,安在一個「沒有」上;而經部把同一件事改說成相續的分位差別,論主印可了。同一個問題,兩種安法:一種要立法,一種只要說位。這一組對照,是本卷留給往後讀者最長的一條線。
承衍:四疏與二造之鏡
以上是本卷自身之義。此下另以古德之疏與同系之論旁照——鏡非論,只是換幾種讀法看同一卷。
四疏的分工。普光《俱舍論記》逐句牒釋,最詳,遇異說必記;法寶《俱舍論疏》好作四句簡別,且不憚評前人;圓暉《俱舍論頌疏》科文最清、譬喻最便初學;神泰《俱舍論疏》逐段標數,科文最細,且時取大乘名相為對照。四家同標本卷為當品大文第二,唯法寶與神泰逕標二十七頌之量。
四疏互異最烈的一處,是一段舊案。論說欲界微聚『無聲有八事』,而《發智論》說欲色界恒成就聲——二文如何相容?舊時念法師取一折衷之解,神泰疏斥之為大謬,普光記下這場爭執並自判「今詳二德互有是非」。法寶則反過來把兩家都駁了,說「泰師、光師妄解念法師意」,又斷言「念法師義既順論文,泰、光二師即謬破耳」。四家之中此處分歧最深。三家之判並錄,不判是非。
微聚是假是實,四家亦不齊。普光存二微之分而判本論據色聚微;法寶逕判「二釋之中後釋為善」;圓暉不涉假實,只釋「微是細義」;神泰引《順正理論》體用之辨而不作判。體增用增一節亦然:普光記《正理》取體增、本論取用增,法寶則兩非之——「然詳體增、用增,未為盡理」,又下一句「故知法性隨緣不定」。
輕安一段的歸屬也有異解。普光於「應知此中身輕安者身堪任性」處明判「諸師多解此文是說一切有部答者,此解謬矣」;法寶則對經部之難自下按語「今詳此難非為切當」;神泰把全段判為薩婆多與經部往復九番;圓暉此段從略不出。
翻對之數是另一組互異。神泰疏記古師之說『翻八有體、翻二無體』而斥其不然,主張「翻十皆有體」,並引舊譯《俱舍》為證。普光與法寶則各作正翻十、傍翻十一之大表,二表法目全同,唯法寶作「翻掉舉為行捨」而普光作「翻掉舉為捨」。
眾賢之破,集中在四處。其一,破經部先軌上座之「大地唯三」——上座主張經只說俱起受想思,故大地法唯三;眾賢斥為「上座所言大地唯三,極為迷謬」,並引經證欲等實有別體。其二,回護作意與捨之相違——眾賢以「捨如持稱進止平等」為解,而後說「經主所難,謂有警覺無警覺性,作意與捨應互相違,如是善成」。其三,責世親於無慚無愧處橫申過難——「經主此中誤取彼情橫申過難」。其四,於得與種子處著力最重:既答「經主此中作如是問:何緣知有別物名得」,又斷「經主於中雖隨自執多有所說而無所成,所執種子理不成故」,並把種子的異名一一列出——或名隨界、或名熏習、或名功能、或名不失、或名增長;於異生性則說「若異生性無別有體,便違此經」。一義二宗,並錄不判勝負。
真諦舊譯之異,本卷有五處值得並看。其一,五品之立,二譯數同序同,唯第三第四之名異(心所與心法、心不相應行與不相應)。其二,大地法十,法數同而三名異、列序亦異。其三,無慚與無愧二名在二譯中互易。其四,小煩惱地法十,法數同而逐名之配當諸本無明文,列而不判。其五,非得之世——玄奘本作「謂現在法決定無有現在非得」,舊譯則作相反之說;普光、圓暉、神泰三家於此皆逕標舊譯為翻譯之謬,法寶於此無評。三家之判並錄,二譯優劣之裁不在此處。
七十五法與百法之對照,古德已自為之。法寶於大地法十下逕作對照——「有部之宗十法遍行,大乘之中唯五遍行」;又於小煩惱地法下記假實之異——「又此忿等,大乘中說謂嗔分等,故是假法。此宗皆是實有性」。神泰於相應五義下引《瑜伽》為對,說「故瑜伽論云:所依同、所緣同、行相不同」,末更以見相二分相配——「行相如大乘相分,事平等如大乘見分也」。本卷所立五品,與後出百法之五位,數同而序異;心一開為八,心所四十六對五十一,色法同十一,不相應十四對二十四,無為三對六。列其異同,不判優劣。
心意識體一與後代八識之立,是同一問題的兩個時代。本卷說三名一體,是就名義差別而說;後來唯識於同一處立八識之別,所依的是另一組問題。二者並錄為坐標,關係之定性不在此節。
以上諸鏡,皆四疏與同系諸論所增,非本卷頌與長行之原話。並錄不判,各還其位。
Opening this fascicle, Vasubandhu neither establishes his own position nor refutes another’s; he asks a single question:
“It should now be pondered whether, since all conditioned dharmas differ in their characteristics and therefore differ severally in their arising, there are any dharmas that must arise together—there are dharmas that definitely arise together.”
That conditioned dharmas differ in characteristic and differ in arising is common sense. Being severally different, they ought not to be bound together; so then, are there dharmas that cannot but arise together? The answer comes very fast: there are. And with the answer the skeleton of the whole treatise comes out with it—“all dharmas fall in brief into five classes: first form, second mind, third mental factors, fourth formations not associated with mind, fifth the unconditioned.”
The establishing of the five classes is the framework of what later ages call the seventy-five dharmas. The unconditioned does not arise, and so is not treated in this fascicle; of the remaining four, each is asked in turn, ‘how do you arise together?’ Puguang marks this passage as the chapter’s second major section, saying that it is “analyzing function in terms of co-arising”—the preceding Chapter on the Elements stated all dharmas in terms of entity, and here they are stated in terms of function. The same body of dharmas, looked at once again from another angle.
The nineteen doctrinal nodes below are the whole content of that second look.
1. Even the Smallest Particle of Matter Is Not a Single Thing
Ask first: how many things at least does the smallest piece of matter in the world require in order to stand?
The treatise answers: “when the aggregation of form reaches its finest, the name minute aggregate is established for it, to show that there is nothing finer than this. In the desire realm, having neither sound nor faculty, eight entities arise together and not one may be lacking.” The eight entities are the four great elements—earth, water, fire, and wind—together with four kinds of derived form: color, odor, flavor, and the tangible. If the aggregate contains the body faculty it is nine entities; if it contains one of the eye, ear, nose, or tongue it is ten (an aggregate containing the eye faculty must contain the body faculty as well, hence nine plus one). If sound is present, one more is added to each, making nine, ten, or eleven.
What is most easily misread are the two words “minute aggregate.” It is not “ultimate atom.” Puguang distinguishes this very sharply: “it should be known that ‘minute’ is of two kinds: first, the minute that is an aggregate of form, namely the least possible eight entities arising together, which cannot be reduced—this treatise speaks on that basis; second, the minute that is an ultimate atom, namely the least possible form, which cannot be divided further—the Treatise Conforming to Correct Principle speaks on that basis.” What this treatise speaks of is the smallest aggregate, not the smallest particle; and so Puguang also says, “a minute aggregate is provisional, and what is provisional must rest on what is real”—beneath this name there are eight real dharmas from the start. Yuanhui brings out the word “desire” as well: “‘desire’ means the desire realm; ‘minute’ has the sense of fine and does not mean the ultimate atom.”
A second point easily mistaken: if the four great elements are inseparable, why does touching gold give only hardness, and touching water only wetness? The treatise’s reply is not that ‘the other three are absent,’ but that “in that aggregate the one whose force predominates is clearly perceptible, while the entities of the others are not absent”—and it offers two everyday similes: a needle-point bound together with a bamboo tally, where only the needle is felt; salt mixed with flour, where only the saltiness is tasted. Whether a thing shows is a matter of force; whether it is there is a matter of entity, and the two must not be run together. Pressed a step further—‘how is it known that the other three are really there?’—the treatise answers, “because there are the operations of gathering, ripening, increasing, and sustaining”: water gathers, fire ripens, wind increases, earth upholds; all four operations are still at work, and so all four elements are present.
As to how this is to be read: this section sets the key of the whole fascicle. It first demonstrates upon matter that ‘no dharma arises alone,’ so that the later “necessarily together” of mind is not a new doctrine but the same line of reasoning carried up to mind. And the last question is especially worth savoring—is “entity” said with reference to substance or to sense field? The treatise answers that it is in one part with reference to substance and in one part to sense field, and then closes off the dispute itself: “what need is there for such distinguishing talk? Speech arises as one pleases; it is the sense that should be pondered.” The number attaching to a term may be argued over; the doctrine does not rest on the number.
2. Mind and Mental Factors: Lacking One, None Arises
Ask first: within a single thought, does mind arise first and then bring feeling, perception, and volition along with it, or do they light up together?
The treatise answers: “mind and mental factors necessarily arise together; should any one be lacking, the rest do not arise.” There is no before and after. The stanza’s second half, “formations, marks, and some with acquisition,” speaks of two further matters: when all conditioned formations arise they necessarily arise together with the four marks of arising, abiding, change, and cessation; and among the formations “only dharmas of a sentient being arise together with acquisition,” dharmas of what is insentient being otherwise—which is why only “some” can be said.
There is a mechanism here for reading stanzas. The five characters “formations, marks, and some with acquisition” look like three coordinate terms, but they are not. Yuanhui breaks it open: “the two words ‘necessarily together’ in the preceding line flow down to this, and it should read ‘formations and marks necessarily together.’” That is, the “necessarily together” of the previous line is to be read straight through—formations and the four marks are necessarily together, while formations and acquisition are only sometimes together. The word “some” is not vagueness but a discrimination: a stone too is a formation, and a stone has no acquisition.
Where does this land? In its cancelling of a very natural picture—that there is a subject called “mind” standing there first and then producing various mental activities. The treatise says there is no such thing: mind as sovereign and the mental factors are lamps in one cluster lit at the same moment, and pull out any one of them and the whole cluster goes dark. Everything later in the fascicle—the counting of mental factors, the analysis of their classes—is built on this sentence; if mental factors could exist apart from mind, or mind arise apart from mental factors, those numbers would mean nothing at all.
3. Why Mental Factors Fall into Five Classes—“Ground” Is a Word of Scope
Ask first: mental factors are dozens in number; why exactly five classes, and on what basis?
The treatise answers: “the dharmas that are mental factors fall provisionally into five classes. Which five? First, the factors of the great ground; second, the factors of the great wholesome ground; third, the factors of the great defiled ground; fourth, the factors of the great unwholesome ground; fifth, the factors of the small defiled ground.” And the pivot of the division lies in the single word “ground”: “ground means the place of activity; if this dharma is the place in which that dharma is active, this dharma is said to be the ground of that.”
What is most easily misunderstood are the two words “great ground.” It does not mean a vast expanse; it refers to mind as sovereign. Puguang separates three layers very finely—“great” alone refers to feeling and the other ten dharmas; “great ground” refers to mind as sovereign; “factors of the great ground” returns again to feeling and the other ten. So “factors of the great ground” means: those dharmas that appear upon ‘the ground in which the great dharmas are active.’ In the same way the great wholesome ground is the wholesome mind, the great defiled ground the defiled mind, the great unwholesome ground the unwholesome mind, and the small defiled ground a small portion of defiled minds.
A second point easily mistaken: the five classes are not a ranking of value nor a sorting into good and bad. They are divided by scope of appearance. Puguang has a very important sentence here: “following this treatise now, the factors of the great ground and the rest are established and rejected each by a single sense. This is the treatise’s own capacity, and is not a matter of anyone’s interpretation.” The masters of old divided the five classes by five senses, by eight, by nine (Shentai’s commentary records all these numbers of the old masters); this treatise uses one sense only—pervading or not pervading, exclusively or not exclusively—and with that the five classes are cleanly divided.
Where it lands: this is a methodology for a psychology of classification. It does not ask ‘is this mental factor good?’ but only ‘over how wide a scope does it appear?’ Once this layer is grasped, every “only” and every “pervading” in the five sections below stops being rhetoric and becomes a criterion.
4. The Ten Factors of the Great Ground—The Ten Faces Present in Every Thought
Ask first: which mental factors are indispensable to every mind, in every moment?
The treatise lists ten dharmas: “feeling is the three kinds of reception: painful, pleasant, and neither”; “perception is the taking up of the distinguishing characteristics of an object”; “volition is what causes mind to fabricate”; “contact arises from the coming together of faculty, object, and consciousness, and is able to make touch”; “desire is seeking after the work to be done”; “discernment is the ability to select among dharmas”; “mindfulness is holding the object clearly in mind without losing it”; “attention is what causes mind to be alert”; “resolve is the ability to endorse an object”; “concentration is mind’s being one-pointed upon a single object.”
There are four places in this section where a reader most easily goes astray. First, before listing the ten dharmas the treatise sets down two characters: “it is transmitted that the ten dharmas listed are present together and pervasively in every moment of mind.” The single word “transmitted” is read by the ancient masters with one voice as marking the author’s distance from the account he reports: Puguang judges outright in this very passage that “the Vaibhāṣikas transmit thus: the ten dharmas listed …” and that “the author of the treatise inclines to the Sautrāntikas and does not credit that all ten dharmas have separate entities, and therefore says ‘it is transmitted’”; Fabao likewise says, “it means that he is transmitting the Vaibhāṣika masters’ account, and therefore says ‘it is transmitted.’” This reading comes from the Tang commentaries and is not said by the treatise itself; in reading the Kośa one must stay alert to such wording. Second, “discernment” is not wisdom in the moral sense but merely selecting—which is why it can be present in one mind together with “doubt”: it is precisely because reckoning is made on both sides of a hesitation that the hesitation is what it is. Third, “concentration” is not the same as entering an absorption; Yuanhui explains it as “concentration, here rendered ‘even holding,’ evenly holds mind as it turns upon a single object, and holds the mental factors too, being named from what is strongest, namely mind”—it is present even in a scattered mind, only weakly. Fourth, the ten dharmas are not ten steps but ten aspects of one and the same moment; the treatise itself has forestalled this misreading: “the characteristics of mind and mental factors are subtle: it is hard enough to distinguish them one by one as they succeed one another, still more so those simultaneously present within one moment.”
Where it lands: these ten names give you a set of tools for taking your own mind apart. Take any present thought and you may ask: what does this thought receive—pain, pleasure, or neither (feeling)? What characteristic has it taken up (perception)? Where is mind being pushed (volition)? What has it met (contact)? What does it want (desire)? What is it distinguishing (discernment)? What is it holding in mind (mindfulness)? By what was it roused (attention)? What has it settled upon (resolve)? On which object does mind rest (concentration)?—ask the ten questions through and the thought lies open.
5. The Ten Factors of the Great Wholesome Ground—Ten Indicators of a Wholesome Mind
Ask first: on what grounds does a mind count as a wholesome mind?
The treatise answers: ten dharmas alone both ‘pervade wholesome minds and belong to wholesome minds alone’—confidence, heedfulness, pliancy, equanimity, conscience, shame, non-greed, non-hatred, non-harming, and diligence. One by one: “confidence is what makes mind clear and settled,” or else it is “the immediate acceptance and endorsement of the truths, the jewels, and karma and its results”; heedfulness is “the cultivating of wholesome dharmas and the keeping apart from unwholesome dharmas,” and what is called cultivating is “the unwavering focus upon what is wholesome”; pliancy is “mind’s workability”; equanimity is “mind’s evenness, its being without alertness”; non-greed and non-hatred are called the two roots; non-harming is “the absence of harm and distress”; diligence has for its nature “the making of mind vigorous.”
Confidence is most easily read as ‘believing in some object.’ The first sense the treatise gives is not an object but a state—making mind clear and settled. Yuanhui offers a very good simile for it: “confidence is clarifying; as a water-clearing gem can clear turbid water, so the gem of confidence in mind makes mind clear and settled.” Puguang cites the same simile more fully from the Entrance into Abhidharma: “as a water-clearing gem placed in a pool makes all the turbid and foul water at once clear, so the gem of confidence within the pool of mind at once expels all mind’s turbidity and foulness.”—Confidence is that gem, not one of the things floating in the pool.
A second point easily mistaken: “equanimity” is not indifference and not coldness but mind’s evenness; and that it should be present in one mind together with “attention” (which has alertness) the treatise itself finds hard, and so sets out a question and answer expressly: “how can it be said that within one mind there is alertness and the absence of alertness? For attention and equanimity arise in association.” The reply is “this one has alertness, upon that one there is none; the two being thus quite distinct, what conflict can there be?”—alertness belongs to attention, non-alertness to equanimity, each upon its own entity, not contending upon one and the same entity.
A third point easily mistaken: the missing third wholesome root, non-delusion, is absent not because non-delusion is not a wholesome root. The treatise says so plainly: “the wholesome root non-delusion has discernment for its nature, and so has already been stated above among the factors of the great ground and is not stated a second time as a factor of the great wholesome ground.” Its entity is discernment, and discernment is already among the factors of the great ground; it is not established twice.
Where it lands: these ten words may be taken as a checklist. Is mind clear (confidence)? Is it on guard (heedfulness)? Are body and mind workable (pliancy)? Does it lean (equanimity)? Does it know disgrace before itself (conscience)? Does it know fear of wrongdoing (shame)? Unsticking (non-greed), unvexed (non-hatred), not harming others (non-harming)? Is effort being put out (diligence)?—only with all ten present is it a wholesome mind; lacking one, that thought is not a complete wholesome one.
6. The Six Factors of the Great Defiled Ground—The Ground Tone Common to Every Defiled Mind
Ask first: greedy mind, hating mind, mind of wrong view—whatever is defiled, what is its common ground tone?
The treatise answers with only six: “delusion, heedlessness, indolence, lack of confidence, torpor, and restlessness are constant and belong to defiled minds alone.” Delusion is ignorance, absence of cognition, absence of manifestation; heedlessness is precisely what heedfulness counteracts; indolence is precisely what diligence counteracts; lack of confidence is precisely what confidence counteracts; torpor the treatise defines by citing the root treatise—“heaviness of body and of mind, unworkability of body and of mind”; restlessness “makes mind unable to be still.”
There is an apparent contradiction here that must be untied. The root Abhidharma says there are ten factors of the great defiled ground and does not include torpor; this treatise says six and adds torpor—it looks like both a subtraction and an addition. The author of the treatise answers without ceremony: “Beloved of the gods! You now know only the letter and do not grasp the intent.” (“Beloved of the gods” is a westerners’ jesting term for a fool; both Puguang and Shentai record the idiom.) Where is the intent? In this: that among those ten, lost mindfulness, distracted mind, incorrect knowing, improper attention, and wrong resolve are simply the defiled portion of the factors of the great ground—defiled mindfulness is called lost mindfulness, defiled concentration distracted mind, defiled discernment incorrect knowing, and defiled attention and resolve improper attention and wrong resolve. Having already been stated among the factors of the great ground, they are not to be established a second time. So four were not subtracted; five that were duplicates were put back in their places.
A second point easily mistaken: torpor being spoken of as “bodily.” The treatise sets the question, “this is a mental factor; how then is it called bodily?” and answers itself, “it is said as ‘bodily feeling’ is said, and so there is no fault”—feeling is properly a mental factor and is called bodily feeling when associated with the five consciousnesses; so it is with torpor. “Bodily” is said with reference to the consciousness it is associated with, and does not mean that it is form.
A third point easily mistaken lies in the closing passage. Some maintain that torpor ought to have been included and was not because it conforms to concentration; the author of the treatise presses: “who is of the mode of torpor and not of restlessness? Who is of the mode of restlessness and not of torpor?”—the two never operate singly. The other side falls back on ‘mode is said according to what predominates.’ The author of the treatise’s conclusion is of the first importance: “granted that ‘mode’ is said according to the predominance of operation, the establishing of a ground-factor must be made in dependence on a dharma that has its own entity, and so it is only as six that this ground-factor holds good.” To say ‘such a person is of the mode of torpor’ may be said according to what predominates, but establishing a ‘ground-factor’ must rest on a dharma with its own entity—description may be rough; institution may not.
Where it lands: in practice there are only six permanent residents to watch. Greed, hatred, and the rest are guests, coming and going; these six are the hosts, and the moment mind is defiled they are there.
7. The Two Factors of the Great Unwholesome Ground—A Sense of Disgrace Is the Last Door
Ask first: not every defiled mind is evil (an obscured-indeterminate mind associated with the view of self, for instance); what, then, raises “defiled” to “evil”?
The treatise answers with only two: “only two mental factors arise together with every unwholesome mind, namely non-conscience and shamelessness, and so these two alone are called factors of this ground.”
This section is extremely short and is for that reason most easily passed over lightly. The point is that “pervading” and “only” hold at the same time: non-conscience and shamelessness both pervade every unwholesome mind and belong to unwholesome minds alone. The six factors of the great defiled ground above pervade every defiled mind but are not only unwholesome (an obscured-indeterminate mind is defiled too); rage and the rest are only unwholesome but do not pervade. Among all the mental factors, only these two satisfy both conditions at once. That is why a class holding only two dharmas is nonetheless set up as a class of its own—not to make up numbers, but as what the criterion forces.
A second point easily mistaken: “non-conscience and shamelessness” is not ‘bad manners.’ The treatise will explain them fully below at Root Stanza 33, and here says only that “the characteristics of these two dharmas will be analyzed below.” And precisely because they are the necessary and sufficient mark of an unwholesome mind, they say something in return: conscience and shame within a wholesome mind are not an added refinement but the threshold on which a wholesome mind stands at all.
Where it lands: every evil deed, traced to its innermost point, must pass the gate of ‘not feeling disgrace, not feeling fear.’ Hold that gate and an evil mind cannot arise—which is why conscience and shame are called in scripture the two bright dharmas of the world, and that is not a figure of speech.
8. The Ten Factors of the Small Defiled Ground—Why They Are Called “Small”
Ask first: rage, concealment, avarice, envy, vexation, harmfulness, resentment, flattery, deception, and self-intoxication are plainly fierce enough—why are they called “small”?
The treatise gives three conditions in answer: “dharmas of this class are abandoned through cultivation alone, arise on the ground of mental consciousness, are associated with ignorance, and operate each separately, and are therefore called factors of the small defiled ground.” Yuanhui sets them out as three senses: “there are three senses: first, abandoned through cultivation alone; second, arising on the ground of mental consciousness and associated with ignorance; third, operating each separately.”
“Small” does not mean slight; it means small in scope. This is the section’s first correction. Set against the factors of the great defiled ground it becomes clear: those six pervade every defiled mind, while these ten are associated only with “a small portion of defiled minds.” The treatise says so in establishing the name: “any dharma here that belongs to the small defiled ground is called a factor of the small defiled ground, that is, a dharma arising together with a small portion of defiled minds.”
A second point easily mistaken is “operating each separately.” It means that only one arises at a time—when rage arises resentment does not arise with it, when avarice arises envy does not. This condition will be used directly later in counting mental factors: the class associated with rage and the rest is “twenty as in the independent class, plus one of rage and the rest” precisely because only one is added.
A third point easily mistaken: why are pride and doubt not counted among the factors of the small defiled ground? Puguang, following the treatise’s own criterion, states it cleanly: “following this treatise now, the ten factors of the small defiled ground are established and rejected by a single sense, namely being abandoned through cultivation alone.” Pride extends to abandonment through both seeing and cultivation, and doubt is abandoned through seeing alone; neither fits “abandoned through cultivation alone.” Regret, though abandoned through cultivation alone, extends to the wholesome quality and is not associated with ignorance alone. Lacking any one of the three senses puts a dharma out, and so there are only ten.
Where it lands: since they operate each separately, they can be counteracted one by one—these ten are not a tangle but ten knots that can be untied one at a time. The treatise also announces that “these dharmas will be analyzed at length below among the secondary afflictions,” giving only the coordinates here.
9. How Many Mental Factors Are Actually Present in a Single Thought
Ask first: after all this talk of classes, in one concrete thought of the desire realm, how many mental factors are present at once?
The treatise divides desire-realm mind into five classes and reports the count of each: a wholesome mind necessarily has twenty-two (the ten factors of the great ground, the ten of the great wholesome ground, applied thought, and sustained thought), and twenty-three when regret is present; the unwholesome class associated with independent ignorance and the class associated with view have twenty each (the ten of the great ground, the six of the great defiled ground, the two of the great unwholesome ground, applied thought, and sustained thought); the classes of the four afflictions greed, hatred, pride, and doubt, of the secondary afflictions such as rage, and of unwholesome regret have twenty-one each; the obscured-indeterminate class has eighteen; the unobscured-indeterminate class twelve; and sleep, extending to all three qualities, adds one to whichever class it is in.
The first correction is that ‘view does not add to the count.’ An unwholesome mind associated with view plainly has wrong view in addition—why is it still twenty? The treatise answers, “it does not become twenty-one because view is added, since view is spoken of as a difference of operation belonging to discernment among the ten factors of the great ground”—view is not an eleventh dharma but a difference of operation of discernment. The same point explains why the obscured-indeterminate class (associated with the view of self and the extreme view) likewise has only eighteen.
The second correction is in the word “regret.” Regret is neither ‘doing evil’ nor the mode of repenting itself. The treatise gives three layers of explanation: naming from the object (“it should be known that the name regret is here established from the dharma that takes an evil deed done as its object, that is, the nature that regrets in taking an evil deed as its object”—as the concentration that takes emptiness as its object is called the emptiness door of liberation, and the non-greed that takes the unclean as its object is called the unclean); naming from the support (as when it is said that all villages, towns, and lands are assembling, though what assemble are people); and provisionally setting the name of a cause upon the entity of a result (as when the six sense fields of contact are called karma done in the past). Yuanhui states the first sense most plainly: “the evil deed done is the object, not the repenting; repenting is now called ‘the evil deed done’ because it is named from its object.” And a thing not done may also be the object of regret—“as when in repenting one says, ‘I did not formerly do such work; this is my regret.’”
The third correction is in “independent ignorance.” It does not mean ‘an ignorance not shared with others’ but solitary ignorance—“in this class of mind there is only ignorance, without the remaining afflictions such as greed.”
Where it lands: this section turns mind from a mass of feeling into a table that can be counted. Its teaching value is not in memorizing the numbers but in establishing a habit—asking ‘how many mental factors are in this thought’ is a question with an answer. As for the masters abroad who grant that regret extends to the indeterminate and so make thirteen, the treatise records this faithfully without adjudicating, and that too is a lesson in how to read.
10. The Reduction of Mental Factors in the Upper Realms—A Map for Cultivating Absorption
Ask first: on entering an absorption, do mental factors become more or fewer?
The treatise answers with a reduction: “in the first meditative absorption, of the mental factors stated above, what is unwholesome alone, together with regret and sleep, is removed, and the rest are all present.” “What is unwholesome alone” means hatred, together with the seven small afflictions such as rage apart from flattery, deception, and self-intoxication, and non-conscience and shamelessness besides. The intermediate absorption further removes applied thought. From the second absorption upward as far as the formless realm, “sustained thought and the rest” is further removed—the word “and the rest” removing flattery and deception.
First point easily mistaken: reduction does not mean mind grows weaker. What is dropped are mental factors that cannot exist on that level; mind’s functioning is not pared away. Puguang states the reasons very clearly: “moistened by concentration, there are no unwholesome dharmas such as the affliction of hatred, and so no unwholesome; there is no sorrow faculty, and so no regret; there is no food taken in portions, and so no sleep.” Yuanhui makes the two correspondences even plainer: “as for removing regret, regret is associated with the sorrow faculty, and the form realm is free of sorrow, and so there is no regret. As for removing sleep, the form realm has no food taken in portions, and so there is no sleep.”—Every item that falls away has its own reason, and none is laid down arbitrarily.
Second point easily mistaken: flattery and deception “reaching at most as high as the Brahmā heaven” is not a slur upon the Brahmā King. The treatise cites an extremely vivid passage of scripture: the monk Aśvajit asked the Great Brahmā King, ‘at what station do these four great elements cease without remainder?’, the Brahmā King did not know and before the whole assembly “answered evasively and confusedly: here in this Brahmā assembly I am the Great Brahmā, the sovereign, the maker, the transformer, the producer, the nourisher, the father of all,” and having said this drew the man outside the assembly, “drew him outside the assembly, spoke flatteringly, made a shamefaced apology, and told him to go back and ask the Buddha.” This passage is there to establish one thing—so long as a structure of ‘mutual dependence among the multitude,’ of ruler and subject, higher and lower, remains, there is still room for flattery and deception; above the second absorption there is no such structure, and so these two mental factors are absent.
Where it lands: this is a topographical map for cultivating absorption. It tells the practitioner that certain afflictions are not cut off by counteraction but have nowhere to rest once a given level is reached. Conversely, one still in the desire realm who wants the mental character of the first absorption should look at whether hatred, regret, and sleep are still present.
11. Non-Conscience and Shamelessness, Love and Respect—The Mind toward Persons and the Mind toward Dharmas
Ask first: where exactly do conscience and shame differ? And love and respect?
The treatise gives two explanations of non-conscience and shamelessness. The first divides them by object: “to have, toward qualities and toward those who possess them, no reverence and no esteem, nothing that gives one pause, and nothing to which one submits, is called non-conscience”—its object being qualities and those who have them; “a dharma reproved and rejected by the good is called wrongdoing, and to see nothing to fear in such wrongdoing is called shamelessness”—its object being wrongdoing and its result. The second is that of “certain other masters”: feeling no disgrace in regard to oneself is called non-conscience, and feeling none in regard to others is called shamelessness.
First point easily mistaken: “seeing no fear” is not about seeing or not seeing. The treatise sets out a very fine question and answer: if it is ‘seeing and yet not fearing,’ then what is shown must be wrong cognition; if it is ‘not seeing its fearsome result,’ then what is shown must be ignorance—fault on either side. The author of the treatise’s reply is: “this phrase does not show either seeing or not seeing … it shows that there is a dharma, a secondary affliction, which is the cause of those two, and this is called shamelessness.” The sentence is meant to point out that another dharma is present, the proximate cause of wrong cognition and of ignorance, and is not describing seeing or not seeing.
Second point easily mistaken: love is not the same as greed. The treatise says “love is loving delight, and its entity is confidence,” and at once divides it in two: “the defiled is greed, as in love for wife and children; the undefiled is confidence, as in love for teachers and elders.” It then makes four cases: confidence taking the truths of suffering and origin as its object is confidence and not love (accepting them as suffering, yet not delighting in them); every defiled love is love and not confidence; confidence taking the truths of cessation and the path as its object is both; whatever remains is the fourth case. One and the same word “love” must be read differently defiled and undefiled.
Third point easily mistaken: love and respect existing “in the desire and form realms only” does not mean that confidence and conscience are absent in the formless realm. The treatise sets and answers the objection itself: “love and respect are of two kinds, those taking dharmas and those taking a pudgala as object; those taking dharmas as object exist in all three realms. What is meant here are those taking a pudgala as object, and so they exist in the desire and form realms and not in the formless realm.”—Only love and respect toward persons are bounded by realm; those toward dharmas are not.
Where it lands: the treatise here splits “toward persons” and “toward dharmas” into two tracks, and with regard to persons makes four cases—love without respect toward wife and children, respect without love toward another’s teacher, both toward one’s own teacher and parents, and the fourth case for the remainder. These four cases are not a classifying game but a reminder: respect and love can each appear alone, and whether a relationship has respect in it and whether it has love in it are two separate questions.
12. Applied and Sustained Thought, Pride and Self-Intoxication—One “Not Admissible” and One ‘Toward Whom’
Ask first: applied thought is mind’s coarseness and sustained thought its fineness; coarse and fine are contrary, so how can they be in one and the same mind?
The treatise records two masters’ explanations. The first offers a simile: clarified butter floating on cold water with a blazing sun shining upon it, so that “by the working of water and sun the butter neither melts nor congeals”—so too with a single mind, which by applied thought is not too fine and by sustained thought not too coarse. The second says that applied and sustained thought are verbal formations, citing the sūtra, “there is speech only where there are applied and sustained thought,” the coarse being called applied thought and the fine sustained thought.
What matters most in this section is that the author of the treatise lets neither master pass. Against the first: water and sun are only the cause of congealing and melting, and “the entity of the sun is not congealing or melting”—so applied and sustained thought would be only the cause of coarseness and fineness and not their entity. Again, coarse and fine are established relatively, realms and levels being compared high against low, so that “even the summit of existence would have applied and sustained thought.” Against the second: if there really were two separate kinds of entity, coarse and fine, there would be no conflict in reason; “but there are no separate kinds of entity, and so a conflict does follow, for within a single kind of entity high and low cannot arise at the same time.” He closes in one sentence: “from this it should be known that the two dharmas applied and sustained thought definitely may not be held to be associated with one and the same mind.” When someone cites the sūtra’s “the first meditative absorption is complete with five limbs” in reply, the treatise answers, “‘complete with five limbs’ is said with reference to a level, not a single moment.”
The point easily mistaken lies here: do not read applied and sustained thought as ‘thinking’ and “concentrating.” What the treatise fixes is the two natures of coarse and fine, not two functions; and it is precisely because they are only coarse and fine that the author of the treatise can overthrow the position by ‘established relatively.’
Pride and self-intoxication are another pair. “Pride is the nature of mind exalting itself against another, weighing the difference in the qualities and classes of self and other”; “self-intoxication is the nature of mind grown haughty and unrestrained, preceded by attachment to what belongs to oneself.” The difference lies in a single word: pride is toward another, self-intoxication toward oneself. Pride requires an object of comparison; self-intoxication does not—attachment to one’s own lineage or bodily strength is enough. The treatise also records another master’s simile: “just as the difference of elated exaltation produced by liquor is called drunkenness, so the difference of elated exaltation produced by greed is called self-intoxication.”
Where it lands: read together, these two pairs teach one and the same thing—in reading a treatise, attend to the words “some explain thus,” “certain other masters say,” “some say.” In this section four masters’ accounts stand together and the author of the treatise chooses among them plainly; without discriminating these markers, one takes some one master’s words for the treatise’s settled doctrine.
13. Mind, Thought, and Consciousness Are One in Entity; Association Has Five Senses
Ask first: are mind, thought, and consciousness three things, or three names for one thing?
The treatise answers with the utmost brevity: “because it gathers and gives rise it is called mind; because it deliberates it is called thought; because it discerns it is called consciousness.” It records a second account as well: “because of the various differences of pure and impure elements it is called mind; because this very thing serves as the support of another it is called thought; because it is what does the depending it is called consciousness.” The conclusion is that “although the senses conveyed by the three names mind, thought, and consciousness differ, the entity is one.”
The same reasoning is then carried once more: mind and mental factors likewise have four names—having a support (relying on a supporting faculty), having an object (taking up an object), having a mode of apprehension (raising up a mode of apprehension upon the distinctions among the classes of the object), and associated (evenly conjoined). And “associated” has five senses: “mind and mental factors are even in five senses and are therefore said to be associated—support, object, mode of apprehension, time, and entity are all even.”
First point easily mistaken: “one in entity” does not mean there is no division of labor. Each of the three names conveys its own sense; it is only that three entities are not set up. Shentai uses a tree simile for “gathering and giving rise”: “because it gathers and gives rise it is called mind, as a tree has a heart that can gather and give rise to branches, flowers, and fruit”—the heart of a tree is not another thing, and yet branches, flowers, and fruit come from it.
Second point easily mistaken: “mode of apprehension” is not “object.” This is the step most easily missed in this section. Puguang separates them with a mirror simile: “as a bright mirror facing many forms has them all appear on its face, what so appears is not what is illumined, and yet from the appearing of the image the mirror is said to illumine”—the image appearing on the mirror’s face is not the thing the mirror illumines; “what so appears is called the mode of apprehension.” Yuanhui puts it still more plainly: “as when mind and mental factors take a blue object, they all carry the image of blue upon them, and this characteristic upon consciousness is called the mode of apprehension.” The mode of apprehension is on the side of what apprehends; the object is on the other side.
Third point easily mistaken: “evenness of entity” is not equality of number. The treatise adds a sentence itself: “evenness of entity means that within one association, just as the entity of mind is one, so each of the mental factors is likewise one.” The sense is that each is only one—within a single association there will not be two feelings or two perceptions.
Where it lands: evenness in five senses is the Sarvāstivāda definitional formula for “association.” Whenever one meets ‘such a dharma is associated with such a dharma,’ one may go back and test it by these five: same support, same object, same mode of apprehension, same time, one of each.
14. The Class That Is Neither Form nor Mind
Ask first: acquisition, non-acquisition, commonality, and the rest are neither form nor mind—what are they to be counted as?
The treatise answers: “dharmas such as these are not associated with mind and are not of the nature of form and the rest, yet are included in the aggregate of formations, and are therefore called formations not associated with mind.” The stanza first lists them in general: “the formations not associated with mind are acquisition, non-acquisition, commonality, the result of non-perception, the two absorptions, the life faculty, the marks, the name-bodies and the rest.” Yuanhui lists all fourteen names: acquisition, non-acquisition, commonality, the result of non-perception, the absorption without perception, the absorption of cessation, the life faculty, arising, abiding, change, cessation, name-body, phrase-body, syllable-body.
First point easily mistaken: “not associated” does not mean ‘nothing to do with mind.’ It means not associated with mind—that is, not possessing the five kinds of evenness of the previous section. They are still established upon the stations of form and mind and are still among conditioned dharmas; they simply do not fall in the list of mental factors.
Second point easily mistaken: do not read them as unconditioned. The treatise has already said here that they are “included in the aggregate of formations,” hence conditioned; the unconditioned is the fifth class, and the fascicle said at its opening that “the unconditioned has no arising and is not discussed here.”
Third point easily mistaken: this fascicle only enumerates in general and does not explain them all. Having listed the fourteen, the treatise at once narrows: “among them the characteristics of acquisition and non-acquisition will be analyzed for the present”—of the fourteen only the first two are treated, the rest being left to the next fascicle. The word “for the present” must be seen.
Where it lands: this class of dharmas is the most questioned member of the Sarvāstivāda system—it establishes ‘having or not having,’ ‘being of the same class or not,’ and ‘being alive or not,’ these relations and states, as independent dharmas. And precisely because it is the most questioned, the fascicle will next spend an extremely long stretch defending only the first of them, “acquisition.” Understand acquisition and you understand the legislative motive of this whole class.
15. What “Acquisition” Is—Having Is Set Up as a Dharma
Ask first: when one says ‘I have the precepts,’ ‘I have discernment,’ what is that “have”?
The treatise answers: “acquisition is of two kinds: first, what has never been acquired, or has been acquired and lost, being now obtained; second, what has been acquired and not lost, which is possession.” Coming into it now is called obtaining, keeping without losing is called possession, and the two together are called acquisition; non-acquisition is the contrary. As to where it is found: “in one’s own continuum and in the two cessations.”
First point easily mistaken: acquisition is not the dharma acquired. Acquisition is another dharma, and it is what makes some dharma “belong to” some continuum. That is why the treatise asks “in which dharmas are acquisition and non-acquisition found,” and not ‘which dharma is acquisition.’
Second point easily mistaken: the scope is extremely strict. Only within one’s own continuum—“not in another’s continuum, since no one can possess a dharma belonging to another’s body”; not upon what is insentient—“not upon what is not a continuum, since no one can possess a dharma of what is insentient.” Among unconditioned dharmas too, only cessation through discernment and cessation independent of discernment have acquisition, and space does not: “there is definitely no one who possesses space, and so no acquisition is spoken of with regard to space; and since there is no acquisition, neither is there non-acquisition.” The reason is that this school “holds acquisition and non-acquisition to be established as the reverse of one another”—where there is no acquisition, non-acquisition cannot even be spoken of.
Third point easily mistaken: every sentient being possesses cessation independent of discernment. The treatise cites the Abhidharma treatise: apart from the noble one still fully bound in the first moment of the path of seeing and every fully bound ordinary being, “the rest of sentient beings possess cessation through discernment”; whereas of cessation independent of discernment “there is no sentient being that does not possess it”—since in every moment some dharma, for want of a condition, will never arise.
Where it lands: this section does something very large—it turns “having” from a descriptive term into a real dharma. Afflictions cut off, precepts acquired, cessation realized: in the Sarvāstivāda these are no longer merely ways of speaking, but each has an “acquisition” bearing it. Grasp this motive and the long dispute of the next section carries its weight.
16. The Dispute over a Separate Thing—Two Schools in One Passage and the Author’s Double Endorsement
Ask first: on what ground is it said that there is a separate thing called “acquisition”?
The Sarvāstivādins first adduce the word of the noble ones: “because the sūtra so says. As the sūtra says: a noble one, with regard to those ten dharmas of one beyond training, by their arising, by their acquisition, by their possession, has cut off the five limbs.” The Sautrāntikas at once press back: then how is ‘there is a wheel-turning monarch who possesses the seven treasures’ to be taken? The wheel treasure and the jewel treasure are insentient, and the elephant, the horse, and the queen belong to another’s continuum—are these possessed too? The Sarvāstivādins fall back on “sovereignty”: “here sovereignty is spoken of as possession, that is, the wheel-turning monarch has sovereign power over those seven treasures and sets them in motion as he pleases.” The Sautrāntikas press one more step: since “sovereignty” suffices there, why must a separate thing be posited elsewhere?
The Sautrāntikas then shift to a refutation by means of knowledge: “the acquisition you posit has no entity that can be known, as color and sound and the rest have, or greed and hatred and the rest; and no operation that can be known, as the eye and ear and the rest have; therefore it is not admissible that there be a separate thing called acquisition.”—It cannot be seen, and it cannot be inferred. Next they refute the claim that ‘acquisition is the cause of arising’: if acquisition were the cause of arising, the unconditioned, which does not arise, should have no acquisition; when the level changes or defilement is left behind, the dharma has no acquisition, and how then is it to arise in future; if a co-arising acquisition is the cause of arising, what work is left for arising and the arising of arising among the four characteristics; an insentient dharma, having no acquisition, should then never arise; and for one fully bound there should be no difference in the appearing of afflictions of the lower, middling, and higher grades, since acquisition has no differences. The Sarvāstivādins fall back upon acquisition as “the cause by which differences are established”—without acquisition there would be no distinguishing an ordinary being from a noble one. The Sautrāntikas answer that the difference is in the supporting body and not in acquisition—“causing the supporting body to be transformed and made other than it was,” “just as a seed burnt by fire is transformed and made other than before and has no power to produce,” and therefore “both of these are merely provisional and not real.”
At this point the word “seed” is forced out: “what dharma here is called a seed? It is the capability—serially transmitted or immediately proximate—that name and form have with respect to producing their own result; and this is constituted by continuum, transformation, and distinctiveness.” The treatise even glosses the three senses word by word—transformation is “the nature of being other before and after within a continuum,” continuum is “the formations of the three times in their causal and resultant nature,” and distinctiveness is “the capability of producing a result without interval.”
The most important step is at the close. The Vaibhāṣikas hold firmly that both are “separate things, real and not provisional,” and the author of the treatise sets down a double endorsement: “thus both roads are well stated. Why? Because it does not conflict with reason; because it is what my own school holds.”—‘Does not conflict with reason’ speaks of the Sautrāntikas; ‘what my own school holds’ speaks of the Sarvāstivādins.
A point easily mistaken: this passage is often read as ‘the author of the treatise has refuted the Sarvāstivādins.’ The text does not say so. What it gives is two reasons standing side by side, with the place of both schools set within one sentence. Just how far and to which side it leans is where the four later commentaries each expend their strength; it is not adjudicated here.
Where it lands: this is the passage in the whole fascicle most worth reading slowly. It exhibits a formal mode of debate—establish, object, retreat, object again, retreat again, endorse both. And “seed” appears here for the first time with a formal definition; how far it later traveled is another case; of this fascicle one need only remember that it was forced out in the search for an account of “having” that need not posit a real dharma.
17. The Five Gates of Difference in Acquisition—A General Formula of Analysis
Ask first: what quality is acquisition itself, to what time does it belong, to what realm is it bound?
The treatise answers with five gates. The gate of the three times: “dharmas of the three times each have three kinds of acquisition, that is, a past dharma has a past acquisition, a future acquisition, and a present acquisition,” and future and present likewise. The gate of the three qualities: “dharmas that are wholesome and the rest have acquisitions that are wholesome and the rest only.” The gate of realm affiliation: “a dharma bound to a realm has its acquisition in its own realm only,” while “an unbound dharma has acquisitions extending to four kinds”—the acquisitions of the three realms plus an acquisition without outflows. The gate of the three kinds of training: a dharma of training has an acquisition of training only, a dharma beyond training an acquisition beyond training only, and the acquisition of what is neither extends to three. The gate of the three modes of abandonment: dharmas abandoned through seeing and through cultivation have respectively such acquisitions, and the acquisition of a dharma not subject to abandonment extends to two.
First point easily mistaken: ‘acquisition takes its quality from what is acquired’ is not the only rule. Within the gate of realm affiliation the treatise already divides three ways: “the acquisition of cessation independent of discernment extends to all three realms; the acquisition of cessation through discernment belongs to the form and formless realms and is also without outflows; the acquisition of the truth of the path is without outflows alone.” Why the inconsistency? Because cessation through discernment has no operation of its own, and its acquisition is judged by the path that realizes it; cessation independent of discernment likewise has no operation, and its acquisition is judged by the supporting body; only the acquisition of a conditioned dharma is judged by the dharma acquired. Puguang sets these three side by side precisely to keep a reader from pushing one rule all the way through.
Second point easily mistaken: the stanza and the prose are not of equal extent. The stanza says only “neither of training nor beyond training, three; not subject to abandonment, two kinds,” while the prose sets out both the three kinds of training and the three modes of abandonment in full. This is not the prose saying more; it is the stanza being narrow in its letter—in reading a stanza one must know what it has left out.
Where it lands: the three times, the three qualities, realm affiliation, the three kinds of training, the three modes of abandonment—these five gates are the general formula of analysis used throughout the Kośa. Here they are demonstrated in full for the first time, and thereafter every dharma one meets may be put to the same five questions.
18. Why the Acquisition of the Indeterminate Can Only Arise Together with It
Ask first: since it is said that dharmas of the three times each have acquisitions of the three times, is this so of every dharma?
The treatise at once discriminates: “the acquisition of what is unobscured-indeterminate arises only together with it, neither earlier nor later, because its force is feeble.” If the dharma is past the acquisition is past, if present the acquisition is present. But there are exceptions: “save for the two superknowledges of the eye and ear and what is capable of transformation”—the discernment of the divine eye and divine ear and the mind capable of transformation, being “of strong force and accomplished through the distinctions of preparatory practice,” though unobscured-indeterminate have acquisitions preceding, following, and arising together with them. The field of craft and the mode of deportment, if practiced to an extreme degree, may perhaps be so too. The acquisition of obscured-indeterminate manifest form likewise arises only together with it, since “although there may be a higher grade, it still cannot give rise to nonmanifest form, and so its force is feeble.” Wholesome and unwholesome form bound to the desire realm have “no acquisition preceding,” only a co-arising and a following acquisition.
First point easily mistaken: “save for the two superknowledges and transformation” does not mean that the two superknowledges are not indeterminate. They remain unobscured-indeterminate; it is only that their force is strong, and so they are an exception with regard to the three times of acquisition.
Second point easily mistaken: “force” is a lever of explanation and not a mystifying word. The treatise uses it to divide two kinds of indeterminate: what arises spontaneously (the maturation-born and the like) is feeble in force, and what is cultivated by preparatory practice (the two superknowledges and transformation, and craft and deportment practiced to an extreme) is strong. The difference of strong and weak falls upon ‘whether it was got by effort.’
Where it lands: this section demonstrates one of the treatise’s techniques—first establish a general rule, then discriminate the exceptions one by one, giving a reason for each exception. This way of writing, ‘general rule plus discrimination,’ will recur again and again in the chapters on karma and on the latent tendencies.
19. Non-Acquisition, Ordinary-Being Status, and That “Infinite Regress”
Ask first: is an ordinary being an ordinary being because of something added or something lacking?
The treatise’s answer is: something lacking. “Because it is granted that the non-acquisition of the noble path is what is called ordinary-being status.” Ordinary-being status is not a positive quality; it is the non-acquisition of the noble path—the “not having” of not having obtained the noble dharmas, set up as a dharma. The treatise cites the root treatise in evidence: “what is ordinary-being status? It is not obtaining the noble dharmas,” and adds that “‘not obtaining’ is precisely another name for non-acquisition.”
The differences of non-acquisition itself are also stated by gates: in the three qualities, “every non-acquisition is included within the unobscured-indeterminate quality alone”; in the three times, “past and future each have three kinds, that is, a present dharma definitely has no present non-acquisition”—because a dharma that is present must be one acquired and must have an acquisition; in realm affiliation, dharmas of the three realms and unbound dharmas “each have three non-acquisitions,” determined by the supporting body.
First point easily mistaken: “not obtaining all” and the word “wholly.” Someone asks: the non-obtaining of which noble dharmas counts? The treatise answers, “the non-obtaining of all, since no distinction is stated,” and explains that “these words ‘not obtaining’ express separation from obtaining”—were it otherwise, the Buddhas too, who do not possess the noble dharmas of the śrāvaka and pratyekabuddha lineages, would have to be called ordinary beings. Someone else says the root treatise ought to add the word “wholly”; the treatise answers that it need not: “the sense of ‘wholly’ is already contained in this one phrase, just as when it is said that this class feeds on water and feeds on wind.”—To say that a class of beings feeds on water and wind is understood as feeding on them alone, though “wholly” is not said.
Second point easily mistaken: what the author of the treatise endorses here is the Sautrāntikas. A second master says that ordinary-being status is the non-obtaining of receptivity to the cognition of dharma concerning suffering and of the dharmas arising with it; the author of the treatise remarks, “if so, the restatement is made to no purpose,” and immediately says, “what the Sautrāntika masters say is better,” recording their sense: “the difference of station within a continuum in which noble dharmas have never yet arisen is what is called ordinary-being status.”—This is a choice stated outright in the text, not a later inference.
Third point easily mistaken: the “infinite regress” is not really infinite. If acquisition has a further acquisition and non-acquisition a further non-acquisition, is that not endless? The treatise answers that it is not, “since it is granted that acquisitions may reciprocally cause one another to be possessed”—when a dharma arises, three dharmas arise together: “first, the root dharma; second, the acquisition of the dharma; third, the acquisition of the acquisition”; the acquisition of the dharma causes the root dharma and the acquisition of the acquisition to be possessed, and the acquisition of the acquisition causes the acquisition of the dharma to be possessed, and so the chain closes upon itself. Puguang separates the two names: “because it is the acquisition of the dharma it is called the acquisition of the dharma, which is the major acquisition; the acquisition of the major acquisition is called the acquisition of the acquisition, which is the minor acquisition.” At the second moment six dharmas, at the third eighteen, and “in this way the acquisitions increase further and further one after another.” The treatise closes with a sentence: acquisitions, “because they are without resistance, can contain one another. Were it not so, space would not contain the acquisitions of a single sentient being, still less those of a second and the rest.” Shentai here offers a very beautiful simile—like a fine autumn mist filling all ten directions.
Where it lands: this section sets the difference between ordinary being and noble one upon a “not having”; and the Sautrāntikas restate the same matter as a difference of station within a continuum, which the author of the treatise endorses. One and the same question, two ways of setting it up: one must legislate a dharma, the other need only state a station. This contrast is the longest thread the fascicle leaves for its later readers.
Further Resonances: A Mirror of the Four Commentaries and of Both Parties
The above is the sense of this fascicle in itself. What follows illuminates it from the side with the ancient masters’ commentaries and with a treatise of the same lineage—a mirror is not the treatise, only a change of reading upon the same fascicle.
The division of labor among the four commentaries. Puguang’s Record of the Kośa explains lemma by lemma, most fully, and never fails to record an alternative account; Fabao’s Commentary on the Kośa is fond of fourfold discriminations and does not shrink from criticizing his predecessors; Yuanhui’s Verse Commentary on the Kośa has the clearest outline and the similes handiest for a beginner; Shentai’s Commentary on the Kośa numbers each passage, has the finest outline, and from time to time takes Mahāyāna terminology for comparison. All four mark this fascicle as the chapter’s second major section, and only Fabao and Shentai state outright its extent of twenty-seven stanzas.
The place where the four commentaries differ most fiercely is an old case. The treatise says that a minute aggregate of the desire realm ‘has eight entities without sound,’ while the Treatise on the Development of Wisdom says that sound is constantly possessed in the desire and form realms—how are the two texts to be reconciled? In earlier times Master Nian took a compromise solution; Shentai’s commentary denounces it as a gross error; Puguang records the quarrel and judges for himself that “examined now, the two worthies are each partly right and partly wrong.” Fabao in turn refutes them both, saying that “Master Tai and Master Guang wrongly construe Master Nian’s intent,” and asserting that “since Master Nian’s sense accords with the treatise’s text, Masters Tai and Guang refute him erroneously.” Among the four, the divergence is deepest here. The three judgments are recorded together, without a verdict of right and wrong.
On whether a minute aggregate is provisional or real, the four are likewise not agreed. Puguang preserves the distinction of the two “minutes” and judges that this treatise speaks on the basis of the minute that is an aggregate of form; Fabao judges outright that “of the two explanations the later is the better”; Yuanhui does not touch on provisional or real and explains only that “‘minute’ has the sense of fine”; Shentai cites the discussion of entity and function in the Treatise Conforming to Correct Principle and makes no judgment. So too with the passage on increase of entity and increase of operation: Puguang records that the Correct Principle takes increase of entity while this treatise takes increase of operation; Fabao rejects both—“yet examined closely, increase of entity and increase of operation have not exhausted the reasoning”—and adds, “hence it is known that the nature of dharmas is indeterminate as conditions vary.”
The assigning of the passage on pliancy also has divergent readings. At “it should be known that the bodily pliancy spoken of here is the body’s workability,” Puguang judges outright that “many masters explain this text as the Sarvāstivādins’ answer; this explanation is erroneous”; Fabao sets down his own note on the Sautrāntika objection—“examined now, this objection is not quite to the point”; Shentai construes the whole passage as nine rounds of question and answer between the Sarvāstivādins and the Sautrāntikas; Yuanhui passes over the passage.
The number of counteracting pairs is another set of divergences. Shentai’s commentary records the old masters’ account that ‘eight of the counterparts have entity and two do not,’ rejects it as untrue, and maintains that “all ten counterparts have entity,” citing the old translation of the Kośa in evidence. Puguang and Fabao each draw up a large table of ten direct counterparts and eleven indirect ones; the dharma-headings of the two tables agree entirely, save that Fabao writes “the counterpart of restlessness is equanimity as a formation” while Puguang writes “the counterpart of restlessness is equanimity.”
Saṅghabhadra’s refutations are concentrated in four places. First, the refutation of the Elder of the Sautrāntika forerunners on ‘the great ground being three only’—the Elder maintained that the sūtra speaks only of feeling, perception, and volition arising together, so that the factors of the great ground are three only; Saṅghabhadra denounces this as “the Elder’s statement that the great ground is three only is exceedingly deluded and mistaken,” and cites scripture to prove that desire and the rest really have separate entities. Second, the defense of the contrariety of attention and equanimity—Saṅghabhadra explains that “equanimity, like holding a balance, is even in advancing and halting,” and then says that “the objection of the Sūtra-master, that having alertness and being without alertness make attention and equanimity mutually contrary, is thus well disposed of.” Third, the charge that Vasubandhu pressed a crosswise objection at non-conscience and shamelessness—“the Sūtra-master here mistakes their meaning and presses a crosswise objection.” Fourth, and with the greatest force, at acquisition and the seed: he answers that “the Sūtra-master here asks thus: on what ground is it known that there is a separate thing called acquisition,” and judges that “the Sūtra-master, though he says much here according to his own position, accomplishes nothing, for the seed he posits does not hold good in reason,” listing the seed’s alternative names one by one—accompanying element, perfuming, capability, non-loss, increase; and on ordinary-being status he says, “if ordinary-being status had no separate entity, this sūtra would be contradicted.” One meaning and two schools, recorded together with no verdict as to which prevails.
In Paramārtha’s older translation there are five differences in this fascicle worth viewing together. First, in the establishing of the five classes the two translations agree in number and order, and differ only in the names of the third and fourth (mental factors and mental dharmas; formations not associated with mind and the unassociated). Second, among the ten factors of the great ground the number of dharmas is the same while three names and the order of listing differ. Third, the two names non-conscience and shamelessness are interchanged in the two translations. Fourth, among the ten factors of the small defiled ground the number is the same, while no text states the matching of the individual names, which are listed without adjudication. Fifth, the times of non-acquisition—Xuanzang’s version reads “a present dharma definitely has no present non-acquisition,” while the older translation states the contrary; Puguang, Yuanhui, and Shentai all three mark the older translation outright as an error of translation, and Fabao offers no remark. The three judgments are recorded together; the weighing of the two translations does not belong in this place.
The comparison of the seventy-five dharmas with the hundred dharmas the ancient masters made for themselves. Fabao under the ten factors of the great ground draws the comparison outright—“the position of the Sarvāstivādins is that ten dharmas are omnipresent, while in the Mahāyāna only five are omnipresent”; and under the factors of the small defiled ground he records the difference of provisional and real—“moreover, rage and the rest are in the Mahāyāna said to be portions of hatred and the like, and so are provisional dharmas; in this school they are all of a really existent nature.” Shentai under the five senses of association cites the Yogācārabhūmi for comparison, saying that “therefore the Yogācārabhūmi says: the support is the same, the object is the same, the mode of apprehension is not the same,” and at the end matches them with the two aspects, image and perceiving—“the mode of apprehension is like the image aspect in the Mahāyāna, and evenness of entity like the perceiving aspect in the Mahāyāna.” The five classes established in this fascicle and the five positions of the later hundred dharmas agree in number and differ in order: mind opens from one into eight; forty-six mental factors against fifty-one; eleven dharmas of form in both; fourteen unassociated against twenty-four; three unconditioned against six. Their agreements and differences are listed, with no verdict as to merit.
That mind, thought, and consciousness are one in entity, and the later establishing of eight consciousnesses, are two ages of one question. This fascicle’s statement that the three names are one entity is made with reference to differences of name and sense; the Yogācāra tradition later established the distinction of eight consciousnesses at the same place, and it did so upon another set of questions. The two are recorded together as coordinates, and the character of their relation is not settled in this section.
All the mirrors above are supplied by the four commentaries and by the treatises of the same lineage, and are not the original words of this fascicle’s stanzas and prose. Recorded together without adjudication, each returned to its own place.
心不相應行Formations Not Associated with Mind
全文五層 →Full five layers →五蘊之中,色蘊、受蘊、想蘊、識蘊都好安頓。獨有行蘊裡剩下一批東西,既不是色、又不與心相應:一個人「還是人」的那份相似,一個修定者『心停了而人還在』的那段空白,一具屍體『壽煖識離身』之後的僵仆,一件事物「本無今有,有已還無」的那道遷流,還有一句話『能被聽懂』的那個所以然。
有部把它們一一立為實物,數為十四,名曰心不相應行。前一卷已辯得與非得;本卷從第三個「同分」起,到第十四個「文身」止,十二個一氣說完。
這一卷因此成了全論最像法庭的一卷。每一條的體例幾乎一樣:先由有部立宗、舉經證、開四句;接著論主換上經部的眼睛,一路推徵『這件事非要另立一個實物不可嗎』;最後論主自己下一句「此非善說,違我宗故」——說完了經部的話,又聲明自己不是經部。讀這一卷,要學會的不是站哪一邊,而是看清楚一個名相被立起來時,究竟承擔了什麼工作。
一、同分——『這也是有情、那也是有情』,這句話憑什麼說得出口
頌只有五個字:「同分有情等」。問題卻極大。世間萬千有情,形貌、業用、樂欲各各不同;為什麼人一看,就能把牠們一齊喚作「有情」?有部的答案是:另有一件實在的東西在起作用——「有別實物名為同分,謂諸有情展轉類等」。
先排一個誤解。同分不是「相似」這件事本身,而是使相似成為可能的那個因。頌疏釋此云「分者,因義,謂由此分,能令有情身形等同」;光記兼存二釋,一釋作持業(即分名同),一釋作依主(同之分故名為同分),並記其名「此從果及因為名」。所以同分是就果與因兩頭立名的:果是相似,因是同分。
有部又開為三:一切有情共有的「無差別同分」,界地趣生種姓男女學無學各別的「有差別同分」,以及隨蘊處界而立的「法同分」。理由極簡潔——若無此物,「有情有情等無差別,覺及施設不應得有」:你連把兩個人叫同一個名字都做不到。
這一條落到修學上,是全卷最有用的一課:凡是一個名詞能穩定地指涉一群東西,背後總被預設了某種『共同性』。有部把這預設坐實為法,經部要拆它。誰勝誰負後面再說,先看清楚問題本身有多真。
二、同分之難——四句、異生性、菴羅樹與勝論
論主接著替經部發五問,一問比一問尖。
先立一個四句,看似閒筆,實是路標:死而復生,同分捨不捨?同處死還生同處,不捨不得;入正性離生,捨異生同分、得聖者同分;此趣死生餘趣,亦捨亦得;除此之外,第四句。注意第二句——凡夫轉聖,換的是同分。這一句後面會回過頭來咬有部。
咬法就是第一問:「若別有實物名異生同分,何用別立異生性耶?」你既已立「異生同分」,又另立「異生性」,一個位置放兩個實物;何況「非異人同分,別有人性故」——你並沒有在「人同分」之外再立一個「人性」啊。第二問:同分非色,眼看不見;又無別用,覺慧也辨不出;世人不知有它,照樣把有情喚作有情——那它「設有體亦何所用」。第三問最俏皮:「又何因不許有無情同分?」穀麥豆、金鐵、菴羅樹、半娜娑樹,不也各自同類相似?第四問:同分彼此也有差別,怎麼不在同分上再立同分?第五問最重:你這一立,豈不正好成了勝論的「總同句義」與「同異句義」?
毘婆沙師只答了最後一問:「彼執與此義類不同,以說一物於多轉故」——外道是一個常住之物遍在多物上轉,我是一一有情各別而有、念念無常。此外便退到經證:世尊說過「若還來此得人同分」。經部一句頂回去:經說了「得人同分」,可沒說「別有實物名為同分」;那是「即如是類諸行生時,於中假立人同分等」。論主最後一錘:「此非善說,違我宗故」。
排誤:不要把這一段讀成「論主破有部」。論主是先把經部的難擺足,然後親手判它不善。讀俱舍第一件要學的事就是這個溫度——他讓兩造都把話說完,自己只在最後亮一次立場。
三、無想果——一堵擋住江河的堤堰
頌曰「無想無想中,心心所法滅,異熟居廣果」。上一個「無想」是果、下一個「無想」是天,五個字裡藏著兩層。
它是什麼?在無想天中「有法能令心心所滅」的那個法。它是實有的,作用是遮——「是實有物,能遮未來心心所法令暫不起,如堰江河」。這個比喻要看仔細:堤堰不是把水殺死,是把它擋在那裡不流過來;所以叫「暫不起」。
它從哪來?是無想定所感的異熟。住在哪裡?廣果天中一處高勝之地。頌疏釋此以初禪為比:「如初禪中有高臺閣,大梵王居,名中間禪」——不是另立一天,是一天之中另有一區。
排誤:最容易錯的是以為那裡的有情從頭到尾沒有想。論說得明白:「生死位中多時有想」,只是中間長時想不起,才叫無想。而終結之時恰恰是想回來了——「彼諸有情由想起故從彼處沒」,論主還補一喻「如久睡覺還起於想」。
落地:這一條是全論對『以定境冒充涅槃』最冷靜的一次描寫。五百劫的空白換來的是「如箭射空力盡便墮」,沒後必生欲界,還得靠先前留下的順後受業接住。修定而不辨所求,這是俱舍給的第一張警告。
四、無想定——為什麼聖者看它「如見深坑」
頌四句把定的五個門一次說盡:「如是無想定,後靜慮求脫,善唯順生受,非聖得一世」。
名怎麼立?論給兩個讀法:「無想者定名無想定,或定無想名無想定」——前者是『修無想者之定』,後者是『定即無想』。地在第四靜慮。作意呢——為求解脫,而且是「彼執無想是真解脫」的那種求。性唯善,故能招無想天五蘊異熟;受唯順生,第二生必受其果。
最要緊的是第四句上半:「非聖」。理由論說得極重:「以諸聖者於無想定如見深坑不樂入故」。為什麼是深坑?因為進去的門票是「要執無想為真解脫,起出離想而修此定」;聖者不執有漏為真解脫,這門票他買不起,也不肯買。
「得一世」是說初得時只得現在世。論給一個現成的比方:「如初受得別解脫戒」——受戒那一剎那也只得現在。而因為無心,所以沒有未來修。
排誤:不要把「非聖得」誤讀成聖者的能力不足。是不肯,不是不能——這是意樂之判,不是階位之判。
落地:無想定與後面的滅盡定,形貌幾乎一樣,都是把心關掉;分野只在一念作意。同樣的技術、不同的發心,一個成外道天、一個成俱解脫。這是本卷最鋒利的一組對照。
五、滅盡定——聖者的無心,與佛的「非前」
頌六句:「滅盡定亦然,為靜住有頂,善二受不定,聖由加行得,成佛得非前,三十四念故」。
「亦然」二字論自己點破,是比例無想定的「心心所滅」,只此一項相同。其餘門門相反:作意,前者「以出離想作意為先」、此者「以止息想作意為先」;地,前者第四靜慮、此者有頂;受,前者唯順生、此者順生順後不定乃至全不受;人,前者唯異生、此者唯聖者。異生為什麼起不了?論列三因——「怖畏斷滅故、唯聖道力所能起故、現法涅槃勝解入故」。
後兩句是佛的特例。佛不由加行得,是成佛盡智時得,因為「佛無一德由加行得」。可是佛在此前不曾起過滅定,怎麼在盡智時就成了俱分解脫?論答:於起滅定「得自在故,如已起者成俱解脫」——自在即是得,不必實起。
「三十四念故」是遮西方師的。西方師說菩薩學位先起滅定後得菩提;若許此說,便順鄔波毱多《理目足論》。迦濕彌羅師據三十四念立宗:見道十六念、離有頂貪十八念,一坐相續,中間「無容得起不同類心」——滅定之心是有漏,插不進這串無漏念裡。外國諸師還要爭『起了又如何』,論主搬出菩薩的期心作結:「謂我未得諸漏永盡,終不解斯結加趺坐」。
落地:這一段順帶交代了何謂「一坐」。不是姿勢,是一段不容雜入的相續。
六、二定之同異——為什麼滅定的第一次,一定在人間
頌兩句:「二定依欲色,滅定初人中」。
同在哪裡?二定都依欲色二界之身而起。論引本論一句為證——「或有是色有,此有非五行」,指色界有情住不同類心、或入二定、或生無想天已入無想,那時只剩色行二蘊,不具五蘊。異在哪裡?無想定二界皆得初起,滅定的第一次必在人中;此後由退失而生色界,再依色身重修。
滅定會退嗎?論答會,並引《鄔陀夷經》為據:有比丘現法中修不滿足,身壞生意成天身,在那裡又能數數入出滅受想定。意成天身佛說是色界,而滅定唯在有頂——若不退,怎麼會生到色界去?有餘部說第四靜慮亦有滅定,論以「九次第定」的經說擋回;至於超越定,那是得自在以後的事,不礙初學之次第。
論隨後把二定之異排成六門:地異、加行異、相續異、異熟異、順受異、初起異。又補一問:二定既然都是滅心心所,為什麼一個叫無想、一個叫滅受想?答得漂亮——「二定加行中,唯厭逆此故」,就像他心智其實也知受等,卻只從加行偏重處立名。
排誤:「滅定初人中」不是說天上不能入滅定,是說第一次必在人中。至於無色界何以全不起滅定,那是「二定依欲色」句下的另一問,頌疏別設一問答之——問:「先無想定不依無色,理在不疑,何故滅定不依無色?」答:「命根依二法轉:一色、二心。若於欲、色起滅盡定,時雖復無心,命根依色轉。生於無色已無色身,若起滅盡定便無色、心,命依何轉?是則斷滅,非謂入定,故無色界不起滅定也。」欲色界入滅定時心雖無,命根還可依色而轉;無色界無色身,再滅心便無所依,那就是斷滅不是入定。二句各有所屬,不可互代。
七、滅定中到底有沒有心——世友、妙音與二法互為種子
這是全卷最深的一處,論以「今二定中心久時斷,如何於後心復得生」發問。
毘婆沙師答得直白:過去是有的,前心可作後心的等無間緣。有餘師換一個路子:生無色界時色久斷,後來色又生,可見色的再起靠的是心;那麼出定心的再起,也該靠「有根身」而非前心——所以先代軌範師「咸言二法互為種子」,二法就是心與有根身。
尊者世友走第三條路:「我說滅定猶有細心,故無此失」。尊者妙音立刻反破:若有識,則根境識三和合必有觸,「三和合觸俱起受想思」,那受想就沒滅,還叫什麼滅受想定。世友一方拿阿羅漢有受不生愛作例——觸也未必生受;妙音答此例不然,因為經文自己作了簡別,說的是「若無明觸所生諸受為緣生愛」,卻從無一處簡別過觸生受。
由此「毘婆沙師說滅定中諸心皆滅」。既無心,何以名定?論給兩解:「此令大種平等行故說名為定」,或由入定前的心力平等至此。至於二定是實是假,有部說實(能遮礙心),有說是假(只是心不轉的分位假立);論主末後照例一句「此非善說,違我宗故」。
落地:這一段是讀唯識前最該熟的一頁。『無心位如何接續』這個難題,此處已有三種答案在檯面上——過去有體、二法互為種子、猶有細心。後來瑜伽行派的答案是第八識恆行;問題是同一個問題。
八、命根——一句『壽即是命』,一句「持煖與識」
頌兩句:「命根體即壽,能持煖及識」。光記釋此云「上句會名,下句用證」——上句只是把「命根」與「壽」認作一物,下句才說出它的作用。
會名之據是對法:「云何命根?謂三界壽」。可是「壽」又是什麼?論答:「謂有別法能持煖識說名為壽」。所以命根不是一團生命力,它的定義是功能式的——能把煖與識拴在一起、令其相續住的那個因。
排誤:不要把命根想成靈魂。它既不能離煖識而獨存,也不作煖識之外的第三件事;它只是『令那兩件不散』的那個持。
落地:這是佛教談『活著』最省的一種說法。活著=體溫與識還在同一相續上;一旦這兩者離身,剩下的就只是頌裡那具僵仆的身體。
九、壽煖識頌——世尊親說的一句,也是全卷唯一一段屍體描寫
論在此引一頌,前面標的是「故世尊言」——這不是論主自造,是引經,四句都是佛語:「壽煖及與識,三法捨身時,所捨身僵仆,如木無思覺」。
光記於此有一字之訓,極見古人讀書之細:「仰死名僵,伏死名仆」,仰面而死叫僵,覆面而死叫仆;還補一句「亦有側死且言僵仆,或從多說」——側著死的也有,經只舉多數。
為什麼要引這一頌?因為前面的定義是抽象的(「能持煖識」),這裡給一個誰都見過的驗證:三者同去,身即如木。論引畢即接一句作結——「故有別法,能持煖識相續住因說名為壽」。
排誤:頌說「三法捨身」,不要讀成三法是三個小人離開。論的立場是:壽是持者,煖識是所持;三法一齊謝,是持與所持一齊謝。
落地:這是全卷少有的、可以直接用在觀身念處上的一段。身之為身,靠的只是這三件;三件一撤,木頭而已。
十、命根之傍論——壽體是實是假,論主親自推了十八轉
頌下的長行忽然變成一場拉鋸,且極長。
有部立:壽持煖識。經部問:那誰持壽?有部答:煖識反過來持壽。經部立刻抓住循環:三法互持,誰先滅?若無先滅者,三法應當恆不謝。有部退一步:那壽由業持。經部再逼:既然業能持,何不由業直接持煖識,何必要壽?有部亮出底牌:不能,否則「勿一切識從始至終恒異熟故」——若唯業持識,識就永遠是異熟,事實不然。經部又推:那就業持煖、煖持識。有部答:無色界無煖,識靠什麼?如是往還,論主評一句「豈得隨情數為轉計」——不要一次次換說法。
經部最後亮出自己的方案:「今亦不言全無壽體,但說壽體非別實物」;壽體就是「三界業所引同分住時勢分」——業引同分,同分住多久,那段「勢分」就是壽。並給兩喻:「如穀種等所引乃至熟時勢分,又如放箭所引乃至住時勢分」。放箭之喻順帶引出外道的「速疾行」之執,論主以三難破之:體一則急緩到時之差不應有,無礙則應畢竟不墮,若說風障則應初發即墮或永不墮。
破完外道,論主替有部收尾:「有別實物能持煖識名為壽體,是說為善」。
落地:這一段最值得學的是推徵的節奏。每一轉都只做一件事:把對方的答案代進去,看會多出什麼。十八轉下來,兩造的代價都攤在桌面上——立實物者要背循環,立勢分者要背無體。
十一、死的四句與「非時死」——附在命根之後的兩段
論接著問:是壽盡故死,還是另有餘因?《施設論》開四句:壽業盡、福業盡、二業俱盡、以及「不能避脫抂橫緣故」。第四句就是橫死。論主還補一項:也應說「捨壽行故」。
再引《發智論》問壽是「隨相續轉」還是「一起便住」:欲界不入二定者隨相續轉,入二定者及色無色界一切有情一起便住。迦濕彌羅師判此云「初顯有障,後顯無障,由此決定有非時死」——這一判是有部立「非時死」的正據。
隨後引經開「四得自體」:唯可自害者,如戲忘念天、意憤恚天,由發起增上喜怒而自殞;唯可他害者,如處胎卵;俱可害者,欲界多分;俱非害者,一長串——中有、色無色界、那落迦、北俱盧洲、正住見道、慈定、滅定、無想定、王仙、佛使、佛所記別五人、最後身菩薩及其母、輪王及其母。
經裡佛卻只對舍利子舉了非想非非想處一處。論解為「舉後顯初」,並舉「舉初顯後」之例(梵眾天是第一樂生天)與「舉後顯初」之例(極光淨天是第二樂生天)。外人爭說那兩例有「如」字、是譬喻,此經無「如」字不可例;論主反舉七識住經「有色有情身異想異,如人一分,天是第一識住」——那裡的「如」也不是譬喻。爭畢,論主自己喊停:「傍論且止」。
排誤:這一段常被讀成掌故。其實它是為前一句「決定有非時死」補足的——若人人皆壽盡而死,佛就不必開四種得自體了。
十二、四有為相——生、住、異、滅,與那三個埋伏在稠林裡的怨敵
頌兩句:「相謂諸有為,生住異滅性」。論釋四字極整齊:「此於諸法能起名生,能安名住,能衰名異,能壞名滅」,末補一句「性是體義」——有部要的正是這個「體」字。
隨即撞上經證:經只說三有為相。論答:經中的「住異」正是這裡「異」的別名,如生名起、滅名為盡。那經為什麼不立住?兩個理由:三相是令行三世遷流的,說它們是為了「令諸有情生厭畏故」,而住是安立、不生厭;又無為法也有自相住,說住則相濫。
論在此給了本卷最好的一個譬喻:人在稠林,三怨欲害——「一從稠林牽之令出、一衰其力、一壞命根」。生把你從未來拖進現在,異削你的力,滅斷你的命;三相於行如此。
還有第三說:經是把住與異合為一名。何必合說?因為「住是有情所愛著處」,為令厭捨,才與異合說——「如示黑耳與吉祥俱」。
排誤:四相不是四個階段的名字,是四種作用。同一剎那法上四相俱有,只是用時有別;這一點正是下文經部要攻的地方。
落地:這一段把無常講成了一個結構,而不是一句感嘆。你所愛著的正是「住」,而經連這一個名字都不肯單獨給你。
十三、四隨相——母雞生子之喻,與「無窮」的收煞
難來得很快:生等相既是有為,就該另有生等相;如此便無窮。頌答兩句:「此有生生等,於八一有能」。
「生生等」是四隨相——論自釋「謂四隨相,生生、住住、異異、滅滅」。無窮之難如何解?「四本四隨於八於一功能別故」。所謂功能,論給兩解:「謂法作用或謂士用」。
算法是這樣:一法生時連自體共九法俱起——自體一、本相四、隨相四。本相中的生除自己不生,生其餘八法;隨相中的生生只生本相之生一法。論以母雞為喻:「謂如雌雞,有生多子有唯生一」。生生一次只生一個,所以到隨相為止,不必再往上加。
排誤:不要把隨相想成第五、第六層相。隨相與本相是互相成就的一組:本相八法之中已含隨相,隨相反過來只成就本相。九法閉合,無窮之難就斷在這裡。
落地:這是有部法相學最典型的一手——用功能之別而非層級之增來止住回歸。日後唯識談種現熏生,用的也是同一種收煞。
十四、經部之難——「何緣如是分析虛空」
到此經部正式出手,第一句就極重:「何緣如是分析虛空?」——空無一物的地方,你卻在上頭分出四個名目。理由是「無定量故」:這些相不像色等那樣有決定的現量、比量或至教量可證。
有部搬經:「有為之起亦可了知,盡及住異亦可了知」。論主答得毫不客氣:「天愛!汝等執文迷義,薄伽梵說義是所依」。那經的實義是什麼?愚夫於行相續上執我我所,世尊為斷此執,才顯示『行的相續是有為、是緣生』,並不是要說一剎那中具有三相——因為一剎那的起等三相根本不可知,而不可知者不應立為相。
至於經為何重說「有為」二字?是要人知道此相表是有為,而不是表『有為法之存在』(「如居白鷺表水非無」),也不是表有為法之善惡(「如童女相表善非善」)。兩個譬喻都極活:見白鷺知有水,是表存在;見童女之相知生善子惡子,是表善惡;四相兩樣都不是。
於是經部給出自己的四相:「諸行相續初起名生,終盡位中說名為滅,中間相續隨轉名住,此前後別名為住異」,並舉世尊對難陀說受之生住異滅為證。
落地:同一組名相,有部安在剎那上,經部安在相續上。這一句是本卷後半的總鑰匙——底下三頌連引,全為坐實這一句。
十五、引頌之一——「相續初名生」
論引第一頌,前面標「故說頌言」:「相續初名生,滅謂終盡位,中隨轉名住,住異前後別」。
要看清誰在說話。這不是論主自造之頌,是他所牒引的舊頌;引它是為了證明『四相安在相續上』不是自己新編,而是有所本。四句與前一段長行一一對應:初起、終盡、中間隨轉、前後之別。
排誤:讀到「相續」二字不要放過。有部說一剎那上具四相,經部說一剎那上根本無四相可指,只有把一段相續攤開,生住異滅才有位置可站。整組引頌的力氣都用在這個「相續」上。
落地:這也正是一般人實際的經驗方式——沒有人是在一剎那裡看見無常的,都是把前後兩段擺在一起才看見。
十六、引頌之二——「本無今有生」
第二頌前標「復有頌言」:「本無今有生,相續隨轉住,前後別住異,相續斷名滅」。
與前頌同義而換一組語詞:生說成「本無今有」,滅說成「相續斷」。為什麼要引第二頌?因為前頌的「初」與「終盡」還帶著時間點的味道,容易被讀回剎那;此頌改用「本無今有」與「相續斷」,把四相徹底說成相續上的分段。
排誤:「本無今有」四字在本卷出現三次,兩次在經部口中、一次在有部口中,用法卻不同。經部用它說生只是一個描述;有部用它說生相之所以要立。同一句話,兩宗各取所需——這是本卷讀來最需要留神的地方。
落地:日常說『這事發生了』,說的正是本無今有。經部的意思是:除此以外,並沒有一個叫「發生」的東西另外存在。
十七、引頌之三——「由諸法剎那,無住而有滅」
第三頌前標「又有頌言」:「由諸法剎那,無住而有滅,彼自然滅故,執有住非理」。
這一頌與前兩頌分工不同。前兩頌是立,說四相在相續上如何安;此頌是破,直指剎那上不可能有「住」——諸法既是剎那,生已即滅,中間沒有一段可以叫住;而且滅是自然的,不待外緣,所以在剎那上立一個住相不合道理。
引畢,論主收一句:所以只在相續上說住,這樣《對法》的話才講得通——「云何名住?謂一切行已生未滅」。至於《發智論》說一心中有生有死有老,論主也代為安置:「而彼論文依眾同分相續心說,非一剎那」。
排誤:三頌連引,不是同一件事說三遍。一立、二立、三破,第三頌是把有部『剎那具四相』的路封死。
落地:讀論遇到連引數頌時,先問『它們分別在做什麼』,往往比逐句解字更快看懂一段。
十八、剎那上的四相,與那顆被擲出去的金剛
經部並不止步於相續。論接著說:就一一剎那而言,離開實有之執,四相也一樣成立——本無今有名生,有已還無名滅,後後嗣前前名住,前後有別名住異。
難者說:前後相似之時,哪有差別?論以金剛為喻:「謂金剛等有擲未擲,及強力擲與弱力擲,速遲墮落時差別故」——同一塊金剛,擲與不擲、強擲與弱擲,落地遲速就不同,可見大種轉變的差別是有的;只是諸行相似相續,前後差別小,看起來才像沒變。
再難:最後的聲光剎那、涅槃時最後的六處,沒有後念,豈不無住異,相便不遍有為?論答:這裡本來就不是把「住」立為有為相,說的是「住之異」;有住必有異,所以無不遍之失。
隨後論主連下數難破有部的『四相俱有而用時別』:假使未來的生有作用,它怎麼還算未來;現在生用已謝,它怎麼還算現在;住異滅三用俱在現在,那一剎那該叫住、叫異、還是叫滅;若說住力強故先用,後來何以又弱到與本法一齊被異滅所壞;若說住起用已不應更起(如生),論主分辨得極細——生的作用是引法入現在,已入不必再引;住的作用是安法令不衰滅,已住正可令它永住,所以住用理應恆起,不能拿生作例。末後再問:住用一停,異滅與本法都已不住,那異滅二相在何處起用、又還有什麼事可做?
落地:這一段是全論訓練『檢查一個模型』的範本。不必問它對不對,先問:照它說的做一遍,會不會自相矛盾。
十九、引頌之四——「即前異不成」
推到「異」相時,論主說:一法生已未壞名住、住已壞時名滅,這還講得通;獨有「異」,在一法上進退推徵都立不住。為什麼?「異謂前後性相轉變,非即此法可言異此」。於是引頌:「即前異不成,異前非一法,是故於一法,立異終不成」。
這一頌同樣前標「故說頌言」,是牒引而非自造;引它是把上文一整段推徵壓成四句。義理極簡:說它就是先前那個,「異」無從說起;說它不是先前那個,那就換了一法,也不是『一法之異』。兩頭都不通。
論隨後補破滅相:有餘部說要遇滅因緣、滅相才能滅法;論以服藥為喻——「服瀉藥時天來令利」,藥自己就能通利,何必再請天神?既然滅因緣就能滅,何須另立滅相。而且心心所他們也許剎那自滅,那滅與住就無先後,一法一時亦住亦滅,不合正理。
落地:「異」是四相裡最難安的一個。今天說『這東西變了』,其實永遠是拿兩個時點在比;一旦只剩一個時點,「變」字就沒有著落。頌說的正是這件事。
二十、生不能獨力生——「非離因緣合」
前面爭了半天生相有無,這裡補一個要緊的限定。難者問:若生在未來就能生所生法,未來一切法為什麼不一齊生起?頌答兩句:「生能生所生,非離因緣合」。
論釋極短:並不是離開其餘因緣和合、單憑生相之力就能生,所以未來諸法不頓起。經部立刻反問:那我們只見因緣有生的功能,何必再要生相?有部答:「法性幽微甚難知故,雖現有體而不可知」,而且沒有生相,「色之生」「受之生」這種第六轉的說法也不能成立。
經部把這反例推到底:若為成立第六轉就要立實物,那為成立「空、無我」之覺,是不是也要在法外立空性、無我性?為成立一二大小合離彼此之覺,是不是也要像外道那樣立數、量、合、離等別性?何況「色之自性」這句第六轉,難道色外另有一個自性?所以生等只是假立,說「色之生」不過是為簡別其餘——「如世間說栴檀之香、石子之體」。
有部末後不再逐條答,只表態:豈能因設難者多就棄本宗——「非恐有鹿而不種麥,懼多蠅附不食美團」。
落地:這句諺語式的收尾,是本卷讀來最有人味的一處。它承認難是難,但立宗自有立宗的擔當。論主把兩造的態度也一併記下來了,不只記道理。
二十一、名身、句身、文身——一句話為什麼能被聽懂
頌兩句:「名身等所謂,想章字總說」。以想釋名、以章釋句、以字釋文,以總說釋身。
論釋名曰「名謂作想」,如說色聲香味等想;釋句曰「句者謂章,詮義究竟」,如「諸行無常」等章,或能辨了業用德時的相應差別;釋文曰「文者謂字」,如𧙃阿壹伊等。有難說字就是書寫符號之名;論答:不是為顯書分才造字,是為顯字才造書分——因為要讓人不必聽見也能理解,才造出書寫符號來。「身」即「總說」,論釋「言總說者是合集義」,二名以上相合乃名名身,餘類推。
最大的一難在後面:這三者以語為性,語即是聲、聲屬色法,怎麼反說是心不相應行?論答:三者不以語為自性。語只是音聲,音聲本身不令人了義;順序是「語發名,名能顯義,乃能令了」。那什麼樣的音聲才令義可了?必須是能說的人在諸義中「已共立為能詮定量」的那種。
排誤:不要把名句文身當成文法學。有部立它們,是為了安頓一個很實際的觀察——同樣一串聲音,懂的人聽見義,不懂的人只聽見響。那個差別得有個安放處。
落地:這是佛教語言論的起點。後來唯識把名言熏習說成種子,問題仍是這一個:義是怎麼被載住的。
二十二、引頌之五——瞿聲九義
論舉一例證明「共立為能詮定量」,並引一頌,前標「故有頌言」:「方獸地光言,金剛眼天水,於斯九種義,智者立瞿聲」。
這一頌是引外典,不是論主自說。一個「瞿」音,古人共立它去指九種完全不相干的東西——方位、獸、大地、光、言語、金剛、眼、天、水。為什麼引它?因為它把「約定」二字證得最徹底:若聲與義之間有天然的連繫,一聲豈能承九義。
論隨即以此反問執名能顯義者:既然是共立的定量,那麼「但由音聲顯用已辦,何須橫計別有實名」。接著逐路封死:名由語生嗎——聲皆聲性,則一切聲皆能生名;名由語顯嗎——同過。若說能生能顯之聲有差別,那差別已足顯義,何待別名。又諸念之聲不可聚集,也沒有一法分分漸生,名怎麼由語發出來。若改執語生文、文生名、名顯義,同樣的難照樣成立,因為諸念之文也不可聚集。
再破另一路執:若名如生等與義俱生,那現在的名就不能指目過去未來之義;而且「又父母等隨意所欲立子等名」——名是後來隨意加的,怎麼會與義俱起;何況無為法應無名,你們又不肯承認。至於世尊說頌依於名,論答:聲即是名,頌是名的安布差別,執有實物不合正理,「如樹等行及心次第」——眾樹成行,行不在樹外。
有部末後仍守本宗:名等身別有實物,實而非假,理由是「非一切法皆是尋思所能了故」。
二十三、名身等之界繫、五類與三性
頌兩句:「欲色有情攝,等流無記性」。四門一次答完。
界繫:唯欲色二界。論記一異說「有說:亦通無色界繫,然不可說」——存而不判。有情非有情:有情數所攝,理由是「能說者成非所顯義」——成就名身的是能說之人,不是所詮之義(義通非情)。五類:唯等流,非異熟、非長養。三性:唯無覆無記。
排誤:說名身等是無記,不是說語言沒有善惡。善惡在能發語的心,不在名句文身本身;名句文身只是承載。
落地:這一條在修學上有極實用的一面——同一句話,善說惡說在心不在字;而字本身無記,所以誰都可以拿去用。經教之所以能被結集、被傳誦、也被誤用,理據就在這裡。
二十四、諸門總辨——一頌收十二條
末頌四句:「同分亦如是,并無色異熟,得相通三類,非得定等流」。前面各條散說的界繫五類三性,這裡一次補齊。
「亦如是」是說同分如名身等,通欲色、有情數、等流、無覆無記。「并無色」補一項:同分不止欲色,通三界。「并異熟」再補一項:同分不止等流,也通異熟。所以同分界通三、類通二。「得」與四相,類通三——有剎那、等流、異熟。「非得」與二定唯是等流,一個「唯」字是要表明它們不是異熟。
論末後自問兩句,順帶把體例交代清楚:為什麼不說得等唯有情數?因為前面已說「已說有情所成等故」。為什麼不說相通有情非有情?因為前面已說「已說一切有為俱故」。其餘未說的,隨應准知。
排誤:不要把這一頌讀成附錄。它是本卷的結算表——十二個不相應行,一一在界、類、性三個座標上定位。有部立法之為「實」,不只是說它有,更是說它能在這張表上佔到確定的一格。
落地:讀完這一卷再回頭看那句「心不相應行」,就會發現它並不是一個雜物箱。凡是不能歸給色、也不能歸給心,卻在經驗裡確實起著作用的那些「所以然」,都被收在這裡。同分管相似,二定管空白,命根管相續,四相管遷流,名句文身管意義。一卷之中,五件人人都碰得到的事,被安上了五個座位。
承衍:四疏之鏡
以上是本卷自身之義。此下另以古德之判釋、真諦異譯與眾賢反破旁照——鏡非論,是換幾種讀法看同一卷書。
一、同分之名義,四家各作一解。光記兼存持業、依主二釋,並以持業釋「簡異經部」「簡異勝論」;頌疏唯取依主一解;寶疏引《順正理》之文後直斷「論既此釋,徒煩異解」,另立「同法非一,名為眾同,與彼為因,名之為分」;神泰疏不辨釋式,改就四部異名會通:「六足本論說:此名眾同分」「此眾同分雜心,名眾生種類,唯說人同分,不說法同分。婆沙名受身處,唯說法同分,不說人同分。此論名同分,通人法也」。泰疏又破古師「人同分外別有法同分」之說。四家並錄,不判。
二、眾賢之反破,本卷最密。《順正理》稱世親為「經主」,逐段牒其語而破。同分一節,眾賢對「無情同分」之難反責曰「汝亦許有人天等趣胎卵等生,何不亦許菴羅等趣菉豆等生」,並立三理證同分實有;命根一節,牒「今亦不言全無壽體,但說壽體非別實物」而斷曰「是故經主於此義中,專搆多言都無所表」,末結「是故壽體實有別物,能持煖識,說為命根」;四相一節,牒「何緣如是分析虛空」全文而破,末云「是則汝曹由執假有,豈非倒是鑽攪虛空」。二宗並錄,勝負不判。
三、真諦舊譯之四相名目與本卷不同。玄奘作生、住、異、滅,真諦作「生老住無常」,長行亦隨之作「老者能變異此法,無常者能滅此法」;異相頌真諦作「若如前無老,若異非前法,是故於一法,老相不得成」。名身頌真諦作「名句及字聚,號言文總集」,其句之例不用「諸行無常」而用「善友一時遇」。瞿聲頌真諦作「言方地光牛」,九義中以「牛」代「獸」,且標明所出「如尼六多論偈說」——玄奘本但作「故有頌言」。二譯取捨=譯者所裁,此唯並錄。
四、三引頌之所出,賴神泰疏轉引真諦本疏而存。泰疏云「真諦師本疏云:此下三頌中,初頌大迦旃延造經優波提舍中有此偈」「第二頌佛陀察多羅所造經優波提舍中有此偈。第三頌鳩摩羅摩羅多法師所造論中有此頌」;於「即前異不成」一頌亦引「真諦師本疏云:此偈亦於大迦旃延經、優波提舍正理論頌之句」。真諦本疏今不存,此為僅見之著錄。所指是否確然,古無定說,並錄不判。
五、「生生」二字之上下所指,三家三式。光記二解並存:「上生字是小生,下生字是大生,能生生故」,又解「上生字是大生,下生字是小生,生之生故名為生生」;頌疏唯取前解「上生字是小生,下生字是大生,從小生生大生故,名生生」;神泰疏別作一式,以「用」釋上字。三式並錄。
六、黑耳吉祥之本事與舊譯。光記具述其事:「黑耳、吉祥姊妹二人常相隨逐。姊名吉祥,所至之處能為利益。妹為黑耳,由耳黑故故以名焉,所至之處能為衰損」,並斥舊譯「舊云功德天、黑闇女,譯家謬矣」;神泰疏亦以舊稱為不然;頌疏具述而不判;寶疏但云「如文可知」。判與不判,各還其位。
七、無想異熟之師說歸屬,唯泰疏作了勘定。泰疏云「若依婆沙評家,十一說之中評取第二說。今俱舍論:問:誰之異熟?答:謂無想定。同婆沙第二師說,評家所存」,而《順正理》所取則「同婆沙初師說,非婆沙評家所存也」。此為本卷古德校勘之最細一處,錄以備考。
八、大正本卷五之異讀二十二條,並錄不改。其中涉義理者三——「種姓」宋元明本作「種性」、「此於諸法能起名生」宮本作「中於」、「或謂士用」宋元本作「士時」明本作「生時」;餘皆異體、音寫、脫衍。底本仍從大正之讀,異讀存錄備考,取捨非本層所能定。
Among the five aggregates, form, feeling, perception, and consciousness are all easy to place. Only within the aggregate of formations does a set of things remain that are neither form nor associated with mind: the likeness by which a person is “still the same person”; the blank stretch in which a meditator’s ‘mind has stopped and yet the person is still there’; the stiff prostration of a corpse after ‘lifespan, warmth, and consciousness have left the body’; the flowing by which a thing “is not before and is now, and having been is not again”; and the reason why a sentence ‘can be understood.’
The Sarvāstivādins established each of these as a real thing, counted them as fourteen, and named them formations not associated with mind. The preceding fascicle already analyzed acquisition and non-acquisition; this fascicle runs from the third, “commonality,” to the fourteenth, “syllable-body,” finishing twelve of them at a stretch.
This fascicle is therefore the one in the whole treatise that most resembles a courtroom. The pattern of each item is nearly the same: first the Sarvāstivādins establish the thesis, adduce scriptural proof, and open a fourfold analysis; then the author of the treatise puts on Sautrāntika eyes and presses all the way through, asking ‘must this matter really have a separate real thing established for it?’; and finally the author of the treatise himself sets down the sentence “this is not well stated, because it contradicts my own school”—having spoken the Sautrāntikas’ words, he declares that he is not a Sautrāntika. What is to be learned in reading this fascicle is not which side to stand on, but how to see clearly what work a term is actually made to carry when it is set up.
1. Commonality—On What Ground Can One Say ‘This Too Is a Sentient Being, That Too Is a Sentient Being’
The stanza is only five characters: “commonality is that by which sentient beings are alike.” The question, however, is very large. Sentient beings without number differ severally in shape, in activity, and in inclination; why is it that at a glance one can call them all alike “sentient beings”? The Sarvāstivāda answer is that another real thing is at work—“there is a separate real thing named commonality, that is, sentient beings being of an equal kind one with another.”
First clear away a misunderstanding. Commonality is not the fact of “resemblance” itself, but the cause that makes resemblance possible. Yuanhui’s Verse Commentary explains it thus: “‘portion’ has the sense of cause; it is by this portion that the bodily shapes of sentient beings and the rest are made alike.” Puguang’s Record preserves two explanations, one appositional-determinative (the portion itself being the sameness), one dependent-determinative (the portion of what is the same, hence commonality), and records of the name that “this is named from both result and cause.” Commonality is therefore named from both ends, result and cause: the result is the resemblance, the cause is the commonality.
The Sarvāstivādins then open it into three: the “undifferentiated commonality” shared by all sentient beings; the “differentiated commonality” set severally by realm, level, destiny, mode of birth, lineage, female and male, in training and beyond training; and the “dharma-commonality” established according to the aggregates, sense fields, and elements. Their reason is extremely brief—without this thing, “the equal and undifferentiated cognition and expression, ‘a sentient being, a sentient being,’ ought not to be established”: you could not even call two people by one and the same name.
Brought down to practice, this item is the most useful lesson in the fascicle: wherever a term can stably designate a group of things, some kind of ‘commonness’ has been presupposed behind it. The Sarvāstivādins make that presupposition into a solid dharma; the Sautrāntikas mean to take it apart. Who prevails may be left for later; first see how real the question itself is.
2. The Objections to Commonality—The Fourfold Analysis, Ordinary-Being Status, the Mango Tree, and the Vaiśeṣikas
The author of the treatise next raises five questions on behalf of the Sautrāntikas, each sharper than the last.
He first sets out a fourfold analysis that looks like an aside and is in fact a signpost: when one dies and is born again, is commonality relinquished or not? Dying in one place and being born again in that same place—neither relinquished nor acquired; entering the certainty of the noble path—relinquishing the commonality of an ordinary being and acquiring that of a noble one; dying in this destiny and being born in another—both relinquished and acquired; and apart from these, the fourth case. Note the second case—when a worldling turns noble, what changes is his commonality. This clause will come back and bite the Sarvāstivādins.
The bite is the first question: “if there were a separate real thing named the commonality of an ordinary being, what need would there be to establish ordinary-being status separately?” Having already established “the commonality of an ordinary being,” you establish “ordinary-being status” besides—two real things in one place; and moreover “it is not as though there were a humanness apart from the commonality of a human being.” The second question: commonality is not form and cannot be seen by the eye; it has no separate operation and cannot be made out by cognition and discernment; people who do not know it exists call sentient beings sentient beings all the same—so “even granting that it has an entity, what use is it?” The third question is the wittiest: “on what ground is commonality of the insentient not allowed?” Grain, wheat, and beans, gold and iron, the mango and the jackfruit tree—do not these too resemble their own kinds? The fourth question: the several commonalities also differ from one another; why is no further commonality established upon commonalities? The fifth is the weightiest: does not this establishment of yours exactly amount to the Vaiśeṣikas’ “category of universal sameness” and “category of sameness-and-difference”?
The Vaibhāṣikas answer only the last: “what they hold is not of the same kind of sense as this, for they speak of one thing operating upon many things”—for the outsiders a permanent thing pervades many things, whereas ours belongs to each sentient being severally and is momentary and impermanent. Beyond that they fall back on scripture: the World-Honored One said “if he comes back here, he acquires the commonality of a human being.” The Sautrāntikas throw it straight back: the sūtra says “he acquires the commonality of a human being,” but it does not say that “there is a separate real thing named commonality”; it is that “when formations of this class arise, the commonality of a human being and the like are provisionally established upon them.” The author of the treatise strikes the last blow: “this is not well stated, because it contradicts my own school.”
Clearing a misreading: do not read this passage as “the author of the treatise refutes the Sarvāstivādins.” The author first lets the Sautrāntika objections be fully set out, and then with his own hand judges them ill stated. The first thing to learn in reading the Kośa is exactly this temperature—he lets both parties finish speaking and states his own position only once, at the end.
3. The Result of Non-Perception—A Dyke Blocking a River
The stanza reads: “non-perception, within the non-percipient, is the ceasing of mind and mental factors; its maturation dwells in Bṛhatphala.” The first “non-perception” is the result, the second is the heaven; two layers are hidden in five characters.
What is it? The dharma in the Heaven of Non-Percipient Beings by which “there is a dharma able to make mind and mental factors cease.” It is really existent, and its function is to block—“it is a real thing, able to block future mind and mental factors and make them not arise for a time, as a dyke blocks a river.” This simile must be looked at carefully: a dyke does not kill the water; it holds it back so that it does not flow across. Hence “not arise for a time.”
Where does it come from? It is the maturation brought about by the absorption without perception. Where does it dwell? In a high and superior place within the Bṛhatphala Heaven. Yuanhui’s Verse Commentary explains this by analogy with the first absorption: “as within the first absorption there is a high terrace where the Great Brahmā King dwells, called the intermediate absorption”—it is not a separate heaven but a separate quarter within one heaven.
Clearing a misreading: what is most easily got wrong is supposing that the beings there have no perception from beginning to end. The treatise says it plainly: “in the phases of being born and of dying they have perception for a long while,” and it is only because perception does not arise in the long interval between that they are called non-percipient. And the end comes precisely when perception returns—“those sentient beings pass away from that place because perception arises”—to which the author adds a simile, “like one waking from a long sleep, they give rise to perception again.”
Where it lands: this item is the treatise’s coolest description of ‘passing off a state of absorption as nirvāṇa.’ Five hundred aeons of blankness are exchanged for “an arrow shot into the sky falls when its force is spent”; after passing away one is necessarily born in the desire realm, and must be caught by karma to be experienced in a later life laid down beforehand. To cultivate absorption without discriminating what one seeks—this is the first warning the Kośa gives.
4. The Absorption without Perception—Why a Noble One Regards It “as the Sight of a Deep Pit”
Four lines of stanza state five gates of the absorption at once: “the absorption without perception is likewise so; in the later absorption, seeking liberation; wholesome, to be experienced in the next life only; not attained by a noble one, one time-period obtained.”
How is the name established? The treatise gives two readings: “the absorption of one without perception is called the absorption without perception; or the absorption that is itself non-perception is called the absorption without perception”—the first being ‘the absorption of one who cultivates non-perception,’ the second ‘the absorption that is non-perception.’ Its level is the fourth meditative absorption. Its attention—directed to seeking liberation, and of the kind in which “those people hold non-perception to be true liberation.” Its quality is wholesome only, and so it can bring about the five-aggregate maturation of the Heaven of Non-Percipient Beings; as to experience, it is to be experienced in the next life only, its result being necessarily undergone in the second birth.
The weightiest point is the first half of the fourth line: “not attained by a noble one.” The treatise states the reason with great force: “because the noble ones regard the absorption without perception as they would the sight of a deep pit and take no pleasure in entering it.” Why a deep pit? Because the price of admission is “holding non-perception to be true liberation, giving rise to the notion of renunciation, and so cultivating this absorption”; a noble one does not hold what is with outflows to be true liberation, cannot afford that ticket, and would not buy it.
“One time-period obtained” means that at its first attainment only the present time-period is obtained. The treatise gives a ready comparison: “as with first receiving the individual liberation precepts”—at the moment of receiving them, too, only the present is obtained. And because it is without mind, there is no future cultivation.
Clearing a misreading: do not misread “not attained by a noble one” as a deficiency in a noble one’s capacity. It is unwillingness, not inability—a judgment of intention, not of station.
Where it lands: the absorption without perception and the absorption of cessation that follows are almost identical in appearance, both shutting mind off; the divide is a single moment of attention. The same technique with a different aspiration makes the one an outsiders’ heaven and the other liberation in both parts. This is the sharpest contrast in the fascicle.
5. The Absorption of Cessation—A Noble One’s Mindlessness, and the Buddha’s “Not Before”
Six lines of stanza: “the absorption of cessation is likewise so; for peaceful abiding, at the summit of existence; wholesome, the two experiences indeterminate; attained by a noble one through preparatory practice; attained on becoming a buddha, not before, because of the thirty-four moments.”
The words “likewise so,” as the treatise itself points out, take by analogy the “ceasing of mind and mental factors” of the absorption without perception, and that item alone is the same. Every other gate is the reverse: as to attention, the former is “preceded by an attention with the notion of renunciation,” this one “preceded by an attention with the notion of stilling”; as to level, the former the fourth meditative absorption, this one the summit of existence; as to experience, the former in the next life only, this one in the next life, in a later life, indeterminately, and even not at all; as to person, the former ordinary beings only, this one noble ones only. Why can an ordinary being not arouse it? The treatise lists three causes—“because they fear annihilation; because it can be aroused only by the force of the noble path; because it is entered through the resolve upon nirvāṇa in the present dharma.”
The last two lines are the Buddha’s special case. The Buddha does not attain it through preparatory practice but at the moment of becoming a buddha, when the knowledge of exhaustion arises, because “the Buddha has no quality attained through preparatory practice.” Yet the Buddha had never before aroused the absorption of cessation—how then, at the knowledge of exhaustion, was he already liberated in both parts? The treatise answers: with regard to arousing the absorption of cessation he “had attained sovereignty, and so is one liberated in both parts just as one who has already aroused it”—sovereignty is itself attainment, and it need not be actually aroused.
“Because of the thirty-four moments” blocks the masters of the West. They say the bodhisattva while in training first aroused the absorption of cessation and afterwards attained awakening; to allow this would accord with Upagupta’s Treatise That Is the Feet of Reason’s Eye. The masters of Kaśmīra establish their thesis on the thirty-four moments: sixteen moments in the path of seeing, eighteen in leaving behind the craving of the summit of existence, continuous within one sitting, and in the midst of them “there is no occasion for a mind of an unlike kind to arise”—the mind of the absorption of cessation is with outflows and cannot be inserted into that string of moments without outflows. The masters abroad would still contest that ‘what if it were aroused?’; the author of the treatise concludes by bringing out the bodhisattva’s resolve of mind: “until I attain the permanent exhaustion of the outflows, I shall not unloose this cross-legged posture.”
Where it lands: this passage incidentally explains what “one sitting” means. It is not a posture but a stretch of continuity into which nothing else may be inserted.
6. The Likeness and Difference of the Two Absorptions—Why the Absorption of Cessation Must First Arise among Humans
Two lines of stanza: “the two absorptions depend on desire and form; the absorption of cessation first arises among humans.”
Where are they alike? Both absorptions arise in dependence upon a body of the two realms, desire and form. The treatise cites a sentence of the root treatise in evidence—“there may be an existence that is form, and this existence is not of five formations”—referring to a sentient being of the form realm dwelling in a mind of an unlike kind, or entering the two absorptions, or having been born in the Heaven of Non-Percipient Beings and entering non-perception, where only the two aggregates form and formation remain and there are not five. Where do they differ? The absorption without perception can first arise in both realms; the first arising of the absorption of cessation must be among humans; only afterwards, through falling away, is one born in the form realm and cultivates it again in dependence upon a body of form.
Does the absorption of cessation fall away? The treatise answers that it does, and cites the Udāyin Sūtra in evidence: there are monks who in the present dharma cannot cultivate to fulfillment, and after the breaking up of the body are born with a heavenly body formed by mind, where they can again enter and emerge from the absorption of the cessation of feeling and perception again and again. The heavenly body formed by mind the Buddha declares to be of the form realm, while the absorption of cessation is only at the summit of existence—if there were no falling away, how could one take birth in the form realm? Some other schools say the fourth meditative absorption also has the absorption of cessation; the treatise turns this back with the sūtra’s “nine successive absorptions”; and as for the leaping absorption, that is a matter of after sovereignty is attained and does not disturb the beginner’s succession.
The treatise then arranges the differences of the two absorptions in six gates: difference of level, difference of preparation, difference of continuum, difference of maturation, difference in the manner of experience, and difference of first arising. It adds a further question: since both absorptions are the ceasing of mind and mental factors, why is the one called non-perception and the other the cessation of feeling and perception? The answer is fine—“because in the preparatory practice of the two absorptions it is only these that are turned away from in disgust,” just as the cognition of another’s mind also knows feeling and the rest and yet is named from where the preparatory practice weighs.
Clearing a misreading: “the absorption of cessation first arises among humans” does not mean that it cannot be entered in the heavens; it means that the first time must be among humans. As for why the absorption of cessation cannot be aroused at all in the formless realm, that is another question under the line “the two absorptions depend on desire and form,” and Yuanhui’s Verse Commentary sets out a separate question and answer for it—Question: “that the absorption without perception does not depend on the formless is beyond doubt in reason; why does the absorption of cessation not depend on the formless?” Answer: “the life faculty turns in dependence on two dharmas, form and mind. If one arouses the absorption of cessation in the desire or form realm, then although there is no mind at that time, the life faculty turns in dependence on form. Born in the formless there is no bodily form; and if one then aroused the absorption of cessation there would be neither form nor mind—on what would life turn? That would be annihilation and not the entering of an absorption; hence in the formless realm the absorption of cessation is not aroused.” When entering the absorption of cessation in the desire and form realms, mind is absent and yet the life faculty can still turn in dependence on form; in the formless realm there is no bodily form, and to cease mind besides would leave it without support. The two lines belong to different questions and may not be substituted for one another.
7. Whether There Is Mind at All in the Absorption of Cessation—Vasumitra, Ghoṣa, and the Two Dharmas as Seeds of One Another
This is the deepest place in the fascicle, and the treatise opens it with the question, “now that within the two absorptions mind has been cut off for a long time, how does mind arise again afterwards?”
The Vaibhāṣikas answer bluntly: the past exists, and so an earlier mind can serve as the immediately antecedent condition of a later mind. Certain other masters take another route: when one is born in the formless realm, form is cut off for a long time and afterwards arises again, which shows that the re-arising of form rests upon mind; then the re-arising of the mind that emerges from the absorption should likewise rest upon the “body endowed with faculties” and not upon a previous mind—hence the preceptors of former times “all said that the two dharmas are seeds of one another,” the two dharmas being mind and the body endowed with faculties.
The Venerable Vasumitra takes a third route: “I say that in the absorption of cessation there is still a subtle mind, and therefore this fault does not arise.” The Venerable Ghoṣa at once refutes him: if there were consciousness, then faculty, object, and consciousness having come together there would necessarily be contact, and “with the contact of the three come together arise feeling, perception, and volition”—then feeling and perception would not have ceased, and what would make it an absorption of the cessation of feeling and perception? Vasumitra’s side takes as an example that an arhat has feelings and yet gives rise to no craving—so contact too need not produce feeling; Ghoṣa answers that the example does not hold, because the scripture qualifies itself, saying “feelings produced by a contact of ignorance are the condition for the arising of craving,” whereas nowhere has it qualified “contact producing feeling.”
From this, “the Vaibhāṣikas say that within the absorption of cessation all minds cease.” Being without mind, how is it still called an absorption? The treatise gives two solutions: “because it makes the great elements operate evenly it is called an absorption,” or because the force of the mind of concentration before entering reaches evenly to this point. As to whether the two absorptions are really or provisionally existent, the Sarvāstivādins say really (they can block mind), and some say provisionally (merely a station provisionally established upon mind’s not operating); and the author of the treatise closes as usual with a sentence: “this is not well stated, because it contradicts my own school.”
Where it lands: this passage is the page most worth being thoroughly familiar with before reading Yogācāra. The difficulty of ‘how continuity is maintained in a mindless station’ already has three answers on the table here—the past has entity, the two dharmas are seeds of one another, and there is still a subtle mind. The later Yogācāra answer is that the eighth consciousness runs on constantly; the question is one and the same question.
8. The Life Faculty—One Clause Saying ‘Lifespan Is Life,’ One Clause Saying “Sustains Warmth and Consciousness”
Two lines of stanza: “the entity of the life faculty is lifespan, able to sustain warmth and consciousness.” Puguang’s Record explains that “the upper line reconciles the name, the lower line proves it by its operation”—the upper line only identifies “life faculty” and “lifespan” as one thing; the lower line states its operation.
The evidence for reconciling the name is the Abhidharma: “what is the life faculty? Lifespan in the three realms.” But what then is “lifespan”? The treatise answers: “there is another dharma able to sustain warmth and consciousness, and this is called lifespan.” The life faculty is therefore not a lump of vital force; its definition is functional—the cause that ties warmth and consciousness together and makes them continue to abide.
Clearing a misreading: do not think of the life faculty as a soul. It can neither stand alone apart from warmth and consciousness, nor do any third thing besides them; it is only the holding that ‘keeps those two from dispersing.’
Where it lands: this is the most economical account Buddhism gives of ‘being alive.’ To be alive is for bodily warmth and consciousness to remain upon one continuum; once these two leave the body, what remains is only the stiff prostrate body of the stanza.
9. The Stanza on Lifespan, Warmth, and Consciousness—A Sentence the World-Honored One Himself Spoke, and the Fascicle’s Only Description of a Corpse
The treatise here quotes a stanza, prefaced by the marker “therefore the World-Honored One said”—this is not the author of the treatise’s own composition but a scriptural citation, and all four lines are the Buddha’s words: “Lifespan, warmth, and consciousness—when these three dharmas leave the body, the body they leave lies stiff and prone, like a piece of wood without thought or feeling.”
Puguang’s Record has a gloss of a single word here that shows how finely the ancients read: “dying face upward is called lying stiff, dying face downward is called lying prone”; and he adds, “there is also dying on the side, and yet it says stiff and prone, speaking perhaps from the majority”—some do die on the side, and the sūtra names only the common cases.
Why quote this stanza? Because the preceding definition is abstract (“able to sustain warmth and consciousness”), and here a verification anyone has seen is given: when the three go together, the body is like wood. Having quoted it, the treatise at once concludes—“therefore there is another dharma serving as the cause that sustains warmth and consciousness in continuing to abide, and it is called lifespan.”
Clearing a misreading: the stanza says “three dharmas leave the body”; do not read the three dharmas as three little persons departing. The treatise’s position is that lifespan is what sustains and warmth and consciousness are what is sustained; the three passing away together is the sustainer and the sustained passing away together.
Where it lands: this is one of the few passages in the fascicle that can be used directly in the mindfulness of the body. A body is a body by these three things alone; withdraw the three and it is wood.
10. The Incidental Discussion on the Life Faculty—Whether the Entity of Lifespan Is Real or Provisional, Pressed by the Author through Eighteen Turns
The prose beneath the stanza suddenly becomes a tug of war, and a very long one.
The Sarvāstivādins establish: lifespan sustains warmth and consciousness. The Sautrāntikas ask: then what sustains lifespan? The Sarvāstivādins answer: warmth and consciousness in turn sustain lifespan. The Sautrāntikas at once seize the circle: if the three sustain one another, which ceases first? If none ceases first, the three ought to be everlasting and never pass away. The Sarvāstivādins fall back a step: then lifespan is sustained by karma. The Sautrāntikas press again: since karma can sustain, why not have karma sustain warmth and consciousness directly—what need is there for lifespan? The Sarvāstivādins show their hand: it cannot be, for otherwise “one must not let it follow that all consciousness from beginning to end is constantly maturation”—if karma alone sustained consciousness, consciousness would be maturation forever, which is not the fact. The Sautrāntikas push on: then let karma sustain warmth and warmth sustain consciousness. The Sarvāstivādins answer: in the formless realm there is no warmth—what would consciousness rest on? And so back and forth, until the author of the treatise remarks, “how can you shift your account again and again to suit yourself?”
The Sautrāntikas at last show their own proposal: “now I too do not say that there is no entity of lifespan at all; I say only that the entity of lifespan is not a separate real thing”; the entity of lifespan is “the portion of duration of the commonality drawn forth by the karma of the three realms”—karma draws forth the commonality, and however long the commonality abides, that “portion” is the lifespan. Two similes are given: “like the portion drawn forth by a seed of grain and the rest, lasting until the time of ripening; or like the portion drawn forth by the shooting of an arrow, lasting until the time of coming to rest.” The simile of the arrow incidentally draws in the outsiders’ position of a “swift motion,” which the author of the treatise refutes on three grounds: its entity being one, there ought to be no differences of speed, slowness, and time of arrival; having no resistance, it ought never to fall; and if the obstruction be wind, it ought either to fall as soon as released or never to fall.
Having refuted the outsiders, the author of the treatise closes for the Sarvāstivādins: “there is a separate real thing able to sustain warmth and consciousness, named the entity of lifespan—this account is the better.”
Where it lands: what is most worth learning from this passage is the rhythm of the pressing. Each turn does only one thing: substitute the opponent’s answer and see what extra follows from it. After eighteen turns, the cost to both parties lies open on the table—one who establishes a real thing must carry a circle, and one who establishes a portion of duration must carry the lack of an entity.
11. The Fourfold Analysis of Death and “Untimely Death”—Two Passages Appended to the Life Faculty
The treatise asks next: does one die because lifespan is exhausted, or is there some other cause? The Treatise of Designations opens four cases: the karma of lifespan exhausted, the karma of merit exhausted, both exhausted together, and “not being able to avoid a violent condition coming from without.” The fourth case is violent death. The author of the treatise adds a further item: it should also be said “through relinquishing the life-formations.”
He then cites the Treatise on the Development of Wisdom asking whether lifespan “turns along with the continuum” or “abides as soon as it arises”: of desire-realm beings who do not enter the two absorptions, it turns along with the continuum; of those who enter the two absorptions and of all beings of the form and formless realms, it abides as soon as it arises. The masters of Kaśmīra judge this thus: “the first shows that there is obstruction and the second that there is none; and by this it is settled that there is untimely death”—and this judgment is the Sarvāstivādins’ chief warrant for establishing “untimely death.”
He then cites a sūtra opening “four acquirings of a body of one’s own”: injurable only by oneself, as with the gods of playful forgetfulness and the gods of mental wrath, who pass away by arousing excessive delight or anger; injurable only by another, as with those within the womb or the egg; injurable by both, as with most of the desire realm; injurable by neither, a long list—the intermediate existence, the form and formless realms, naraka, Uttarakuru, one properly abiding on the path of seeing, one in the absorption of loving-kindness, one in the absorption of cessation, one in the absorption without perception, royal seers, the Buddha’s envoys, the five whom the Buddha prophesied, the bodhisattva in his final body and his mother, a wheel-turning monarch and his mother.
Yet in the sūtra the Buddha names for Śāriputra only the one station of neither perception nor non-perception. The treatise explains this as “naming the last to display the first,” and gives an instance of “naming the first to display the last” (the Brahmakāyika Heaven is the first heaven of pleasant birth) and of “naming the last to display the first” (the Ābhāsvara Heaven is the second heaven of pleasant birth). An outsider argues that those two instances have the word “like” and are similes, while this sūtra has no “like” and cannot be reasoned from them; the author of the treatise counters with the sūtra on the stations of consciousness—“sentient beings with form, differing in body and differing in perception, like a portion of humans and the gods, this is the first station of consciousness”—where the “like” is likewise not a simile. The argument done, the author of the treatise calls a halt himself: “the incidental discussion stops here.”
Clearing a misreading: this passage is often read as anecdote. In fact it completes the foregoing clause, “by this it is settled that there is untimely death”—if everyone died only when lifespan was exhausted, the Buddha would not have had to open four ways of acquiring a body of one’s own.
12. The Four Conditioned Marks—Arising, Abiding, Change, Cessation, and the Three Enemies Lying in Wait in the Dense Forest
Two lines of stanza: “the marks are of conditioned dharmas: the nature of arising, abiding, change, and cessation.” The treatise explains the four words with great regularity: “with regard to dharmas, what can make them arise is called arising, what can make them settle is called abiding, what can make them decay is called change, what can make them break up is called cessation,” and adds at the end, “nature has the sense of entity”—and it is precisely this word “entity” that the Sarvāstivādins want.
It runs at once into a scriptural proof: the sūtra speaks of only three conditioned marks. The treatise answers: the sūtra’s “change of what abides” is precisely another name for “change” here, as arising is called origination and cessation is called exhaustion. Then why does the sūtra not establish abiding? Two reasons: the three marks are what make the formations flow through the three times, and they are stated “in order to make sentient beings give rise to a mind of weariness and dread,” whereas abiding settles and does not produce weariness; and unconditioned dharmas too have abiding in their own characteristic, so that stating abiding would confuse the two.
Here the treatise gives the best simile in the fascicle: a man in a dense forest with three enemies wishing to injure him—“one drags him out of the dense forest, one weakens his strength, and one destroys his life faculty.” Arising drags you from the future into the present, change wears down your strength, cessation cuts off your life; so are the three marks with regard to the formations.
There is also a third account: the sūtra combines abiding and change under one name. Why combine them? Because “abiding is what sentient beings cling to and love,” and in order to make them weary of it and cast it away it is stated together with change—“just as Black-Ear is shown together with Auspicious.”
Clearing a misreading: the four marks are not the names of four stages but four operations. Upon a dharma of one and the same moment all four marks are present together, differing only in the time of their operation; and it is exactly this point that the Sautrāntikas will attack below.
Where it lands: this passage turns impermanence into a structure rather than an exclamation. What you cling to is precisely “abiding,” and the sūtra will not even give you that name by itself.
13. The Four Secondary Marks—The Simile of the Hen, and the Closing Off of “Infinite Regress”
The objection comes very fast: since the marks of arising and the rest are themselves conditioned, they should have marks of arising and the rest of their own; and so on without end. The stanza answers in two lines: “these have the arising of arising and the rest; upon eight and upon one they have function.”
“The arising of arising and the rest” are the four secondary marks—the treatise glosses them itself, “that is, the four secondary marks: the arising of arising, the abiding of abiding, the change of change, and the cessation of cessation.” How is the objection of infinite regress solved? “Because the four primary and the four secondary differ in their function upon eight and upon one.” Of function the treatise gives two glosses: “a dharma’s operation, or what is called human effort.”
The reckoning is this: when one dharma arises, nine dharmas in all, its own entity included, arise together—the entity one, the primary marks four, the secondary marks four. The “arising” among the primary marks excludes itself and gives rise to the other eight; the “arising of arising” among the secondary marks gives rise only to the one dharma, the primary “arising.” The treatise uses the hen as a simile: “as with a hen, some bear many chicks and some bear only one.” The arising of arising produces only one at a time, and so the series stops at the secondary marks and need not be added to further.
Clearing a misreading: do not imagine the secondary marks as a fifth and sixth tier of marks. The secondary and the primary marks are a set that accomplish one another: the eight dharmas of the primary marks already contain the secondary, and the secondary in turn accomplish only the primary. The nine dharmas close upon themselves, and the objection of infinite regress is cut off here.
Where it lands: this is the most typical move in Sarvāstivāda dharma-analysis—closing off a regress by a difference of function rather than by an addition of tiers. When Yogācāra later speaks of seeds and manifest activity perfuming one another, it uses the same kind of closure.
14. The Sautrāntika Objection—“On What Ground Is Empty Space Cut Up in This Fashion?”
Here the Sautrāntikas come out in the open, and their first sentence is very heavy: “on what ground is empty space cut up in this fashion?”—where there is nothing at all, you have carved out four names. The reason is “because there is no determinate means of knowledge”: these marks, unlike color and the rest, have no determinate direct perception, inference, or authoritative testimony to prove them.
The Sarvāstivādins bring in scripture: “the origination of the conditioned may be known; its exhaustion and its change of what abides may also be known.” The author of the treatise answers without ceremony: “Beloved of the gods! You cling to the letter and lose the sense; the Bhagavat said that it is the sense that is to be relied upon.” What is the real sense of that sūtra? The foolish cling to self and what belongs to self upon the continuum of the formations, and the World-Honored One, to cut off that clinging, displayed that ‘the continuum of the formations is conditioned and arisen from conditions’; it is not to say that a single moment possesses the three marks—for the origination and the rest of a single moment cannot be known, and what cannot be known should not be established as a mark.
And why does the sūtra repeat the two words “conditioned”? To make one know that this mark declares the conditioned, and not that the mark declares ‘the existence of a conditioned dharma’ (“as a gathering of white egrets declares that water is not absent”), nor that it declares the wholesomeness or unwholesomeness of a conditioned dharma (“as the marks of a maiden declare the wholesome or the unwholesome”). Both similes are very lively: seeing egrets one knows there is water—that declares existence; seeing the marks of a maiden one knows she will bear good or bad children—that declares good and bad; the four marks are neither.
The Sautrāntikas then give their own four marks: “the first arising of the continuum of the formations is called arising; at the station of final exhaustion it is called cessation; the continuum turning on in the middle is called abiding; and the difference between earlier and later is called change of what abides,” citing as evidence the World-Honored One’s words to Nanda on the arising, abiding, change, and cessation of feeling.
Where it lands: the same set of terms the Sarvāstivādins place upon the moment and the Sautrāntikas place upon the continuum. This sentence is the master key to the second half of the fascicle—the three stanzas quoted below are all there to make it firm.
15. The First Quoted Stanza—“The First of a Continuum Is Called Arising”
The treatise quotes the first stanza, prefaced with “therefore a stanza says”: “The first of a continuum is called arising; cessation is the station of final exhaustion; the turning on in the middle is called abiding; change of what abides is the difference of earlier and later.”
See clearly who is speaking. This is not a stanza of the author’s own composition but one he quotes as a lemma; he quotes it to prove that ‘setting the four marks upon the continuum’ is not his own new invention but has authority behind it. The four lines answer one by one to the prose of the preceding passage: first arising, final exhaustion, turning on in the middle, the difference of earlier and later.
Clearing a misreading: do not pass over the two words “continuum.” The Sarvāstivādins say that a single moment possesses the four marks; the Sautrāntikas say that upon a single moment there are no four marks to point to at all, and only when a stretch of continuum is laid open do arising, abiding, change, and cessation have places to stand. The whole force of the set of quoted stanzas is spent upon this “continuum.”
Where it lands: this is also how people actually experience it—no one ever sees impermanence within a single moment; it is seen only by setting two stretches, earlier and later, side by side.
16. The Second Quoted Stanza—“Not Being Before and Being Now Is Arising”
The second stanza is prefaced with “and there is a further stanza”: “Not being before and being now is arising; the continuum turning on is abiding; a difference of earlier and later is change of what abides; the cutting off of the continuum is called cessation.”
It is the same in sense as the former with a different set of words: arising is stated as “not being before and being now,” cessation as “the cutting off of the continuum.” Why quote a second stanza? Because “the first” and “final exhaustion” of the former stanza still carry a flavor of points in time and are easily read back into the moment; this stanza changes to “not being before and being now” and “the cutting off of the continuum,” and so states the four marks thoroughly as divisions upon a continuum.
Clearing a misreading: the four words “not being before and being now” occur three times in this fascicle, twice in Sautrāntika mouths and once in a Sarvāstivāda mouth, and the use differs. The Sautrāntikas use it to say that arising is merely a description; the Sarvāstivādins use it to say why a mark of arising must be established. One and the same phrase, each school taking what it needs—this is the place in the fascicle that most requires watchfulness.
Where it lands: to say in ordinary speech that ‘this has happened’ is to say exactly “not being before and being now.” The Sautrāntika point is that besides this there is no separate thing called “happening.”
17. The Third Quoted Stanza—“Since Dharmas Are Momentary, There Is No Abiding but Only Cessation”
The third stanza is prefaced with “and there is yet another stanza”: “Since dharmas are momentary, there is no abiding but only cessation; they cease of themselves, and so to hold that there is abiding does not hold in reason.”
This stanza has a different task from the two before it. The two former stanzas establish, stating how the four marks are set upon the continuum; this one refutes, pointing directly at the impossibility of an “abiding” upon the moment—dharmas being momentary, they cease as soon as they arise, and there is no stretch between that could be called abiding; and cessation is spontaneous, waiting on no outer condition, so that to establish a mark of abiding upon the moment does not hold in reason.
Having quoted it, the author of the treatise concludes: abiding is therefore spoken of only upon the continuum, and in this way the words of the Abhidharma can be made good—“what is called abiding? It is every formation that has arisen and not yet ceased.” As for the Treatise on the Development of Wisdom speaking of arising, death, and aging within a single mind, the author places that too: “that treatise’s text is stated with reference to the mind in the continuum of the commonality of sentient beings, and not with reference to a single moment.”
Clearing a misreading: three stanzas quoted in a row are not one thing said three times. Two establish and the third refutes; the third seals off the Sarvāstivāda road of ‘the moment possessing the four marks.’
Where it lands: when several stanzas are quoted in a row in a treatise, first ask ‘what is each of them doing’—this is often quicker than glossing them line by line.
18. The Four Marks upon the Moment, and the Diamond That Was Thrown
The Sautrāntikas do not stop at the continuum. The treatise goes on: even with respect to each single moment, once “holding that there are real things” is set aside, the four marks are equally established—not being before and being now is arising, being and then not being again is cessation, the later succeeding the earlier is abiding, and the difference of earlier and later is change of what abides.
The objector says: when earlier and later are alike, where is the difference? The treatise uses the diamond as a simile: “as with a diamond and the like, there is a difference between being thrown and not thrown, and between being thrown with strong force and with weak force, and a difference of speed and slowness in falling”—one and the same diamond, thrown or not, thrown hard or gently, falls at different rates, which shows that a difference in the transformation of the great elements exists; it is only because formations continue on alike, with little difference between earlier and later, that they look unchanged.
A further objection: the last moment of sound or light, and the last six sense fields at nirvāṇa, have no later thought—do they not then lack change of what abides, so that the mark does not extend to all the conditioned? The treatise answers: here abiding is not being established as a conditioned mark at all; what is meant is “the change of what abides”; where there is abiding there is necessarily change, and so there is no fault of not extending to all.
The author of the treatise then presses several objections in a row against the Sarvāstivāda position that ‘the four marks are present together and operate at different times’: supposing the arising of a future thing has an operation, how is it still future; when the operation of arising has passed away in the present, how is it still present; the three operations of abiding, change, and cessation being all in the present, is the moment to be called abiding, change, or cessation; if abiding’s force is strong and so it operates first, how does it afterwards grow weak enough to be broken by change and cessation along with the primary dharma; and if it be said that abiding, having operated, should not operate again, as with arising—here the author draws a very fine distinction: the operation of arising is to draw the dharma into the present, and once drawn in it need not be drawn again; the operation of abiding is to settle the dharma so that it neither decays nor ceases, and having made it abide it may well make it abide forever, so that the operation of abiding should arise constantly and arising cannot be taken as its model. He asks at the end: once the operation of abiding stops, change and cessation and the primary dharma no longer abide—where then do the two marks change and cessation operate, and what work is left for them?
Where it lands: this passage is the treatise’s model exercise in ‘inspecting a model.’ One need not ask whether it is right; ask first: run it once as it says, and see whether it contradicts itself.
19. The Fourth Quoted Stanza—“If It Is That Very Earlier One”
Pressing on to the mark of “change,” the author of the treatise says: that a dharma having arisen and not yet broken up is called abiding, and having abided and at the time of breaking up is called cessation, may still pass; only “change,” pressed forward or backward within one dharma, cannot stand. Why? “Change means the transformation of the nature and characteristic between earlier and later, and it is not that upon this very dharma one may say it is changed from this.” And so a stanza is quoted: “If it is said to be that very earlier one, change is not established; if it is said to differ from the earlier, it is not one and the same dharma. Therefore, upon one dharma, to establish change cannot in the end be established.”
This stanza too is prefaced with “therefore a stanza says” and is a lemma and not a composition; it is quoted to compress a whole stretch of the foregoing pressing into four lines. The sense is extremely simple: say that it is the earlier one, and “change” cannot be spoken of at all; say that it is not the earlier one, and a different dharma has been substituted, so that it is not ‘the change of one dharma.’ Neither road goes through.
The author of the treatise then adds a refutation of the mark of cessation: another school says that only when the causes and conditions of cessation are met can the mark of cessation cause a dharma to cease; the treatise uses the simile of taking medicine—“when a purgative is taken a god must come to make it work”—the medicine works of itself, so why call in a god? Since the causes and conditions of cessation can themselves make it cease, why posit a mark of cessation besides? And they too allow that mind and mental factors cease of themselves in a moment, so that cessation and abiding would have no earlier and later, and one dharma at one time both abiding and ceasing does not accord with correct reasoning.
Where it lands: “change” is the hardest of the four marks to place. To say today that ‘this thing has changed’ is always to set two points in time against one another; once only one point in time remains, the word “change” has nothing to rest on. That is exactly what the stanza says.
20. Arising Cannot Give Rise Alone—“Not Apart from the Meeting of Causes and Conditions”
After all the disputing over whether there is a mark of arising, an important qualification is added here. The objector asks: if arising can give rise to what it produces while still in the future, why do not all future dharmas arise at once? The stanza answers in two lines: “arising can give rise to what it produces, yet not apart from the meeting of causes and conditions.”
The treatise’s explanation is very short: it is not that, apart from the meeting of the other causes and conditions, the force of the mark of arising alone can give rise, and so future dharmas do not arise all at once. The Sautrāntikas at once ask back: then we see only that causes and conditions have the capacity to give rise—what need is there for a mark of arising besides? The Sarvāstivādins answer: “the nature of dharmas is subtle and exceedingly hard to know, and so, though a thing presently has its entity, it may be unknowable”; and without a mark of arising, the expression in the sixth case, “the arising of form,” “the arising of feeling,” could not be established.
The Sautrāntikas push the counter-example to its end: if a real thing must be established to make good an expression in the sixth case, then to make good the cognitions of “emptiness” and “non-self” must one establish a nature of emptiness and a nature of non-self apart from dharmas? To make good the cognitions of one and two, large and small, junction and separation, this and that, must one, like the outsiders, establish separate natures of number, magnitude, junction, separation, and the rest? And what of the sixth-case expression “the intrinsic nature of form”—is there another intrinsic nature apart from form? Therefore arising and the rest are merely provisionally established, and to say “the arising of form” is only to distinguish it from the others—“as the world says the fragrance of sandalwood, the substance of a stone.”
The Sarvāstivādins at the end no longer answer point by point but simply state their stance: how could one abandon one’s own school merely because those who object are many—“one does not refrain from sowing wheat for fear that deer may come, nor refrain from eating a sweet ball for fear that many flies may settle on it.”
Where it lands: this proverbial ending is the most human touch in the fascicle. It grants that the objections are objections, and yet holds that to establish a thesis carries its own responsibility. The author of the treatise records the attitudes of both parties as well, and not the reasoning alone.
21. Name-Body, Phrase-Body, Syllable-Body—Why a Sentence Can Be Understood
Two lines of stanza: “what are called the name-bodies and the rest are the collective expression of ideation, statement, and letter-sound.” Name is explained by ideation, phrase by statement, syllable by letter-sound, and body by collective expression.
The treatise explains name as “name means ideation,” as in the ideations of form, sound, odor, and flavor; phrase as “a phrase is a statement, able to express a sense to completion,” as in the statement ‘all formations are impermanent,’ or as able to make clear the correspondence and difference of action, quality, and time; syllable as “a syllable is a letter-sound,” as a, ā, i, ī. An objector says that letters are just the names of written signs; the treatise answers: it is not that letters were made to display written signs, but that written signs were made to display letters—for it was in order that a person might understand without having heard them spoken that written signs were made. “Body” is “collective expression,” which the treatise glosses as “what is called collective expression is the sense of gathering together”; two or more names joined make a name-body, and the rest by analogy.
The greatest objection comes afterwards: these three are of the nature of speech, speech is sound, and sound belongs to form—how then can they be said instead to be formations not associated with mind? The treatise answers: the three are not of the intrinsic nature of speech. Speech is only vocal sound, and vocal sound of itself does not make the sense known; the order is “speech gives rise to name, name displays the sense, and only so can it be made known.” And what kind of vocal sound makes the sense knowable? Only one that speakers have “jointly settled among the several senses as the fixed measure of what expresses.”
Clearing a misreading: do not take the name-, phrase-, and syllable-bodies for a grammar. The Sarvāstivādins establish them in order to place a very practical observation—one and the same string of sounds is heard as sense by one who understands and as mere noise by one who does not. That difference must have somewhere to be put.
Where it lands: this is the starting point of Buddhist theory of language. When Yogācāra later speaks of the perfuming of verbal designations as seeds, the question is still this one: how is sense carried?
22. The Fifth Quoted Stanza—The Nine Senses of the Sound Go
The treatise gives an example to prove “jointly settled as the fixed measure of what expresses,” and quotes a stanza, prefaced with “therefore there is a stanza that says”: “Direction, beast, earth, light, speech, diamond, eye, heaven, and water—upon these nine senses the wise established the single sound go.”
This stanza is quoted from an outside text and is not the author of the treatise’s own statement. A single sound go the ancients jointly settled upon to designate nine wholly unrelated things—direction, beast, earth, light, speech, diamond, eye, heaven, and water. Why quote it? Because it proves the word “convention” most thoroughly: were there a natural link between sound and sense, how could one sound carry nine senses?
The treatise at once turns this back upon those who hold that name displays the sense: since it is a jointly settled measure, then “the work of displaying by vocal sound alone is already accomplished; what need is there to reckon crosswise and posit besides a really existent name?” It then seals off each road in turn: is name produced by speech—since all sounds are of the nature of sound, every sound ought to produce a name; is name displayed by speech—the same fault. If it be said that the sound that produces or displays has a distinguishing feature, that feature already suffices to display the sense—what need is there of a separate name? Again, the sounds of the several moments cannot be gathered together, nor does any dharma arise little by little in parts—how then is a name given rise to by speech? And if one shifts to holding that speech produces the syllable, the syllable the name, and the name displays the sense, the same objections hold, because the syllables of the several moments likewise cannot be gathered.
He then refutes another road: if the name, like arising and the rest, arises together with the sense, then a present name could not designate a past or a future sense; and moreover “parents and others give names to their children as they please”—a name is added later at will, how can it arise together with the sense? Besides, unconditioned dharmas ought then to have no name, which you do not grant. As for the World-Honored One’s saying that a stanza depends on name, the treatise answers: sound is itself name, and a stanza is the differing arrangement of names; to hold it a real thing does not accord with correct reasoning—“as with many trees forming a row, or minds in succession”—a row is nothing apart from the trees.
The Sarvāstivādins at the end still hold their own school: the name-bodies and the rest are separate real things, real and not provisional, on the ground that “not every dharma is such as reflective thought can know.”
23. The Realm Affiliation, Five Classes, and Three Qualities of the Name-Bodies and the Rest
Two lines of stanza: “they belong to desire and form, are included in the class of sentient beings, are of homogeneous outflow and of indeterminate quality.” Four gates are answered at once.
Realm affiliation: the two realms desire and form only. The treatise records an alternative account, “some say that they also belong to the formless realm, and yet it cannot be stated”—preserved without adjudication. Sentient or insentient: included in the class of sentient beings, on the ground that “they are possessed by a speaker and are not the sense displayed”—what possesses the name-bodies is the speaker, not the sense expressed (the sense extending to the insentient). Five classes: homogeneous outflow only, neither maturation nor nourished. Three qualities: unobscured-indeterminate only.
Clearing a misreading: to say that the name-bodies and the rest are indeterminate is not to say that language has no good or evil. Good and evil lie in the mind that utters, not in the name-, phrase-, and syllable-bodies themselves; these only carry.
Where it lands: this item has a very practical side for practice—one and the same sentence is well or ill spoken according to the mind and not the letters; and the letters themselves being indeterminate, anyone may take them up. That the scriptures could be compiled, could be recited, and could also be misused has its warrant just here.
24. The General Analysis under the Several Gates—One Stanza Settles Twelve Items
The last stanza, in four lines: “commonality is likewise so, and also the formless and maturation; acquisition and the marks extend to three classes; non-acquisition and the two absorptions are of homogeneous outflow only.” The realm affiliation, five classes, and three qualities stated separately for each item above are here filled in all at once.
“Likewise so” says that commonality, like the name-bodies and the rest, extends to desire and form, to the class of sentient beings, to homogeneous outflow, and to the unobscured-indeterminate. “And the formless” adds one item: commonality is not confined to desire and form but extends to all three realms. “And maturation” adds another: commonality is not confined to homogeneous outflow but extends to maturation as well. So commonality extends to three realms and to two classes. “Acquisition” and the four marks extend to three classes—momentary, homogeneous outflow, and maturation. “Non-acquisition” and the two absorptions are of homogeneous outflow only, the single word “only” being there to make clear that they are not maturation.
At the end the treatise puts two questions to itself and thereby makes its own conventions plain: why is it not said that acquisition and the rest are of the class of sentient beings only? Because it was already said above, “what a sentient being possesses,” and the rest. Why is it not said that the marks extend to both the class of sentient beings and what is not? Because it was already said above, “all that is conditioned is together”—that is, together with the four marks. What remains unstated may be known by inference as fits each case.
Clearing a misreading: do not read this stanza as an appendix. It is the fascicle’s balance sheet—the twelve formations not associated with mind, each located upon the three coordinates of realm, class, and quality. That the Sarvāstivādins establish a dharma as “real” is not merely to say that it exists, but that it can occupy a determinate cell in this table.
Where it lands: reading this fascicle through and then looking again at the phrase “formations not associated with mind,” one finds that it is not a box of odds and ends. Whatever cannot be assigned to form and cannot be assigned to mind, and yet really does work within experience—all those ‘reasons why’—are gathered here. Commonality manages resemblance, the two absorptions manage the blank, the life faculty manages continuity, the four marks manage flowing, the name-, phrase-, and syllable-bodies manage meaning. Within one fascicle, five matters that everyone meets have been given five seats.
Further Resonances: A Mirror of Four Commentaries
The above is the sense of this fascicle in itself. What follows illuminates it from the side with the ancient masters’ judgments, Paramārtha’s alternative translation, and Saṅghabhadra’s counter-refutations—a mirror is not the treatise, but a change of reading upon the same fascicle.
One: on the name and sense of commonality, the four masters each make a different explanation. Puguang’s Record preserves the two readings, appositional-determinative and dependent-determinative, and uses the appositional reading to “distinguish it from the Sautrāntikas” and to “distinguish it from the Vaiśeṣikas”; Yuanhui’s Verse Commentary takes only the dependent reading; Fabao’s Commentary, after citing the Treatise Conforming to Correct Principle, judges outright that “since the treatise explains it thus, other explanations are a needless trouble,” and sets up his own instead: “the dharmas that are the same are not one, and so are called the same in a multitude; and being their cause, it is called a portion”; Shentai’s Commentary does not discuss the mode of explanation but turns instead to reconciling the differing names in four texts: “the root treatise of the six feet calls this the commonality of sentient beings”; “this commonality of sentient beings the Miscellaneous Heart Treatise calls the class-kind of beings, speaking only of the commonality of persons and not of dharmas. The Mahāvibhāṣā calls it the place of receiving a body, speaking only of the commonality of dharmas and not of persons. This treatise calls it commonality, extending to both persons and dharmas.” Shentai further refutes the old masters’ account that “apart from the commonality of persons there is a separate commonality of dharmas.” All four are recorded together, without adjudication.
Two: Saṅghabhadra’s counter-refutations are densest in this fascicle. The Treatise Conforming to Correct Principle calls Vasubandhu “the Sūtra-master” and refutes his words passage by passage. In the section on commonality, Saṅghabhadra answers the objection about “commonality of the insentient” with a counter-charge: “you too allow that there are the destinies of humans and gods and births from the womb and the egg; why do you not also allow that mangoes and the rest are destinies and mung beans and the rest are births?”, and establishes commonality as really existent on three grounds. In the section on the life faculty he takes up the lemma “now I too do not say that there is no entity of lifespan at all; I say only that the entity of lifespan is not a separate real thing” and judges that “therefore the Sūtra-master, upon this sense, piles up many words that declare nothing at all,” concluding, “therefore the entity of lifespan is really a separate thing, able to sustain warmth and consciousness, and is called the life faculty.” In the section on the four marks he takes up the whole of “on what ground is empty space cut up in this fashion” and refutes it, ending, “then it is you who, by holding to the provisional, are on the contrary boring and churning empty space.” Both schools are recorded together, with no verdict as to which prevails.
Three: the names of the four marks in Paramārtha’s older translation differ from those of this fascicle. Xuanzang has arising, abiding, change, and cessation; Paramārtha has “arising, aging, abiding, and impermanence,” and his prose follows accordingly: “aging is what can alter this dharma; impermanence is what can make this dharma cease.” The stanza on change Paramārtha renders “if it is as before there is no aging; if it differs it is not the former dharma; therefore upon one dharma the mark of aging cannot be established.” The stanza on the name-bodies Paramārtha renders “name-collections, phrase-collections, and letter-collections, the collective gathering of designation, speech, and syllable,” and his example of a phrase is not ‘all formations are impermanent’ but ‘a good friend met at one time.’ The stanza on the sound go Paramārtha renders “speech, direction, earth, light, ox,” putting “ox” in place of “beast” among the nine senses, and marking its source, “as the Nirukta treatise says in a verse”—whereas Xuanzang’s version has only “therefore there is a stanza that says.” What is taken and what is left between the two translations is for the translator to determine; here they are merely recorded together.
Four: the sources of the three quoted stanzas survive only because Shentai’s Commentary transmits Paramārtha’s own commentary. Shentai says, “Master Paramārtha’s own commentary says: of the three stanzas below, the first stanza occurs in the upadeśa on the sūtras composed by Mahākātyāyana”; “the second stanza occurs in the upadeśa on the sūtras composed by Buddhatrāta. The third stanza occurs in a treatise composed by the Dharma Master Kumāralāta.” On the stanza “if it is said to be that very earlier one” he likewise cites, “Master Paramārtha’s own commentary says: this verse too is a line of the stanzas of the Correct Principle treatise in the upadeśa on Mahākātyāyana’s sūtra.” Paramārtha’s own commentary is now lost, and this is the only surviving record of it. Whether the attributions are exact the ancients did not settle; they are recorded together without adjudication.
Five: what the two characters of “the arising of arising” refer to above and below is given in three forms by three masters. Puguang’s Record preserves two readings: “the upper character of arising is the minor arising and the lower is the major, because it gives rise to arising,” and, alternatively, “the upper character of arising is the major arising and the lower the minor, being the arising of arising and so called the arising of arising”; Yuanhui’s Verse Commentary takes only the former, “the upper character of arising is the minor arising and the lower the major, because from the minor arising the major arising is produced, and so it is called the arising of arising”; Shentai’s Commentary makes a form of its own, explaining the upper character as “operation.” The three forms are recorded together.
Six: the story of Black-Ear and Auspicious and the older translation. Puguang’s Record tells the story in full: “Black-Ear and Auspicious were two sisters who always went about together. The elder was named Auspicious, and wherever she went she brought benefit. The younger was Black-Ear, so named because her ears were black, and wherever she went she brought loss,” and he denounces the older rendering: “the old version says Goddess of Merit and Maiden of Darkness—the translators were mistaken.” Shentai’s Commentary likewise holds the old names to be wrong; Yuanhui tells the story in full without judging; Fabao says only “it may be known from the text.” Judging and not judging, each is returned to its own place.
Seven: to whose account the maturation of non-perception belongs, only Shentai’s Commentary has made the determination. Shentai says, “if we follow the assessors of the Mahāvibhāṣā, among the eleven accounts they assess and take the second. Now the Kośa: Question, of what is it the maturation? Answer, of the absorption without perception. This agrees with the second master’s account in the Mahāvibhāṣā, which the assessors preserve,” while what the Treatise Conforming to Correct Principle takes “agrees with the first master’s account in the Mahāvibhāṣā and is not what the assessors of the Mahāvibhāṣā preserve.” This is the finest piece of ancient collation in this fascicle, recorded for reference.
Eight: the twenty-two variant readings in Fascicle Five of the Taishō, recorded together and unaltered. Three of them touch on doctrine—「種姓」 tr. “lineage” reads 「種性」 tr. “nature of the kind” in the Song, Yuan, and Ming witnesses; 「此於諸法能起名生」 tr. “with regard to dharmas, what can make them arise is called arising” reads 「中於」 tr. “within, with regard to” in the Palace witness; 「或謂士用」 tr. “or what is called the effort of a person” reads 「士時」 tr. “the time of a person” in the Song and Yuan witnesses and 「生時」 tr. “the time of arising” in the Ming. The rest are variant graphs, transcriptions, and omissions or additions. The base still follows the Taishō reading, the variants being recorded alongside for reference; what is to be adopted is not for this layer to settle.
六因·五果Six Causes · Five Results
全文五層 →Full five layers →這一卷站在全品的哪個關節上
分別根品到這裡轉了一個大彎。前面三卷講的是『有哪些法』——二十二根、俱生的心與心所、心不相應行;從這一卷起,講的是『這些法憑什麼起來』。
這個轉折不是後人加的。三家疏主同時在卷首標出同一句科語:普光《俱舍論記》作『此下當品大文第三明因緣』,法寶《俱舍論疏》作『此下當品大文第三明因及緣』,圓暉《頌疏》作『從此大文第三明因緣』——三家用字小異而所斷之界全同。神泰《疏》另以五分立科(結前、牒前文、徵問因緣、二十五行頌、四緣),科法不同而界處也一樣。四位注家在同一個字上落刀,這件事本身就告訴讀者:這裡是分別根品的第三個大段落之始,也是全論因果論的正門。
論文的第一句正是一句承轉:「如是已說不相應行。前言生相生所生時,非離所餘因緣和合,此中何法說為因緣?」——「生相」在前卷已經講過,可是那裡留了一個尾巴:生相能生法,卻不是單憑自己就辦得成的,還要「所餘因緣和合」。那個尾巴,這一卷來收。
收的方式是兩張表:因的一側開為六,果的一側開為五。六因五果講完,卷子就斷了;四緣要到下一卷才說。這個斷處值得留意:本頌第六十二頌其實橫跨了因與緣,玄奘分卷時捨了頌的界、從了義的界。圓暉在這一卷的末尾寫下「已上不同,總是第一,明因已竟」——注家的結語與譯家的刀口,恰好落在同一處。因先講盡,緣另起一卷:這是唐代這部書的讀法,不是偶然的分冊。
一、為什麼是六個因(正頌五十)
頌:「能作及俱有,同類與相應,遍行并異熟,許因唯六種。」
先問一句最容易被跳過的:因為什麼恰好是六個?
論的答語極短:「因有六種,一能作因、二俱有因、三同類因、四相應因、五遍行因、六異熟因,對法諸師許因唯有如是六種。」——注意末句的主語不是「佛」,是「對法諸師」。圓暉解頌的句法時說得清楚:上三句只是列名,「第四一句結歸本宗」。這一結,把六因的權源標明了:它是阿毘達磨師的建制。
排誤在此:讀者容易把六因當成經說。圓暉隨即記下異宗的反問——經部等宗不承認六因,理由是「無經說故」,而四緣他們是承認的,因為「有經說故」。所以本論此處用「對法諸師許」五個字,不是客套,是分寸——四緣論主是逕說的(下卷「說有四種緣」引經而立),六因則標明所出。
落地:這五個字定下了讀全卷的姿態。論標六因,用的是「對法諸師許」而不是「佛說」——經部一系即據此質問:四緣經有明文,六因經無明文,何以並立?但這是本卷爭論的起點,不是本卷的結論:眾賢在《順正理》裡逐條舉經以立六因,末後直斷「如是六因,佛處處說,諸憎背者迷故不見」。有無經據,本論自身未判,二造之立並錄在承衍。往後遇到經部一節一節的反詰,回頭看這五個字,就知道爭的到底是什麼。
普光在名相上另做了一層功夫:六個名,每一個都拆成「持業釋」與「依主釋」二讀(能作即因/能作之因,餘皆類推),末後總斷一句『此六因並不得作有財釋』——因為六者的體本身就是因,不是借他物為因。這一句看似瑣碎,實則是防呆:六因說的是法自身充當因的六種方式,不是法之外另有六個叫作「因」的東西。
二、能作因:把『不妨礙』也算成因(正頌五十一之首句)
頌只有五個字:「除自餘能作。」
先問:憑什麼一切法都算某一法的因?答:「一切有為唯除自體,以一切法為能作因,由彼生時無障住故。」——判準是「無障住」:某法生起的那一刻,其餘一切法都不加阻攔地在那裡,這就夠了。圓暉點出「除自」的用意:法生時要除掉自體,因為自體不能作自己的因。
第一重排誤,論主自己先問了:那不是說「未知諸漏當起,由已知故諸漏不生」嗎?智對於漏明明是障礙,日光對於看見星星明明是障礙。答得極精:說「無障住」,是說「此生時,彼皆無障住」——漏生起的那一刻,智並沒有現起;看見星星的那一刻,日光並沒有照著。能作因是就實際生起的那一剎那說的,不是就一般的能力說的。
第二重排誤更深。有人說:能障而不障才算因,就像國人說「我因國主而得安樂」;可涅槃、不生法對有為法的生起連障礙的能力都沒有,那憑什麼是因?論主答得很硬:仍是因,像沒有力量的國王一樣照樣可以這麼說。神泰把這一義的落點說得最直白,他釋能作因云『由不障果生,能作果義名能作因,此從用為名也』——名從用立,不從力立。
第三重是有部與經部都要面對的難:既然一切法都不障礙,為什麼諸法不一齊生?一人殺生時為什麼不是人人同得殺罪?論主答:只由「無障」而許為能作因,並不是說它們「於生有親作力」。親因不具、等起心不具,所以不頓生、不同罪。
落地:能作因是六因中最寬的一個——圓暉的比較最好記:以不障礙釋能作,故能作因寬通一切法(有為無為皆得為因),而它所得的增上果卻狹,唯限有為。寬因狹果,這一對不對稱,是後面第十一段「無為無因果」那一大諍的伏筆:無為可以當因,卻拿不到果。
三、俱有因:因與果同時,而且互為對方(正頌五十一之後三句)
頌:「俱有互為果,如大相所相,心於心隨轉。」
先問:什麼叫「俱有」?圓暉一句話解完:俱有者,俱時而有;「互為果」三字就是在解俱有因。論的定義是「若法更互為士用果,彼法更互為俱有因」——判準不是同時,是互為果。三個例子:四大種彼此、四相與所相之法、心與心隨轉法。
排誤在一個容易滑過去的例外上。論隨即補:「法與隨相非互為果,然法與隨相為俱有因,非隨相於法。」本法與小四相之間是單向的——本法是隨相的因,隨相不是本法的因。所以「互為果」是俱有因的通相,不是一切俱有之法都合的相。此處論文接著寫下「此中應辯」四字;圓暉把這四字讀作『勸釋通』——意思是論主在此點出以互為果釋俱有因尚有未盡,請人再為分疏。讀者要先看清這個縫:互為果是俱有因的通相,可是俱有因所攝的並不全是互為果的——定義與外延,在這裡差了一線。
論的重頭在下半段:世間公認的因果是種子在前、芽在後,「未見如斯同時因果」。接著一答一徵:「豈不現見燈焰燈明芽影同時亦為因果」——普光判此為有部之答,而下文「此應詳辯」以下為經部之反徵。反徵之意是:焰與明,究竟是焰生明,還是前一念的人功、燈器、油、炷合起來使焰明同時生?影更明顯:影是別的東西擋光才有的,怎麼能說以芽為因?
接著出面的不是論主,是有部的救。「理不應然,隨有無故」一句,普光判「理不應然至理成因果」為「說一切有部救義」,並釋「隨有無」作「說果體有無,隨因有無故」——是果之有無隨因之有無,不是影隨障光之物。救的落腳處在因明的一條判準:「若此有無,彼隨有無者,此定為因,彼定為果。」俱有法中一有一切有、一無一切無——這正合此判準。經部隨即再難「如何可言互為因果」,有部答「即由前說,此亦無違」,因為此判準本來就是雙向的。至於三根木杖互倚而立的譬喻,是經部牒過有部之救以後才反問的:那三根杖到底是靠同時互倚而立,還是由前念因緣使它們同時生起而立?而且那裡另有繩鉤與地面。收語「此亦有餘同類因等,是故俱有因義得成」則又是有部的話,普光標作「說一切有部救言」。
落地:同時因果是有部最特別、也最受攻擊的一著。看懂這一諍,往後讀種子與現行互熏之類的同時因果,就有了起點。
四、心隨轉法的體:心所、二律儀、諸相(正頌五十二之前三句)
頌:「心所二律儀,彼及心諸相,是心隨轉法。」
先問:什麼樣的法才夠格叫「隨心而轉」?論列了三類:一切心相應法(諸心所)、靜慮律儀與無漏律儀這兩種律儀、以及這些法連同心自身的生等諸相。
排誤有二。第一,二律儀是色法(無表),色法怎麼隨心轉?圓暉的解釋最省事:這兩種律儀「入定則有,出定則無」,所以名心隨轉——它的有無完全掛在心的定散上。第二,頌說「諸相」而不說「生生」等隨相,普光提醒:既言生等而不言生生等,「即顯隨相非心隨轉」。這是一個字的分寸,卻決定了下一段五十八法與五十四法的算法。
落地:心隨轉法不是一份雜項清單,是俱有因三類之中最難成立的那一類。四大種彼此互資、四相與所相互資,都還好講;心與色法(律儀)、心與不相應行(諸相)之間要說「互為果」,才是真考驗。論在這裡先把體列清楚,是為了下一頌能用五個字判它。
五、由時、由果、由善等:十因判隨轉(正頌五十二之末句)
頌只有五個字:「由時果善等。」
先問:憑什麼判一法是隨心轉?答有三門。就「時」而言,此法與心同一生、同一住、同一滅,並同墮一世;圓暉把這四項數出來——時有四種,一生二住三滅四墮一世。就「果」而言,此法與心同一果、同一異熟、同一等流。就「善等」而言,此法與心同善、同不善、同無記。三門合為十,故名十因。
排誤落在一個字上。論說「應知此中前一後一,顯俱顯共其義不同」——前面那個「一」(一生一住一滅)說的是「同時」,後面那個「一」(一果一異熟一等流)說的是「共同」。同一個「一」字,兩處指的不是一回事。圓暉的釋語最好背:前時言一顯俱一時,後果言一顯共一果。普光則在兩門各下一句總判:時門是『此顯與心同一時方名隨轉』,果門是『此顯與心同一果等方名隨轉』。
第二重排誤是「一果」為什麼還要另說等流與異熟。普光引《順正理》通之,並把士用果分成四種——俱生、無間、隔越、不生——說明此處的「一果」只取士用與離繫二果,不取俱生輾轉那一種(自體對自體不成一果),所以才要把等流、異熟另外標出。這一段是全卷最細的針腳之一,讀不懂不礙大體,但它示範了阿毘達磨的做事方式:一個字若可能有歧義,就再加一個字去堵。
落地:算法隨之而來。心王最少與五十八法互為俱有因(十大地法、彼四十本相、心自己的八本隨相);反過來,五十八法之中除去心的四隨相,餘五十四法才是心的因——普光給的理由是隨相「生法力劣,非等所相法」,故望心王非因(而大地法上四十隨相之所以不入五十八,理由另是一條:「以隔遠故力不及彼」,二由不可互換)。論主並破「唯十四法」之說——神泰標它為第二師之解——所依的是《品類足論》的一段誦文;有的傳本不誦「及彼相應法」五字,迦濕彌羅國毘婆沙師便說那段文必應如此誦,或應准義知其省略。一個古本的五個字,牽動一整套法數:這是讀阿毘達磨必須習慣的事。
論末尾還特別分開兩件事:由俱有因而成因者必定俱有,但俱有者未必由俱有因而成因。八組例子(隨相對本法、得與所得等)都是俱有而非俱有因——理由是它們並不同取一果、一異熟、一等流。
六、同類因:相似還不夠,要同部、同地、在前(正頌五十三與五十四之前半)
頌:「同類因相似,自部地前生,道展轉九地,唯等勝為果,加行生亦然,聞思所成等。」
先問:相似之法互為因,這不是很自然嗎?論的第一句正是這樣說——善五蘊與善五蘊、染污與染污、無記與無記,展轉相望為同類因。
這一句之後,論先岔出一段最常被跳過的異說。善與染二性之因古無異論,起爭的是無記——且論文「淨無記蘊」四字所指是一類不是兩類,法寶逐字釋作「言無記者,謂唯無覆無記法也」,並判「善、染之因更無異論。無記五蘊異說不同」:色蘊與其餘四蘊之間到底互不互為因?論列三家。一家說「淨無記蘊五是色果,四非色因」——五蘊都是色之果,即色能為五蘊之因,而四蘊不生色。一家說「五是四果,色非四因」——方向恰恰倒過來,四蘊能為五蘊之因,而色不生四蘊。一家說「色與四蘊相望展轉皆不為因」——兩邊都不成因。排誤:前二說不是同一句話的兩種說法,是方向相反的兩宗;讀時只須抓住『誰是果』——「五是色果」則色作因,「五是四果」則四蘊作因。光記把兩家的理由也都錄下了:前者謂「四蘊勝故非色因,色蘊劣故與四為因」,後者謂「四蘊勢力強,故能為色因。色蘊勢力劣,故非與四為因」——同一組法,因勝劣之判相反而結論相反。論列而不判,古德之取捨錄在承衍。
異說之後,論才加上三道閘。
第一道是「自部自地」。部指五部(見苦所斷乃至修所斷),地指九地(欲界一、四靜慮、四無色)。見苦所斷只與見苦所斷為因;欲界只與欲界為因,乃至有頂只與有頂為因。異地相望,全無因義。第二道是「前生」——只有先前已生之法,才與後來之法為同類因。第三道是「唯等勝為果」:加行所生之法只與相等、殊勝者為因,不作低劣者之因。
排誤最集中的是第二道閘。論引《發智論》為證,卻碰上那部論自問自答的一句「無時非因」——若真無時非因,未來豈不也有同類因?論主的解法是:那句話是就俱有、相應、異熟三因隱密而說的。有人另解為「依最後位密作是答」,論主判其「非為善釋」,理由是未來法在正生位之前並不是同類因。他還舉等無間的問答作旁證:那裡論主答的是「若時此法未至已生」,可見兩處問答本就不同軌。這一節論主用了全卷語氣最重的一句:「如是作文獲何功德?唯顯論主非善於文。」——所評的是《發智》立文之巧拙,不是它的義理;一句之內,敬其義而不諱其文。
第二重排誤在「未來世無同類因」會不會使同類因變成「本無而有」。論主答得乾脆:這是就「位」建立的,不是就「體」建立的。而異熟因為什麼未來就有?因為異熟因與果不相似,即使沒有前後也不會互為因果;同類因與果相似,若無前後就會互為因、互為果,那是與理相違的。同類因就位立、異熟因就相立——這一句是全段的樞。
第三重排誤在「唯自地」與『九地互為因』的表面矛盾。論分得清楚:唯自地是依有漏說;無漏道則九地展轉為因,因為無漏道「於諸地皆如客住不墮界攝」,不被地愛執為己有。圓暉的比喻好記:無漏在諸地起,如客人暫住。
落地在最後一段的加行善。聞所成能作聞、思之因而不作修之因(欲界無修所成);思所成不作聞所成之因,因為聞比思劣;修所成只作修之因。九品之間也是這樣:下下品能作九品之因,上上品只作上上品之因。論主在此用了一個世間比喻收尾——不會白費劬勞而一無所獲。修學的次第,在因論裡是有結構根據的:低品可以引高品,高品不回頭作低品之因。
七、相應因:五義平等,體同俱有而義不同(正頌五十四之後半)
頌:「相應因決定,心心所同依。」
先問:相應因既然「體即俱有因」,為什麼還要另立一名?論用一連串反詰把條件逼出來:只有心心所是相應因;所緣行相不同的不算;異時而所緣行相相同的也不算;異身而所緣、行相、時間都相同的(如大眾同觀初月)仍不算。於是頌加「同依」二字,一句總遮。圓暉把這五個條件數齊了:同所依、同所緣、同行相、同時、同事,五義具足才名相應。
排誤在「同依」的「同」字。論解得極具體:眼識用此一剎那的眼根為所依,與它相應的受等也就用這同一個眼根為所依。不是『都有所依』,是『所依是同一個』——同一個剎那的同一個根。
那麼二因的差別何在?論給了一組對照極漂亮的譬喻:由互為果之義立俱有因,如商侶相依共遊險道;由五平等共相應之義立相應因,就如那群商侶同受同作飲食等事業,其中缺一個人便都不相應。法寶把兩個譬喻的分工說得更細——同行是互相依倚而得度險道,同事是住必同住、行必同行、食必同食。一個譬喻兩面用:走同一條路是「互為果」,吃同一頓飯是「五平等」。
落地:相應因是心理生活的結構律。心與心所不是先各自存在再湊在一起,而是必須五義平等才叫『一次心念』——這一條後來被整個心所論繼承,讀到任何一部講心所相應的書,回頭看這五義都用得上。
八、遍行因:染法之間的通道(正頌五十五之前半)
頌:「遍行謂前遍,為同地染因。」
先問:同類因已經管了相似法相生,為什麼還要立遍行因?論答得直接:因為同類因只作自部之因,而遍行因「與染法為通因」——不但作自部染法之因,也作其餘各部染法之因;由它的勢力,餘部煩惱及其眷屬也隨之生長。普光把兩個理由分開講:一約通局(通因與非通因),一約自他部。
遍行因的體是什麼?論說「遍行諸法,隨眠品中遍行義處當廣分別」——本卷不展開。圓暉在此替讀者先數了:遍行者謂十一遍使及相應俱有法;十一遍使即苦諦下的五見、疑、無明共七,集諦下的邪見、見取、疑、無明共四。普光的釋語與此同軌,並補上「隨眠相應、俱有法」。
排誤在「前遍」二字。「前」是限定——只取前生的遍行法,簡去未來;「遍」不是說它遍一切法,是說它遍五部染法。所以遍行因通過去現在而不通未來,這與同類因一致。
論還設了一問:聖者身中的修所斷染污法,難道也以見所斷為因?迦濕彌羅國毘婆沙師答「一切染污法,見所斷為因」,並引《品類足論》三處文為證。可是《施設足論》說「聖人離欲退最初已起染污思」唯以不善為因,這又怎麼會通?論主的解法是:那是依『未斷之因』隱密而說——見所斷雖然也是此思之因,但聖者已斷見惑,所以略去不提。
落地:遍行因是煩惱論的地基。它解釋了一件修行上極要緊的事——為什麼斷見惑是全盤的轉折:見所斷的十一遍使是一切染法的通因,通因一斷,餘部染法便失了那條總的助長之道。這一因立在此處,隨眠品才有得可說。
九、異熟因:不善與有漏善,變異而熟(正頌五十五之後半)
頌:「異熟因不善,及善唯有漏。」
先問:為什麼無記不招異熟、無漏也不招異熟?論用兩個種子的比喻答完:無記「由力劣故,如朽敗種」;無漏「無愛潤故,如貞實種無水潤沃」,而且無漏非繫地,怎能招繫地之果。反之,不善與有漏善二義具足——是繫地、有愛潤——所以能招,如貞實之種又得水澆。
排誤在「異熟」二字的讀法。論先辨名:是「異熟之因」還是「異熟即因」?兩讀俱通——若唯前者,聖教就不該說「異熟生眼」;若唯後者,聖教就不該說「業之異熟」。這是防止讀者把一個名死釘在一個文法上。
真正的分歧在義。普光錄毘婆沙師之釋云『因是善惡,果是無記,異類而熟是異熟義』——只用一個「異」字簡別餘因。論主不滿足,他先立「熟」的兩個條件:一要由相續轉變差別其體方生,二要隨因勢力勝劣而時有分限。俱有、相應二因之果缺第一義(取果即與果);能作、同類、遍行三因之果缺第二義(窮生死邊,果數數生而時無限)。所以他改判:「變異而熟是異熟義」,不應但用一個「異」字去簡別。法寶把這一改寫明記為論主之自釋,以別於毘婆沙師之舊解;神泰於同處合算諸家而云『正理及此論合有五釋也』——同一個詞,唐代的注疏場中並存著五種讀法。
論接著把異熟因的作用面攤開:三界之中幾蘊共感一果(欲界一、二、四蘊;色界一、二、四、五蘊;無色界一、四蘊),一業感幾處異熟(從一處到十一處),一世之業可感三世異熟而無三世之業感一世異熟,一念之業可感多念異熟而無多念之業感一念異熟——理由都是同一句:不會白費劬勞而使果比因還少。末後三句最關鍵:異熟果不與業同時、不在無間、必待相續轉變方能辦成。
落地:這三句是整個業果論的時間律。業與果之間必然有一段「相續」,而這段相續由什麼承載,本論此處不答——有部立「得」,經部立種子;再往後,這個空位就是第八識要來填的地方。讀這一段而不記住這個空位,等於白讀。
十、六因居於何世(正頌五十六之前半)
頌:「遍行與同類,二世三世三。」
先問:因為什麼會有「世」的限制?答:遍行、同類只居過去現在,未來世無——理由如前面所說(就位建立)。相應、俱有、異熟三因則三世遍有。
排誤在頌沒說的那一項。頌只說了五因,能作因去了哪裡?論說:「頌既不說能作因所居,義准應知通三世非世。」圓暉把「非世」二字點破——非世者,無為也。能作因不但通三世,還通無為;這正呼應第二段所說它是六因中最寬的一個。
落地:三世之定看似瑣碎,其實是取果與果那一段(第十四段)的前提。因居哪一世,決定它在哪一位能取果、在哪一位能與果。這一頌是承前啟後的一根釘,不是附錄。
十一、果只有有為與離繫;無為自身無因無果(正頌五十六之後半)
頌:「果有為離繫,無為無因果。」
先問:果有幾種?論引本論答:「果法云何?謂諸有為及與擇滅。」圓暉把二者分開:一者有為,即士用、增上、等流、異熟四果,是六因所引生的;二者離繫,以擇滅為體,是道所證的——道是證因不是生因,所以這個證因不在六因之內。
排誤即刻就來:擇滅既然是果,豈不該有因?既然又是能作因,豈不該有果?論答得極硬:唯有為法有因有果,無為則無——「無六因故、無五果故」。那道與擇滅之間到底是什麼關係?論分得極細:道對「得」的功能是能生,對「滅」的功能是能證;所以道雖非滅之生因,仍可說擇滅是道之果。至於無為為什麼可以當能作因卻沒有果——因為離了世間之法,就沒有取果與果的作用。
從這裡起,本卷進入全論最長的一場論諍。經部先發:無為非因,因為「無經說因是無為故,有經說因唯有為故」。有部反詰、經部再答,來回數合之後,經部把問題推到底:一切無為皆非實有,如色受等別有實物者,此正是所無。虛空只是無所觸,擇滅只是由簡擇力而餘不更生,非擇滅只是由闕緣而餘不更生。有部則主張無為別有實體、聖者各別內證。
這一場,論主錄了經部通經(五根經、燈焰喻)、錄了有部的五種「事」義(自性事、所緣事、繫縛事、所因事、所攝事),最後以「毘婆沙師不許此釋」一句收住,自己不下總判。
值得逐句看的是論主替經部設的兩道自保。其一是語言上的:經部並不說無為之體全然是無,而說「如說此聲有先非有、有後非有」——聲在未發之前是「先非有」、既謝之後是「後非有」;那個非有不可以說成實有,然而「有先非有」這句話裡的「有」字仍然用得成立。說「有無為」,就是這一種有。其二是名義上的:既然是非有,怎麼還配稱滅聖諦、還能立為第三?答在「聖諦」二字——聖諦取的是「無倒」之義,聖者於苦見它是苦、於苦之非有見它是非有,兩邊都不顛倒;至於為什麼排第三,答得更素樸——「第二無間聖見及說,故成第三」,是次序使然。
這兩道自保合起來看,經部要守的不是『涅槃沒有』,是『涅槃不是一件東西』。這一分寸若讀漏了,整場論諍就會被誤讀成有無之爭。
落地:這一段是全卷分量最重的地方,讀法有二。其一,看清爭點不在文而在體——雙方都承認經說涅槃是第一、是滅諦,爭的是『這個第一』是實有一物還是畢竟非有。其二,注意論主的手法:他把有部的立說整整齊齊擺好,再讓經部一句一句地問,問到毘婆沙師不許為止。一部依有部而立、遇僻處以經部破之的書,性格在此顯露得最完整。
十二、六因各得何果(正頌五十七)
頌:「後因果異熟,前因增上果,同類遍等流,俱相應士用。」
先問:這一頌為什麼把異熟與增上放在頭尾?論說得很老實:「後因」是異熟因,因為它在六因中排最後;「前因」是能作因,因為它排最初。而五果之中,異熟果排最初、增上果排最後。頌是用次序來記次序的——這是本論常用的記誦法,不是義理上的深意。
排誤在增上果的名。「唯無障住,有何增上?」論答:就由無障而得增上之名。但論主隨即補上一層:能作因也有勝力——如十處界對於五識身、諸有情業對於器世界、耳等根對於眼識的生起(聽說了便想看,於是眼識生)。這一補很要緊:增上不等於無所作為,只是它的下限低到『不妨礙』而已。
士用果的名從何來?論說「非越士體有別士用」——不是離開作者之體另有一個叫「士用」的東西,就是諸法所有的作用,如士夫之作為,所以叫士用;並舉世間兩個從喻立名之例(鴉足藥草、醉象將軍)。普光在此引《入阿毘達磨論》逐名解過一遍五果之名,五個名的取義各自不同:異熟取「果不似因」,等流取『果似因、從因生』,離繫取『由道得而非道所生』,士用取「由此勢力,彼得生」,增上取「由前增上,後法得生」。
論末留了一個未決之問:士用果是不是只有俱有、相應二因才有?一師說其餘諸因也有,唯除異熟;另一師說異熟因也有隔越久遠的士用果,如農夫所收的果實。二說並存,論不判。
落地:這一頌是六因與五果的接線圖。背它的最省力方式,是記住兩頭是次序、中間是相似與作用——同類遍行取「相似」故得等流,俱有相應取「作用」故得士用。
十三、五果各自的相貌(正頌五十八與五十九)
頌:「異熟無記法,有情有記生,等流似自因,離繫由慧盡。若因彼力生,是果名士用,除前有為法,有為增上果。」
先問:異熟果為什麼一定是無記?論的次第是先立性、再簡範圍。性上唯無覆無記;範圍上唯限有情、唯是「有記所生」——一切不善與善有漏能記別異熟,故名有記;從那有記之業以後才起,不是同時、不是無間,所以名「有記生」。既是有記所生,便可知它不通等流與所長養,因為那二者通三性所生。
排誤在山河大地。非有情數也是從業生的,為什麼不叫異熟?論答:因為是共有的——別人也一樣受用;而異熟果決無他人共受之義。那增上果也是業生的,為什麼可以共受?因為是從共業生的。「共」與「不共」是異熟果與增上果的分界線,不是「內」與「外」。
等流果的排誤更細。遍行因也得等流果,為什麼不許它就叫同類因?論答:遍行之果只是由同地、同染而似因,不是由「種類」似因;若由種類似因,那才叫同類因。於是立四句:非遍行法作同類因、他部遍法作遍行因、自部遍法二者俱是、除前三相。四句是阿毘達磨的標準拆解法,用來防止兩個範疇被含糊地合併。
離繫果的釋名極短而極重要:「滅故名盡,擇故名慧」——擇滅之所以叫離繫果,是因為它由慧而得、由慧使惑盡。士用果則就「因彼勢力所生」立,並舉下地加行心生上地定、清淨靜慮心生變化心為例;擇滅則要說成「由道力得」而非「由道力生」——這一字之差,正接著第十一段道對得能生、對滅能證的分判。
增上果的定義用了一個排除法:「諸有為法,除前已生,是餘有為之增上果」——因為果對因或俱或後,決不在前。士用與增上的分際,論給了一個好記的例子:工匠造成之物,對工匠而言兼是士用果與增上果,對工匠以外的人而言就只是增上果。普光把這一分際壓縮成一句:士用對「有力能」說,增上據「不障礙」說。
落地:五果之中,四果都是有為,只有離繫果是無為;四果都與因有時間關係,只有離繫果是「證得」而非「生起」。記住這一個例外,第十一段那一整場諍論的位置就擺對了。
十四、取果與與果:因在哪一位起作用(正頌六十)
頌:「五取果唯現,二與果亦然,過現與二因,一與唯過去。」
先問:什麼叫取果、什麼叫與果?論在這一段末尾才給定義:「能為彼種故名取果,正與彼力故名與果。」普光解得更明白——種是能生之義,因有生果之能,所以叫取果;正給予那果以力,所以叫與果。法寶的兩句最好記:取時是因義成立而名為種子,與時是正引果起而名之為與。取果是『認領』,與果是『交付』,兩件事不在同一位上。
排誤第一:五因取果為什麼一定在現在?因為過去已經取過了,未來又沒有作用。至於能作因為何不入此列,論說得含蓄:能作因不一定有果,所以頌裡不說。
排誤第二:同類、遍行二因與果通過去現在——過去與果好懂,現在怎麼與果?論答:因為有的等流果是無間生的(因在現在、果緊接著生)。而果一旦已生,因就成過去,那叫「已與果」,不應再與。
排誤第三:異熟因為什麼只在過去與果?因為異熟果既不與因同時、也不是無間生的。這一句與第九段末尾那三句完全咬合。
論在此還排了幾組四句,全是就「得」而作:善同類因取而不與者是斷善根時最後所捨之得,與而不取者是續善根時最初所得之得,亦取亦與者是不斷善根的其餘諸位,俱非者除前三相。不善、有覆無記依例作四句;無覆無記則有「順後句」——與果時必也取果,而阿羅漢最後諸蘊是取而無所與。
論末錄餘師在五果外別立四果:安立果(水輪為風輪果、草等為大地果)、加行果(無生智等遠由不淨觀而得)、和合果(眼識等為眼根等之果)、修習果(變化心等為諸靜慮之果),並收為「皆是士用、增上果攝」。普光記其為西方諸師之說,四果加前五共九。
落地:這一段是把前面所有的因果關係放回時間軸上。六因五果若只當一張靜態的表來背,就漏掉了最要緊的那一維——因不是永遠在作用,它只在特定的一位上取果、在特定的一位上與果。
十五、四法各從幾因生:收全卷於一個否定(正頌六十一與六十二之前半)
頌:「染污異熟生,餘初聖如次,除異熟遍二,及同類餘生,此謂心心所,餘及除相應。」
先問:這一頌在算什麼?答:把一切有為分成四類——染污法、異熟生法、其餘法、初無漏法——逐類數它由幾因所生。染污法除異熟因,餘五因生(染污不是異熟因之果);異熟生法除遍行因,餘五因生(遍行所生唯染污);其餘法雙除異熟、遍行,餘四因生;初無漏法再除同類因,餘三因生(初無漏之前沒有同類之法)。
排誤在第五句。以上所算是就心與心所說的;色法與不相應行不能相應,所以還要再除相應因——於是四類依次成四、四、三、二因生。圓暉在此讚了一句「此頌甚巧,應善思之」——一個「除」字用四次、「餘生」二字用四次,把八組數字壓進三十個字裡。
真正的收束在最後一句:「一因生法,決定無有。」
這句話短得容易滑過去,卻是全卷的落錘。法寶在此點出它所簡的是什麼——若許一因能生法,那就同於外道。六因五果講了一整卷,講到底不是為了證明「法有因」,而是為了證明『法沒有單一的因』。任何一法的生起,最少要二因,多則五因;沒有一件事是由一個原因造成的。
落地:把這一句放回卷首那個承轉句——「非離所餘因緣和合」——就看見了首尾相銜。這一卷從『不是單憑生相就能生』開頭,到「一因生法,決定無有」結尾;中間六因五果的一切分辨,都只是把這件事拆得夠細,細到人再也不能偷偷在心裡安一個唯一的原因。
讀這一卷可以帶走什麼
一是記住「對法諸師許」五個字。論標六因時下的是「許」而不是「佛說」,經部一系即據此質其無經文;眾賢則舉經處處以立之,斷言「如是六因,佛處處說」。六因有無經據,本論未判,二造之立錄在承衍——知道這一點,才讀得懂經部與有部為何能在同一部書裡吵一整卷。
二是把「因居世定」與「取果與果」連起來讀。因不是恆常在作用的東西,它有取的位、有與的位;因果論一旦上了時間軸,宿命式的讀法就站不住了。
三是認住最後那一句。一因生法決定無有——這是本卷留給讀者的唯一一句斷語,也是它把六因分得這麼細的理由。
承衍:四疏之鏡
以上是本卷論文自身之義。此下另錄唐代四家注疏之判釋、異譯之取捨、與眾賢之反破——鏡非論,只是換幾種讀法看同一卷書。並錄不判,各還其位。
科判之異。普光與法寶皆標「當品大文第三」,一作「明因緣」、一作「明因及緣」;圓暉作「從此大文第三,明因緣」,並於卷內再分三段(正明因體、明因得果、明法從因生),末結「已上不同,總是第一,明因已竟」。神泰不用大文之語,改以五分立科。四家科語互異而所斷之界為一。
心王為因之法數。普光作「心王望九十八法極少,猶與五十八法為俱有因」;法寶另立極多極少二數(初定心二百七十九法中與一百五十八法為因),並直斥前說云『有人云心王望九十八法中極少猶與五十八法為俱有因者謬也』。神泰於此與普光同軌。字面相斥而所指之數相同,孰為所斥不判。
無記五蘊四說之取捨。論列三異說而不判,二家所取相反:普光判「諸論皆有四說,竝無評家」,而「今解:且以後師為正」——取第四說(色與四蘊互不為因),並引《大毘婆沙論》大種與意處之緣數為證。法寶則問「四說不同,既無評文,何為正說」,自答「應言前說為善」——取第一說(展轉為因),理由是善染二性中色與四蘊既展轉為因,無記不應獨異。二家一取首、一取末,並錄不判。
異熟之義。普光錄毘婆沙師「異類而熟」之釋,法寶錄論主「變異而熟」之自釋並記《順正理》之反救,神泰則合《順正理》三釋與本論二釋為五釋。三家所收之數不同,本卷不判孰為足。
餘師四果之攝屬。普光出通釋(四果皆士用增上果攝)與別解(第一第三唯增上、第二第四通二果)二說;神泰逕取別解。二家所配不同,並錄。
續善根前得之屬。神泰引《順正理》斥論主「應說爾時續者前得」之語,復記安慧之救——安慧是世親弟子,其救以為論主所言本通無始過去諸得,非唯取最後所捨之得。普光於同處僅作簡語,不引安慧。此為本卷唯一見於注疏而不見於論文的師承旁證。
異譯之異。真諦舊譯《俱舍釋論》於本卷所對之處,譯名自成一系:能作因作「隨造因」,異熟因作「果報因」,異熟果作「果報果」,離繫果作「離滅果」,士用果作「功力果」,心隨轉法作「隨心法」,二律儀作「二護」,安立果與和合果作「依止果」與「集果」。義理上最堪注意者有二:其一,離繫果之釋語不同軌——玄奘作「滅故名盡,擇故名慧」,真諦作「盡謂永離滅,智謂三道中三根」;其二,增上果之立向相反——玄奘就「除前已生」立,真諦就「先未有」立,所指一而說法異。圓暉於「無為無因果」處逕評舊譯云『舊譯無為非因果者此翻謬矣』,並自辨「非」與「無」之別;普光、法寶、神泰於此處不作二譯之評。二譯優劣不判。
又:真諦本根品只分四卷而玄奘分五,故二本卷界不對位——真諦「分別根品之四」的卷首落在本卷中段(正當無為實有之諍),而本卷之首(六因總標)實在真諦「之三」卷內。讀者若持二本對讀,須以場景結構相校,不可以卷次相配。
眾賢之反破。《順正理論》於本卷逐段回應,其要者五。一,六因無經證之難。眾賢先牒難詞——「如是六因非佛所說,如何本論自立此名?」——隨即以「定無大師所不說義」反之,繼以隱沒、異門而說、天仙授與、餘部不誦、諸經散說五證通之,末結「如是六因,佛處處說,諸憎背者迷故不見」。故「六因無經文」是他所破之詞,不是他的自承;無經文之立與破,正是本卷論主與眾賢的分界之一。二,俱有因之定義,眾賢直言「此中所說因相太少」,又云「不應說唯互為果為俱有因」,改立「有為法一果可為俱有因」。三,同類因未來非有之答,眾賢護《發智》密說而斥「然經主言:彼非善釋」。四,異熟之義,眾賢云「毘婆沙師非決定說六因所得皆名熟故」,破論主以「但異」為攝義不盡。五,無為實有之總諍,眾賢自標「我今正破經主謗因」,末結「如是已破經主謗因,成立涅槃其體實有」。二造之言俱在漢傳,勝負不判。
唯識一路之接榫。法寶在六因段末已把這條線拉出來:他將本論六因與大乘之十因、二十因對舉,並自附一問——大乘十因、六因及四緣之義出於何經文。這一問古德未答,本卷亦不代答;然三處接榫可先記下:其一,能作因之開為十因二十因;其二,五果名目為唯識系全然承用而不改一字;其三,異熟因與果之間必待相續,而承載這段相續者本論不立別體——有部立「得」,經部立種子,此後乃有異熟識之立。同一問題、兩代答案;讀唯識所以要回讀俱舍,此卷即是最直接的一處。
Which joint of the chapter this fascicle stands on
The Chapter on the Faculties makes a wide turn at this point. The three preceding fascicles spoke of which dharmas there are — the twenty-two faculties, co-arising mind and mental factors, formations not associated with mind. From this fascicle on, what is spoken of is what these dharmas arise by.
The turn was not added by later hands. Three commentators mark the head of the fascicle with the same outline sentence: Puguang’s Record of the Abhidharmakośa has, “From here begins the third major division of this chapter, explaining causes and conditions”; Fabao’s Commentary on the Abhidharmakośa has, “From here begins the third major division of this chapter, explaining cause and also condition”; Yuanhui’s Verse Commentary has, “From here, the third major division, explaining causes and conditions” — three slightly different wordings cutting at exactly the same boundary. Shentai’s Commentary sets up a fivefold outline instead (concluding what precedes; restating the earlier text; inquiring into causes and conditions; the twenty-five lines of stanzas; the four conditions), a different method of outlining that still falls at the same place. That four commentators bring the knife down on the same word tells the reader something in itself: this is the beginning of the third major section of the Chapter on the Faculties, and the front gate of the whole treatise’s account of cause and result.
The treatise’s first sentence is itself a transition: “Thus the formations not associated with mind have been explained. It was said above that when the arising-mark produces what is to arise, it does not do so apart from the conjunction of the other causes and conditions. Which dharmas here are called causes and conditions?” The arising-mark was treated in the previous fascicle, but a loose end was left there: the arising-mark can produce a dharma, yet cannot accomplish this on its own — the conjunction of the other causes and conditions is needed too. That loose end is what this fascicle gathers up.
It gathers it up with two tables: the side of causes opened out into six, the side of results into five. When the six causes and five results are done, the fascicle breaks off; the four conditions are not stated until the next one. This break is worth noticing: Root Stanza 62 in fact straddles cause and condition, and in dividing the fascicles Xuanzang gave up the stanza’s boundary and followed the doctrine’s. At the end of this fascicle Yuanhui writes, “All the distinctions above belong in sum to the first part; the explanation of causes is complete” — the commentator’s closing words and the translator’s cut fall at precisely the same place. Causes are stated to the end first, and conditions begin a separate fascicle: this is how the Tang read this book, not an accident of binding.
I. Why exactly six causes (Root Stanza 50)
Stanza: “Enabling and coexistent, homogeneous and associated, all-pervading together with maturation — causes are allowed to be only six kinds.”
First a question most easily skipped over: why are the causes exactly six?
The treatise’s answer is extremely short: “There are six kinds of cause: first the enabling cause, second the coexistent cause, third the homogeneous cause, fourth the associated cause, fifth the all-pervading cause, sixth the maturation cause. The Abhidharma masters allow that causes are only these six kinds.” Note that the subject of the closing sentence is not “the Buddha” but “the Abhidharma masters.” Yuanhui is explicit when he explains the stanza’s syntax: the first three lines merely list the names, and “the fourth line concludes by referring them back to our own school.” That conclusion marks where the authority of the six causes comes from: it is an institution of the Abhidharma masters.
The misreading lies here: readers easily take the six causes for something scripture states. Yuanhui at once records the counter-question of another school — the Sautrāntikas and their like do not accept the six causes, on the ground that “scripture does not state them,” while the four conditions they do accept, because “scripture does state them.” So the five words the treatise uses here, “the Abhidharma masters allow,” are not politeness but measure: the four conditions the author states outright (in the next fascicle “it is said that there are four kinds of condition” is established by citing scripture), while for the six causes he marks their provenance.
Where this lands: these five words set the posture for reading the whole fascicle. In listing the six causes the treatise uses “the Abhidharma masters allow” and not “the Buddha said” — and the Sautrāntika line takes exactly this as its challenge: scripture has explicit text for the four conditions and none for the six causes, so how can the two be set side by side? But this is the starting point of the fascicle’s dispute, not its conclusion: in the Treatise Conforming to Correct Principle Saṅghabhadra adduces scripture item by item to establish the six causes, and finally rules outright, “These six causes the Buddha stated everywhere; those who detest and turn from them are deluded and do not see them.” Whether there is scriptural warrant, the treatise itself does not adjudicate; the positions of both parties are recorded together under Further Resonances. Later on, when the Sautrāntika counter-questions come section by section, look back at these five words and it will be clear what is actually being contested.
Puguang does a further layer of work on the names: each of the six he splits into two readings, the appositional-determinative and the dependent-determinative (the enabling is itself the cause / the cause that enables, and so on for the rest), and finally rules in one sentence, “None of these six causes admits of a possessive-compound analysis” — because the entity of each of the six is itself the cause, and not something that borrows causal standing from another thing. The sentence looks fussy but is in fact a safeguard: the six causes name six ways in which a dharma itself serves as a cause; they are not six things called “cause” standing outside dharmas.
II. The enabling cause: counting even “not getting in the way” as a cause (first line of Root Stanza 51)
The stanza is only five characters: “Apart from itself, all others enable.”
First ask: on what ground does every dharma count as a cause of some given dharma? The answer: “Every conditioned dharma, excluding only its own entity, takes all dharmas as enabling causes, because when it arises they abide without obstructing it.” The criterion is abiding without obstructing: at the moment a given dharma arises, all other dharmas are there without blocking it, and that is enough. Yuanhui brings out the point of “apart from itself”: when a dharma arises its own entity must be excluded, since an entity cannot be its own cause.
The first misreading the author raises himself: is it not said that “outflows not yet known are about to arise, and because they have been known the outflows do not arise”? Cognition plainly obstructs the outflows, and sunlight plainly obstructs the seeing of stars. The answer is finely made: to say “abide without obstructing” is to say “when this arises, those all abide without obstructing it” — at the moment the outflows arise, cognition is not present; at the moment the stars are seen, sunlight is not shining. The enabling cause is stated with respect to the actual moment of arising, not with respect to a general capacity.
The second misreading goes deeper. Someone says: only what could obstruct and does not obstruct counts as a cause, just as the people of a realm say, “Because of our sovereign we obtain ease”; but nirvāṇa and dharmas that will never arise have not even the capacity to obstruct the arising of a conditioned dharma, so on what ground are they causes? The author answers hard: they are causes still, and one may say this of a king without power just as well. Shentai puts the point of this most plainly, explaining the enabling cause thus: “Because it does not obstruct the arising of the result, it has the sense of enabling the result, and so is named the enabling cause; this name is taken from function.” The name is established from function, not from force.
The third is a difficulty both the Sarvāstivādins and the Sautrāntikas must face: if all dharmas fail to obstruct, why do not all dharmas arise at once? When one person kills, why does not everyone incur the offense of killing alike? The author answers: they are allowed as enabling causes merely by not obstructing, and this does not say that they “have an intimate productive force with respect to arising.” The intimate cause is not present and the mind that equally instigates is not present, and so there is no arising all at once and no shared offense.
Where this lands: the enabling cause is the widest of the six — Yuanhui’s comparison is the easiest to remember: because enabling is explained by non-obstruction, the enabling cause ranges widely over all dharmas (conditioned and unconditioned alike may be causes), while the dominant result it obtains is narrow, restricted to the conditioned. A wide cause with a narrow result — this asymmetry foreshadows the great dispute over “the unconditioned has neither cause nor result” in the eleventh section below: the unconditioned may serve as a cause but cannot take a result.
III. The coexistent cause: cause and result simultaneous, and each the other (last three lines of Root Stanza 51)
Stanza: “Coexistents are one another’s results, as with the great elements, the marks and what they mark, and mind with respect to what follows mind.”
First ask: what is meant by “coexistent”? Yuanhui settles it in a sentence: coexistents are those that exist at the same time; and the three words “one another’s results” are precisely his explanation of the coexistent cause. The treatise’s definition is, “Dharmas that are reciprocally results of human effort are reciprocally coexistent causes” — the criterion is not simultaneity but being one another’s results. Three examples: the four great elements among themselves; the four marks and the dharma they mark; mind and the dharmas that follow mind.
The misreading lies in an exception easily slipped past. The treatise adds at once: “A dharma and its secondary marks are not one another’s results; nevertheless the dharma is a coexistent cause of its secondary marks, and not the secondary marks of the dharma.” Between the primary dharma and the four lesser marks the relation is one-way — the primary dharma is a cause of the secondary marks, and the secondary marks are not a cause of it. So being one another’s results is the general mark of the coexistent cause, not a mark satisfied by everything that coexists. At this point the treatise writes four characters, “here it should be argued out”; Yuanhui reads them as ‘urging that the explanation be carried through’ — that is, the author is noting here that explaining the coexistent cause by reciprocal resulthood is not yet exhaustive, and is asking that someone analyze it further. The reader should see this seam first: reciprocal resulthood is the general mark of the coexistent cause, yet not everything the coexistent cause covers is reciprocally resultant — definition and extension part company here by a hair.
The weight of the treatise falls in the latter half: the causation the world acknowledges has the seed first and the sprout after, and “no such simultaneous cause and result has ever been seen.” Then comes one answer and one counter-question: “Is it not evident that a lamp flame and its light, a sprout and its shadow, are simultaneous and are nevertheless cause and result?” Puguang assigns this to the Sarvāstivādins as their answer, and takes what follows from “this should be argued out in detail” as the Sautrāntikas’ counter-question. The counter-question runs: as for flame and light, does the flame produce the light, or do the human labor of the preceding moment, the lamp vessel, the oil, and the wick together make flame and light arise at the same time? The shadow is plainer still: a shadow exists only because something else blocks the light, so how can the sprout be called its cause?
What steps forward next is not the author but the Sarvāstivāda defense. Of the sentence “That does not stand to reason, because they follow one another in existing and not existing,” Puguang assigns the stretch from “that does not stand to reason” down to “by this reasoning cause and result are established” to “the Sarvāstivādins defending the position,” and explains “following one another in existing and not existing” as “the existence or non-existence of the result’s entity follows the existence or non-existence of the cause” — it is the result’s existing or not that follows the cause’s existing or not, and not a shadow following the thing that blocks the light. The defense comes to rest on a criterion of the science of reasoning: “If, when this exists or does not exist, that correspondingly exists or does not exist, then this is definitely the cause and that definitely the result.” Among coexistent dharmas, when one exists all exist and when one does not exist none does — which fits the criterion exactly. The Sautrāntikas press again at once, “How can they then be called one another’s cause and result?”, and the Sarvāstivādins answer, “By what was just said; there is no contradiction here either,” since the criterion was two-directional from the start. As for the simile of three staves leaning on one another and standing, it is the Sautrāntikas who raise it as a counter-question after restating the Sarvāstivāda defense: do those three staves stand by leaning on one another at the same time, or do the causes and conditions of a preceding moment make them arise at the same time and so stand? And besides, cords and hooks and the ground are there as well. The closing words, “here too there are the homogeneous cause and the rest, and therefore the sense of the coexistent cause is established,” are again the Sarvāstivādins speaking; Puguang marks them as the Sarvāstivādins’ words of defense.
Where this lands: simultaneous cause and result is the Sarvāstivādins’ most distinctive move and the one most attacked. Understand this dispute and one has a starting point for reading later forms of simultaneous cause and result, such as the mutual perfuming of seeds and manifest activity.
IV. The constitution of the dharmas that follow mind: mental factors, the two disciplines, the marks (first three lines of Root Stanza 52)
Stanza: “Mental factors, the two disciplines, and the marks of these and of mind — these are the dharmas that follow mind.”
First ask: what sort of dharma qualifies as following mind? The treatise lists three classes: all dharmas associated with mind (the mental factors); the two disciplines, the discipline of absorption and the discipline without outflows; and the marks of arising and the rest belonging to these dharmas together with mind itself.
There are two misreadings. First, the two disciplines are form (nonmanifest form), and how can form follow mind? Yuanhui’s explanation is the most economical: these two disciplines “exist when one enters absorption and are absent when one leaves it,” and so are named as following mind — their presence or absence hangs entirely on whether mind is concentrated or scattered. Second, the stanza says “the marks” and does not say the secondary marks such as “arising of arising.” Puguang gives the warning: since it says arising and the rest and does not say arising of arising and the rest, “this shows that the secondary marks do not follow mind.” This is a matter of one word’s measure, yet it decides the arithmetic of the fifty-eight dharmas and the fifty-four in the next section.
Where this lands: the dharmas that follow mind are not a miscellaneous list but the hardest of the coexistent cause’s three classes to establish. That the four great elements support one another, and that the four marks and what they mark support one another, are easy enough to state; to say that mind and form (the disciplines), and mind and formations not associated with mind (the marks), are one another’s results is the real test. The treatise sets out their constitution clearly here first so that the next stanza can adjudicate them in five words.
V. By time, by result, by ethical quality and the rest: ten reasons adjudicate what follows mind (last line of Root Stanza 52)
The stanza is only five characters: “By time, result, ethical quality, and the rest.”
First ask: on what ground is a dharma judged to follow mind? The answer has three gates. As to time, the dharma has one arising, one abiding, and one cessation with mind, and falls into one and the same time-period with it; Yuanhui counts these four out — time has four items: first arising, second abiding, third cessation, fourth falling into one time-period. As to result, the dharma has one result, one maturation, and one homogeneous outflow with mind. As to ethical quality and the rest, the dharma is wholesome, unwholesome, or indeterminate together with mind. The three gates together make ten, and hence the ten reasons.
The misreading falls on a single word. The treatise says, “It should be known that the first ‘one’ here and the latter ‘one’ show simultaneity and show commonality respectively, and their sense is not the same” — the earlier “one” (one arising, one abiding, one cessation) says “at the same time,” while the later “one” (one result, one maturation, one homogeneous outflow) says “in common.” The same word “one” does not point to the same thing in the two places. Yuanhui’s gloss is the best to memorize: in the earlier gate of time, “one” shows being together at one time; in the later gate of result, “one” shows sharing one result. Puguang lays down a summary sentence over each gate: for the gate of time, “this shows that only what has one time with mind is called following it”; for the gate of result, “this shows that only what has one result and the rest with mind is called following it.”
The second misreading is why, given “one result,” homogeneous outflow and maturation must still be stated separately. Puguang resolves it by citing the Treatise Conforming to Correct Principle, and divides the result of human effort into four kinds — co-arisen, immediately subsequent, separated by an interval, and not arising — to show that “one result” here takes only the two results of human effort and of release from bondage, and not the co-arisen reciprocal kind (an entity does not make one result with itself); which is why homogeneous outflow and maturation have to be marked out in addition. This passage is one of the finest stitches in the fascicle; not following it does not damage the whole, but it demonstrates how Abhidharma works: if one word may be ambiguous, add another word to plug the gap.
Where this lands: the arithmetic follows. Mind as sovereign is a reciprocal coexistent cause with at least fifty-eight dharmas (the ten factors of the great ground, their forty primary marks, and mind’s own eight primary and secondary marks); conversely, of those fifty-eight, once mind’s four secondary marks are removed, the remaining fifty-four are causes of mind — Puguang’s reason is that a secondary mark is “weak in its power to produce a dharma and not the equal of what is marked,” and so is not a cause with respect to mind as sovereign (whereas the reason the forty secondary marks upon the factors of the great ground are not counted among the fifty-eight is a different one, “because they are far removed, their power does not reach them,” and the two reasons are not interchangeable). The author also refutes the view of “only fourteen dharmas” — Shentai marks it as the interpretation of a second master — relying on a recited passage of the Treatise on Categories of Dharmas; some transmitted versions do not recite the five characters “and the dharmas associated with them,” whereupon the Vaibhāṣikas of Kaśmīra say that the passage must be recited thus, or that one should infer from the sense that something has been abbreviated. Five characters of one old recension move a whole system of dharma-numbers: this is something a reader of Abhidharma must get used to.
At the end the treatise also carefully separates two matters: whatever is a cause by way of the coexistent cause certainly coexists, but what coexists is not necessarily a cause by way of the coexistent cause. Eight sets of examples (a secondary mark with respect to its primary dharma, an acquisition and what is acquired, and so on) coexist without being coexistent causes — the reason being that they do not take one result, one maturation, and one homogeneous outflow together.
VI. The homogeneous cause: resemblance is not enough — same category, same level, and earlier (Root Stanza 53 and the first half of 54)
Stanza: “The homogeneous cause is what resembles, of its own category and level and arisen before; the path is reciprocally so across the nine levels; only equal or superior dharmas are its results; what arises from preparation is likewise, as with what is formed through hearing and reflection and the rest.”
First ask: that similar dharmas are one another’s causes — is this not quite natural? The treatise’s first sentence says just that: wholesome five aggregates with wholesome five aggregates, defiled with defiled, indeterminate with indeterminate, are reciprocally homogeneous causes.
After this sentence the treatise first branches off into a passage of divergent views that is most often skipped. For the two ethical qualities, wholesome and defiled, the ancients had no dispute about their causes; what started a dispute was the indeterminate — and the four characters of the treatise, “pure indeterminate aggregates,” designate one class and not two, as Fabao glosses word by word: “By ‘indeterminate’ is meant only unobscured-indeterminate dharmas.” He then rules: “About the causes of the wholesome and the defiled there is no further dispute. On the indeterminate five aggregates the divergent views differ.” Do the aggregate of form and the remaining four aggregates serve as one another’s causes or not? The treatise lists three masters. One says, “Of the pure indeterminate aggregates, the five are results of form, and the four are not causes of form” — all five aggregates are results of form, that is, form can be a cause of the five aggregates, while the four aggregates do not produce form. One says, “The five are results of the four, and form is not a cause of the four” — the direction is exactly reversed: the four aggregates can be a cause of the five aggregates, while form does not produce the four. One says, “Form and the four aggregates, considered reciprocally, are in neither direction causes” — neither side is a cause. Clearing the misreading: the first two are not two ways of saying the same thing but two schools running in opposite directions; in reading, simply seize on which side is the result — “the five are results of form” makes form the cause, “the five are results of the four” makes the four aggregates the cause. Puguang’s Record preserves the reasons of both: the former holds that “because the four aggregates are superior they are not causes of form, and because the aggregate of form is inferior it is a cause of the four”; the latter holds that “the force of the four aggregates is strong, and therefore they can be a cause of form; the force of the aggregate of form is weak, and therefore it is not a cause of the four” — one and the same set of dharmas, with opposite judgments of superiority and inferiority yielding opposite conclusions. The treatise lists without adjudicating, and the ancient masters’ choices are recorded under Further Resonances.
Only after the divergent views does the treatise add three gates.
The first is “its own category and its own level.” Category means the five categories (from what is abandoned by seeing suffering through what is abandoned by cultivation); level means the nine levels (the desire realm as one, the four absorptions, the four formless attainments). What is abandoned by seeing suffering is a cause only for what is abandoned by seeing suffering; the desire realm is a cause only for the desire realm, and so on up to the summit of existence being a cause only for the summit of existence. Across different levels there is no sense of cause at all. The second gate is “arisen before” — only a dharma already arisen earlier is a homogeneous cause of a later one. The third is “only equal or superior dharmas are results”: a dharma arising from preparation is a cause only of what equals or surpasses it, and not a cause of what is inferior.
The misreading is thickest at the second gate. The treatise cites the Treatise on the Development of Wisdom as warrant, but runs into a sentence of that treatise’s own self-questioning and self-answering, “there is no time at which it is not a cause” — if there really were no time at which it is not a cause, would not future dharmas also have homogeneous causes? The author’s resolution is that the sentence was said covertly with respect to the three causes of coexistence, association, and maturation. Someone else explains it as “an answer made covertly on the basis of the final position,” and the author judges this “not a good explanation,” on the ground that a future dharma is not a homogeneous cause before the moment of its imminent arising. He further adduces the question and answer on the immediately antecedent condition as corroboration: there the author answered, “when this dharma has not yet reached the state of having arisen,” which shows that the two exchanges were never on the same track. In this section the author uses the heaviest sentence in the fascicle: “What merit is gained by composing the text thus? It only shows that the author of that treatise was not skilled in composition.” What is criticized is the deftness or clumsiness of that treatise’s wording, not its doctrine; within one sentence, its sense is honored and its wording is not spared.
The second misreading concerns whether “there is no homogeneous cause in the future” makes the homogeneous cause something that was not and comes to be. The author answers crisply: it is established with respect to position, not with respect to entity. And why does the maturation cause exist already in the future? Because a maturation cause and its result do not resemble each other, so that even without a before and after they would not be one another’s cause and result; a homogeneous cause and its result do resemble each other, and without a before and after they would be each other’s cause and each other’s result, which contradicts reason. The homogeneous cause is established by position and the maturation cause by characteristic — this sentence is the pivot of the whole section.
The third misreading is the apparent contradiction between “only one’s own level” and the nine levels being one another’s causes. The treatise distinguishes clearly: “only one’s own level” is said with respect to what has outflows; the path without outflows, by contrast, is reciprocally a cause across the nine levels, because the path without outflows “abides in every level like a guest and is not included within any realm,” and is not appropriated as its own by the craving belonging to a level. Yuanhui’s simile is easy to remember: the without-outflows arises in the several levels as a guest lodging for a time.
Where this lands is the last passage, on the wholesome that arises from preparation. What is formed through hearing can be a cause of hearing and of reflection but not of cultivation (the desire realm has nothing formed through cultivation); what is formed through reflection is not a cause of what is formed through hearing, since hearing is inferior to reflection; what is formed through cultivation is a cause only of cultivation. It is the same among the nine grades: the lowest of the low can be a cause of all nine grades, while the highest of the high is a cause only of the highest of the high. The author closes here with a worldly simile — no one toils in vain and gains nothing at all. The sequence of training has a structural warrant in the doctrine of causes: a lower grade can draw up a higher one, and a higher grade does not turn back to be a cause of a lower.
VII. The associated cause: five senses equal, the same entity as the coexistent cause but a different sense (second half of Root Stanza 54)
Stanza: “The associated cause is settled: mind and mental factors share one support.”
First ask: since the associated cause is in entity just the coexistent cause, why set up a separate name at all? The treatise forces the conditions out by a chain of counter-questions: only mind and mental factors are associated causes; those whose object and mode of apprehension differ do not count; those whose object and mode of apprehension are the same but whose times differ do not count either; and those in different bodies whose object, mode of apprehension, and time are all the same (as when a crowd looks together at the new moon) still do not count. So the stanza adds the two words “same support,” barring all of these in a single phrase. Yuanhui counts the five conditions out in full: the same support, the same object, the same mode of apprehension, the same time, the same activity — only when the five senses are complete is it called association.
The misreading is on the word “same” in “same support.” The treatise explains it very concretely: visual consciousness takes the eye faculty of this one moment as its support, and the feeling and the rest associated with it take that same eye faculty as their support. Not “each has a support,” but “the support is one and the same” — the same faculty in the same moment.
Where, then, does the difference between the two causes lie? The treatise gives a beautifully matched pair of similes: the coexistent cause is established by the sense of being one another’s results, like merchants relying on one another while traveling a dangerous road together; the associated cause is established by the sense of being associated together in five equalities, like that same company of merchants sharing and performing together the business of food and drink and the rest, where if one man is missing none of them is in association. Fabao states the division of labor between the two similes more finely — traveling together is relying on one another and so getting across the dangerous road; sharing the same activity is that if they halt they must halt together, if they travel they must travel together, if they eat they must eat together. One simile is used on two faces: walking the same road is being one another’s results, eating the same meal is the five equalities.
Where this lands: the associated cause is the structural law of mental life. Mind and mental factors do not first exist separately and then come together; only when the five senses are equal is there what may be called one moment of thought — a rule inherited afterwards by the whole doctrine of mental factors, so that in reading any book on the association of mental factors these five senses remain serviceable.
VIII. The all-pervading cause: the passage among defiled dharmas (first half of Root Stanza 55)
Stanza: “The all-pervading are those pervasive dharmas arisen before, causes of defiled dharmas of the same level.”
First ask: the homogeneous cause already governs the production of similar dharmas by one another, so why establish an all-pervading cause as well? The treatise answers directly: because the homogeneous cause is a cause only within its own category, whereas the all-pervading cause is “a general cause for defiled dharmas” — not only a cause of defiled dharmas of its own category but also of the defiled dharmas of every other category; by its force the afflictions of the other categories and their retinues grow along with it. Puguang states the two reasons separately: one turns on general versus restricted (a general cause and a non-general cause), the other on one’s own category versus another’s.
What is the constitution of the all-pervading cause? The treatise says, “The all-pervading dharmas will be analyzed at length in the chapter on latent tendencies, where the sense of pervasion is treated” — it is not unfolded in this fascicle. Yuanhui counts them out here on the reader’s behalf: the all-pervading are the eleven all-pervading latent tendencies together with the dharmas associated and coexistent with them; the eleven are, under the truth of suffering, the five views, doubt, and ignorance, seven in all, and under the truth of origination, wrong view, adherence to views, doubt, and ignorance, four in all. Puguang’s gloss runs on the same track and adds “the dharmas associated with and coexistent with the latent tendencies.”
The misreading is on the two words “arisen before and pervasive.” “Before” is a restriction — only all-pervading dharmas already arisen are taken, and the future is excluded; “pervasive” does not say that it pervades all dharmas, but that it pervades the defiled dharmas of the five categories. So the all-pervading cause extends through past and present but not the future, in agreement with the homogeneous cause.
The treatise also sets a question: do the defiled dharmas abandoned through cultivation within the continuum of a noble one also take what is abandoned through seeing as their cause? The Vaibhāṣikas of Kaśmīra answer, “All defiled dharmas take what is abandoned through seeing as their cause,” and cite three passages of the Treatise on Categories of Dharmas in evidence. But the Treatise of Designations says that “the first defiled volition already arisen when a noble one falls back from freedom from desire” takes only the unwholesome as its cause — how are the two to be reconciled? The author’s resolution is that this was said covertly with respect to a cause not yet abandoned: what is abandoned through seeing is also a cause of that volition, but the noble one has already abandoned the defilements of seeing, and so it is passed over unmentioned.
Where this lands: the all-pervading cause is the groundwork of the doctrine of afflictions. It explains something of the first importance in practice — why cutting off the defilements of seeing is a wholesale turning point: the eleven all-pervading latent tendencies abandoned through seeing are the general cause of every defiled dharma, and once the general cause is cut, the defiled dharmas of the other categories lose that overall route of nourishment. Only because this cause is established here does the chapter on latent tendencies have anything to say.
IX. The maturation cause: the unwholesome and the wholesome with outflows, transforming and ripening (second half of Root Stanza 55)
Stanza: “The maturation cause is the unwholesome, and the wholesome that has outflows alone.”
First ask: why does the indeterminate not call forth maturation, and why does the without-outflows not either? The treatise answers with two similes of seeds: the indeterminate, “because its force is weak, is like a rotted seed”; the without-outflows “lacks the moistening of craving, like a sound seed with no water to soak it,” and moreover the without-outflows belongs to no bound level, so how could it call forth a result belonging to a bound level? Conversely, the unwholesome and the wholesome with outflows have both senses complete — they belong to a bound level and have the moistening of craving — and so can call it forth, like a sound seed that has also received water.
The misreading is in how the two words “maturation cause” are read. The treatise first sorts out the name: is it “the cause of maturation” or “maturation which is itself the cause”? Both readings hold — if only the former, the holy teaching should not say “the maturation-born eye”; if only the latter, it should not say “the maturation of an action.” This keeps the reader from nailing one name to one grammar.
The real divergence is over the sense. Puguang records the Vaibhāṣikas’ explanation: “The cause is wholesome or unwholesome and the result is indeterminate; ripening as a different kind is the sense of maturation” — a single word, “different,” distinguishing it from the other causes. The author is not satisfied. He first sets two conditions on ripening: the entity must arise only through the transformation and differentiation of a continuum, and its duration must have a limit in accordance with the relative strength of the cause’s force. The results of the two causes, coexistent and associated, lack the first (they give the result as soon as they take it); the results of the three causes, enabling, homogeneous, and all-pervading, lack the second (to the very end of birth-and-death the result arises again and again with no limit of time). So he revises the judgment: “ripening through transformation is the sense of maturation,” and one should not distinguish it by the single word “different.” Fabao expressly records this revision as the author’s own explanation, distinguishing it from the Vaibhāṣikas’ older one; Shentai at the same place reckons the several masters together and says, “The Treatise Conforming to Correct Principle and this treatise together have five explanations” — one and the same term, with five readings standing side by side in the commentarial field of the Tang.
The treatise then spreads out the operative face of the maturation cause: how many aggregates in the three realms jointly call forth one result (in the desire realm one, two, or four aggregates; in the form realm one, two, four, or five; in the formless realm one or four); how many sense fields of maturation one action calls forth (from one to eleven); how an action of one lifetime can call forth maturation in three lifetimes while no action of three lifetimes calls forth maturation in one; how an action of one moment can call forth maturation in many moments while no action of many moments calls forth maturation in one — the reason in every case being the same sentence: one does not toil in vain and get a result smaller than the cause. The last three clauses are the most crucial: a maturation result is not simultaneous with the action, is not immediately subsequent to it, and can be brought about only when a continuum has transformed.
Where this lands: these three clauses are the temporal law of the whole doctrine of action and result. Between an action and its result there must be a stretch of continuum, and what carries that stretch the treatise does not answer here — the Sarvāstivādins posit acquisition, the Sautrāntikas posit seeds; further on, this vacancy is just the place the eighth consciousness comes to fill. To read this passage without remembering the vacancy is to have read it for nothing.
X. In which time-periods the six causes reside (first half of Root Stanza 56)
Stanza: “The all-pervading and the homogeneous, two time-periods; three causes, three time-periods.”
First ask: why should a cause be restricted as to time-period? The answer: the all-pervading and the homogeneous reside only in past and present and are absent in the future — for the reason stated above, that they are established with respect to position. The three causes, associated, coexistent, and maturation, are present throughout all three time-periods.
The misreading is over the item the stanza does not state. The stanza names only five causes; where has the enabling cause gone? The treatise says, “Since the stanza does not state where the enabling cause resides, one should infer from the sense that it extends through the three time-periods and to what is outside time.” Yuanhui breaks open the two words “outside time” — what is outside time is the unconditioned. The enabling cause extends not only through the three time-periods but also to the unconditioned, which answers exactly to what was said in the second section, that it is the widest of the six.
Where this lands: fixing the three time-periods looks fussy, but it is in fact the premise of the section on taking and giving a result (the fourteenth). Which time-period a cause resides in decides at which position it can take a result and at which it can give one. This stanza is a nail joining what precedes to what follows, not an appendix.
XI. Results are only the conditioned and release from bondage; the unconditioned itself has neither cause nor result (second half of Root Stanza 56)
Stanza: “Results are the conditioned and release from bondage; the unconditioned has neither cause nor result.”
First ask: how many kinds of result are there? The treatise answers by citing the root treatise: “What are result-dharmas? They are all the conditioned, together with cessation through discernment.” Yuanhui separates the two: first the conditioned, that is, the four results of human effort, dominance, homogeneous outflow, and maturation, which are drawn forth by the six causes; second release from bondage, whose entity is cessation through discernment and which is realized by the path — the path is a cause of realization and not a cause of production, and so this cause of realization is not among the six causes.
The misreading comes at once: since cessation through discernment is a result, should it not have a cause? And since it is also an enabling cause, should it not have a result? The treatise answers very hard: only conditioned dharmas have causes and results, and the unconditioned has neither — “because it has none of the six causes and none of the five results.” What then is the relation between the path and cessation through discernment? The treatise divides it very finely: with respect to the acquisition the path’s function is to produce; with respect to the cessation its function is to realize. So although the path is not a producing cause of the cessation, one may still say that cessation through discernment is a result of the path. As for why the unconditioned may serve as an enabling cause and yet have no result — because, standing apart from the dharmas of the world, it has no operation of taking and giving a result.
From here the fascicle enters the longest dispute in the whole treatise. The Sautrāntikas open: the unconditioned is not a cause, because “there is no scripture saying that a cause is unconditioned, and there is scripture saying that causes are only conditioned.” The Sarvāstivādins counter, the Sautrāntikas answer again, and after several exchanges the Sautrāntikas push the question to the bottom: no unconditioned dharma is really existent; a separate real thing of the sort that form and feeling are, is exactly what it is not. Space is merely the absence of anything tangible; cessation through discernment is merely the non-recurrence of what is left over, by the force of selection; cessation independent of discernment is merely the non-recurrence of what is left over, through the lack of a condition. The Sarvāstivādins for their part maintain that the unconditioned has a separate real entity, realized inwardly and severally by the noble ones.
In this contest the author records the Sautrāntikas’ reconciliation of scripture (the sūtra on the five faculties and the simile of the lamp flame), records the Sarvāstivādins’ five senses of “entity” (entity as intrinsic nature, as object, as bondage, as cause, and as what is included), and finally closes with the single sentence, “The Vaibhāṣikas do not allow this explanation,” passing no overall judgment of his own.
Worth reading sentence by sentence are the two safeguards the author sets up on the Sautrāntikas’ behalf. The first is linguistic: the Sautrāntikas do not say that the entity of the unconditioned is wholly nothing, but say, “as when it is said that this sound has a prior non-existence and a subsequent non-existence” — before it is uttered the sound has a prior non-existence, and once it has passed, a subsequent non-existence; that non-existence may not be called really existent, and yet the word “has” in the phrase “has a prior non-existence” still holds good. To say that there is an unconditioned is to use ‘there is’ in just this sense. The second is nominal: if it is non-existent, how can it deserve the name of the noble truth of cessation, and how can it be established as the third? The answer lies in the two words “noble truth” — a noble truth takes the sense of being without inversion, and the noble one sees suffering as suffering and sees the non-existence of suffering as non-existence, without inversion on either side. As for why it is placed third, the answer is plainer still: “it is seen and stated by the noble ones immediately after the second, and so becomes the third” — a matter of sequence.
Taking the two safeguards together, what the Sautrāntikas defend is not that there is no nirvāṇa, but that nirvāṇa is not a thing. Miss this measure and the whole dispute will be misread as a quarrel over existence and non-existence.
Where this lands: this is the weightiest passage in the fascicle, and there are two ways to read it. First, see that the point at issue is not the wording but the entity — both sides grant that scripture calls nirvāṇa foremost and calls it the truth of cessation, and what they contest is whether this foremost is one really existent thing or is utterly non-existent. Second, notice the author’s method: he sets out the Sarvāstivāda position in good order and then lets the Sautrāntikas question it sentence by sentence, up to the point where the Vaibhāṣikas do not allow it. A book that takes its stand on the Sarvāstivāda and, where the position is awkward, breaks it with the Sautrāntika, shows its character here more completely than anywhere else.
XII. Which result each of the six causes obtains (Root Stanza 57)
Stanza: “The last cause has the maturation result, the first cause the dominant result; the homogeneous and all-pervading, the homogeneous result; the coexistent and associated, the result of human effort.”
First ask: why does this stanza put maturation and dominance at the head and the tail? The treatise says so quite plainly: “the last cause” is the maturation cause, because it stands last among the six; “the first cause” is the enabling cause, because it stands first. And among the five results, the maturation result stands first and the dominant result last. The stanza uses order to remember order — a mnemonic device this treatise often employs, not a doctrinal depth.
The misreading is over the name of the dominant result. “If it merely abides without obstructing, what dominance is there?” The treatise answers: it obtains the name of dominance precisely by not obstructing. But the author at once adds a further layer: the enabling cause also has superior power — as the ten sense fields and elements have with respect to the five bodies of consciousness, as the actions of sentient beings have with respect to the receptacle world, as the ear faculty and the rest have with respect to the arising of visual consciousness (having heard of a thing one wishes to see it, and so visual consciousness arises). This addition matters: dominance does not mean doing nothing; it is only that its lower limit is set as low as not getting in the way.
Where does the name of the result of human effort come from? The treatise says, “there is no separate human effort apart from the entity of the person” — it is not that some thing called human effort exists apart from the entity of the agent; it is simply the operation belonging to dharmas, like the doings of a person, and hence is called human effort. Two worldly examples of names established from similes are adduced (the crow’s-foot herb, the drunken-elephant general). Puguang here cites the Entrance into Abhidharma and glosses the names of the five results one by one, each name taking its sense differently: maturation takes “the result does not resemble the cause”; homogeneous outflow takes “the result resembles the cause and arises from it”; release from bondage takes “it is obtained by the path and is not produced by the path”; human effort takes “by the force of this, that obtains arising”; dominance takes “by the dominance of what is earlier, the later dharma obtains arising.”
The treatise leaves an unsettled question at the end: is the result of human effort found only with the two causes, coexistent and associated? One master says the other causes have it too, excepting only maturation; another master says the maturation cause also has a result of human effort separated by a long interval, like the harvest a farmer gathers. The two views stand together and the treatise does not adjudicate.
Where this lands: this stanza is the wiring diagram between the six causes and the five results. The least laborious way to memorize it is to remember that the two ends are order and the middle is resemblance and operation — the homogeneous and all-pervading take resemblance and so obtain the homogeneous result; the coexistent and associated take operation and so obtain the result of human effort.
XIII. The look of each of the five results (Root Stanzas 58 and 59)
Stanza: “The maturation result is an indeterminate dharma, belonging to sentient beings and produced by the determinate; the homogeneous result resembles its own cause; release from bondage is exhaustion through discernment. If a dharma arises through the force of another, that result is called the result of human effort; apart from conditioned dharmas already arisen before, conditioned dharmas are dominant results.”
First ask: why must a maturation result be indeterminate? The treatise’s order is to establish the ethical quality first and then narrow the range. As to quality, it is only unobscured-indeterminate; as to range, it is restricted to sentient beings and is only “produced by the determinate” — every unwholesome dharma and every wholesome dharma with outflows can determine a maturation, and is therefore called determinate; the result arises only after that determinate action, neither simultaneously nor immediately subsequently, and so is named produced by the determinate. Since it is produced by the determinate, one may know that it does not extend to the homogeneous or to the nourished, for those two are produced by all three ethical qualities.
The misreading is over mountains, rivers, and the great earth. What is not counted among sentient beings also arises from action, so why is it not called maturation? The treatise answers: because it is held in common — others enjoy it just the same, whereas a maturation result admits in no way of being enjoyed in common with others. Then the dominant result also arises from action; why may it be enjoyed in common? Because it arises from action held in common. “Common” and “not common” are the dividing line between the maturation result and the dominant result, not “inner” and “outer.”
The misreading about the homogeneous result is finer still. The all-pervading cause also obtains a homogeneous result, so why is it not allowed to be called a homogeneous cause? The treatise answers: the result of the all-pervading resembles its cause only through sharing a level and sharing defilement, and not through resembling it in kind; only what resembles in kind is called a homogeneous cause. Hence four alternatives are set up: a non-all-pervading dharma acting as a homogeneous cause; an all-pervading dharma of another category acting as an all-pervading cause; an all-pervading dharma of its own category being both; and, apart from the preceding three, the remainder. The four alternatives are Abhidharma’s standard method of taking things apart, used to keep two categories from being blurred together.
The gloss on the name of the result of release from bondage is extremely short and extremely important: “because it is cessation it is called exhaustion; because it is selection it is called discernment” — cessation through discernment is called a result of release from bondage because it is obtained by discernment and because discernment brings the defilements to exhaustion. The result of human effort is established on “arising through the force of another,” with the examples of a preparatory mind of a lower level producing the absorption of a higher level, and a pure mind of meditative absorption producing a transformation mind; cessation through discernment, however, must be spoken of as obtained by the power of the path and not as produced by the power of the path — a difference of one word, following directly upon the eleventh section’s division between the path’s producing with respect to acquisition and its realizing with respect to cessation.
The definition of the dominant result uses exclusion: “Among conditioned dharmas, apart from those already arisen before, the rest are dominant results of conditioned dharmas” — because a result is either simultaneous with its cause or later than it, and never earlier. For the boundary between human effort and dominance the treatise gives a memorable example: a thing made by a craftsman is, for the craftsman, both a result of human effort and a dominant result, while for anyone other than the craftsman it is only a dominant result. Puguang compresses this boundary into a sentence: human effort is said with respect to having the power to act, dominance on the ground of not obstructing.
Where this lands: of the five results, four are conditioned and only release from bondage is unconditioned; four stand in a temporal relation to their causes, and only release from bondage is realized rather than produced. Remember this one exception and the whole dispute of the eleventh section falls into its proper place.
XIV. Taking a result and giving a result: at which position a cause operates (Root Stanza 60)
Stanza: “Five take their result only in the present, and two give it likewise; two causes give in past and present, and one gives only in the past.”
First ask: what is taking a result, and what is giving a result? The treatise gives the definitions only at the end of this section: “Because it can serve as the seed of a result, it is called taking the result; because it is presently giving that result power, it is called giving the result.” Puguang explains more plainly — seed carries the sense of being able to produce, and since the cause has the capacity to produce a result it is called taking the result; it presently gives that result power, and so it is called giving the result. Fabao’s two sentences are the easiest to remember: at the taking, the sense of cause is established and it is named a seed; at the giving, it is presently drawing the result into arising and is named giving. Taking a result is claiming it and giving a result is handing it over, and the two do not fall at the same position.
First misreading: why must the five causes take their result in the present? Because in the past they have already taken it, and in the future they have no operation. As for why the enabling cause is not included in this list, the treatise says it with reserve: the enabling cause does not necessarily have a result, and so the stanza does not state it.
Second misreading: the two causes, homogeneous and all-pervading, give their result in both past and present — giving in the past is easy to understand, but how does one give in the present? The treatise answers: because some homogeneous results arise immediately (the cause is in the present and the result arises right after it). And once the result has arisen the cause becomes past, which is called having already given the result, and it should not give again.
Third misreading: why does the maturation cause give its result only in the past? Because a maturation result is neither simultaneous with its cause nor immediately subsequent to it. This sentence meshes exactly with the three clauses at the end of the ninth section.
Here the treatise also arranges several sets of four alternatives, all framed in terms of acquisition: a wholesome homogeneous cause that takes and does not give is the last acquisition relinquished when wholesome roots are cut off; one that gives and does not take is the first acquisition obtained at the restoration of wholesome roots; one that both takes and gives covers all the other positions in which wholesome roots are not cut off; and neither of the two is the remainder apart from the preceding three. For the unwholesome and the obscured-indeterminate, four alternatives are made on the same pattern; for the unobscured-indeterminate there is a following-consequent clause — whenever it gives a result it must also take one, while the last aggregates of an arhat take without giving anything.
At the end the treatise records other masters who set up four further results beyond the five: the establishment result (the water disc as a result of the wind disc, grasses and the rest as results of the great earth), the preparatory result (knowledge of non-arising and the rest, obtained remotely by way of the contemplation of impurity), the conjunction result (visual consciousness and the rest as results of the eye faculty and the rest), and the cultivation result (transformation minds and the rest as results of the meditative absorptions), gathering them up as “all included among results of human effort and dominant results.” Puguang records this as the view of the masters of the West, the four results together with the preceding five making nine.
Where this lands: this section puts all the causal relations set out above back onto the axis of time. If the six causes and five results are memorized only as a static table, the most important dimension is lost — a cause is not operating forever; it takes its result at one specific position and gives it at another.
XV. From how many causes each of the four classes arises: the fascicle gathered into one negation (Root Stanza 61 and the first half of 62)
Stanza: “The defiled, the maturation-born, the rest, and the first noble — in that order, excluding maturation, excluding the all-pervading, excluding those two, and excluding also the homogeneous, the remainder produces them. This is said of mind and mental factors; for the rest, exclude the associated cause as well.”
First ask: what is this stanza counting? The answer: it divides all conditioned dharmas into four classes — defiled dharmas, maturation-born dharmas, the remaining dharmas, and the first dharmas without outflows — and counts for each how many causes produce it. Defiled dharmas exclude the maturation cause and are produced by the remaining five (the defiled is not a result of the maturation cause); maturation-born dharmas exclude the all-pervading cause and are produced by the remaining five (what the all-pervading produces is defiled only); the remaining dharmas exclude both maturation and all-pervading and are produced by the remaining four; the first dharmas without outflows exclude the homogeneous cause as well and are produced by the remaining three (before the first without-outflows there is no dharma of the same kind).
The misreading is at the fifth line. What has been counted so far is said of mind and mental factors; form and the formations not associated with mind cannot be associated, and so the associated cause must be excluded as well — whereupon the four classes become, in order, produced by four, four, three, and two causes. Yuanhui praises the stanza here: “This stanza is exceedingly deft; it should be well pondered” — the single word “excluding” used four times and the two words “the remainder produces” used four times press eight sets of numbers into thirty characters.
The real gathering-up is in the last sentence: “A dharma produced by a single cause definitely does not exist.”
The sentence is short enough to slip past, yet it is the hammer-fall of the whole fascicle. Fabao points out here what it excludes — to allow that one cause can produce a dharma would be to agree with the non-Buddhists. A whole fascicle on the six causes and five results was written, in the end, not to prove that dharmas have causes but to prove that no dharma has a single cause. The arising of any dharma requires at least two causes and at most five; nothing whatever is brought about by one reason alone.
Where this lands: set this sentence back beside the transitional sentence at the head of the fascicle — “not apart from the conjunction of the other causes and conditions” — and head and tail are seen to join. This fascicle begins from the point that the arising-mark cannot produce on its own and ends at “a dharma produced by a single cause definitely does not exist”; all the distinctions of the six causes and five results in between are only the taking apart of this one thing, taken apart finely enough that one can no longer quietly install a single cause in one’s own mind.
What one can carry away from this fascicle
First, remember the five words “the Abhidharma masters allow.” In listing the six causes the treatise sets down “allow” and not “the Buddha said,” and the Sautrāntika line takes exactly this to challenge them as lacking scriptural text; Saṅghabhadra, adducing scripture at many places to establish them, declares outright, “These six causes the Buddha stated everywhere.” Whether the six causes have scriptural warrant this treatise does not adjudicate, and the positions of both parties are recorded under Further Resonances — knowing this is what makes it intelligible that the Sautrāntikas and the Sarvāstivādins can quarrel for a whole fascicle inside one and the same book.
Second, read the fixing of the causes’ time-periods together with the taking and giving of a result. A cause is not something perpetually in operation; it has a position of taking and a position of giving. Once the doctrine of cause and result is set upon the axis of time, a fatalistic reading cannot stand.
Third, hold on to the last sentence. A dharma produced by a single cause definitely does not exist — this is the one categorical statement the fascicle leaves its reader, and the reason it divides the six causes so finely.
Further Resonances: A Mirror of Four Commentaries
The above is the sense of this fascicle’s own text. What follows records separately the judgments of the four Tang commentaries, the choices of the earlier translation, and Saṅghabhadra’s counter-refutation — a mirror is not the treatise, only a few other ways of reading the same fascicle. They are recorded together without adjudication, each returned to its own place.
Divergence in the outline. Puguang and Fabao both mark “the third major division of this chapter,” the one writing “explaining causes and conditions” and the other “explaining cause and also condition”; Yuanhui writes “From here, the third major division, explaining causes and conditions,” and further divides the fascicle into three sections (properly explaining the constitution of causes; explaining how causes obtain results; explaining how dharmas arise from causes), concluding at the end, “All the distinctions above belong in sum to the first part; the explanation of causes is complete.” Shentai does not use the language of major divisions and sets up a fivefold outline instead. The four differ in their outline wording and cut at one and the same boundary.
The dharma-count for mind as sovereign as a cause. Puguang has, “Mind as sovereign, with respect to ninety-eight dharmas at the fewest, is still a coexistent cause with fifty-eight dharmas”; Fabao sets up two further numbers, a greatest and a least (in the mind of the first absorption, a cause with one hundred fifty-eight among two hundred seventy-nine dharmas), and rebukes the earlier view outright: “Those who say that mind as sovereign, with respect to ninety-eight dharmas at the fewest, is still a coexistent cause with fifty-eight dharmas, are in error.” Shentai here runs on the same track as Puguang. The wording rebukes while the numbers pointed to are the same; who is being rebuked is not adjudicated.
Choice among the four views on the indeterminate five aggregates. The treatise lists three divergent views without adjudicating, and the two commentators choose oppositely: Puguang judges, “All the treatises have four views, and none of them has an adjudicating master,” and then, “The present interpretation: for the time being take the later master as correct” — taking the fourth view (form and the four aggregates are not one another’s causes), and citing the Mahāvibhāṣā on the number of conditions for the great elements and for the mental sense field in evidence. Fabao asks, “The four views differ, and since there is no adjudicating text, which is the correct view?” and answers himself, “One should say the earlier view is the better” — taking the first view (they are reciprocally causes), on the ground that since form and the four aggregates are reciprocally causes in the two qualities, wholesome and defiled, the indeterminate should not stand alone in differing. The one takes the first and the other the last; both are recorded without adjudication.
The sense of maturation. Puguang records the Vaibhāṣikas’ explanation, “ripening as a different kind”; Fabao records the author’s own explanation, “ripening through transformation,” and also records the counter-defense of the Treatise Conforming to Correct Principle; Shentai combines that treatise’s three explanations with this treatise’s two into five. The three gather different numbers, and this fascicle does not adjudicate which is sufficient.
Where the other masters’ four results are subsumed. Puguang gives two views, a general explanation (all four are included among results of human effort and dominant results) and a separate interpretation (the first and third are dominant only; the second and fourth extend to both results); Shentai takes the separate interpretation outright. The two assign them differently; both are recorded.
To what the prior acquisition at the restoration of wholesome roots belongs. Shentai cites the Treatise Conforming to Correct Principle rebuking the author’s words, “one should say the prior acquisition of what is restored at that time,” and further records Sthiramati’s defense — Sthiramati was Vasubandhu’s disciple, and his defense holds that what the author said extended from the outset to all past acquisitions without beginning, and did not take only the last acquisition relinquished. Puguang at the same place makes only a brief remark and does not cite Sthiramati. This is the fascicle’s one corroboration of lineage that appears in the commentaries and not in the treatise text.
Divergence in the earlier translation. In the places of this fascicle answering to it, Paramārtha’s old translation, the Expository Treatise on the Treasury, forms a lineage of renderings of its own: the enabling cause is “facilitating cause,” the maturation cause “retribution cause,” the maturation result “retribution result,” the result of release from bondage “release-and-cessation result,” the result of human effort “efficacy result,” the dharmas that follow mind “dharmas following mind,” the two disciplines “two protections,” and the establishment result and the conjunction result “support result” and “collection result.” Two points deserve most notice doctrinally. First, the gloss on the result of release from bondage runs on a different track — Xuanzang has, “because it is cessation it is called exhaustion; because it is selection it is called discernment,” while Paramārtha has, “exhaustion means the cessation that is permanent separation; knowledge means the three faculties within the three paths.” Second, the dominant result is established from the opposite direction — Xuanzang establishes it on “apart from those already arisen before,” Paramārtha on “what did not exist before,” the thing designated being one and the formulation different. At “the unconditioned has neither cause nor result” Yuanhui comments outright on the old translation: “The old translation’s rendering that the unconditioned is not cause or result is a faulty translation here,” and distinguishes for himself between “is not” and “has no”; Puguang, Fabao, and Shentai pass no comment on the two translations at this place. Which of the two translations is superior is not adjudicated.
Further: Paramārtha’s version divides the Chapter on the Faculties into only four fascicles where Xuanzang divides it into five, so the fascicle boundaries of the two versions do not correspond — the head of Paramārtha’s “Analysis of the Faculties, part four” falls in the middle of this fascicle (exactly at the dispute over the real existence of the unconditioned), while the head of this fascicle (the general listing of the six causes) lies within Paramārtha’s “part three.” A reader collating the two versions must compare them by the structure of the scene and may not match them by fascicle number.
Saṅghabhadra’s counter-refutation. The Treatise Conforming to Correct Principle responds to this fascicle section by section; five points are the chief. First, the objection that the six causes have no scriptural warrant. Saṅghabhadra first restates the objection — “These six causes were not stated by the Buddha; how does the root treatise establish these names on its own authority?” — and at once turns it with “there is certainly no doctrine that the great Teacher did not state,” then reconciles it with five proofs: that the text has been lost, that it was stated under another heading, that it was handed down by gods and sages, that other schools do not recite it, and that it is stated scattered through the several sūtras; and he concludes, “These six causes the Buddha stated everywhere; those who detest and turn from them are deluded and do not see them.” So “the six causes have no scriptural text” is a claim he refutes, not one he concedes; the establishing and the refuting of the absence of scriptural text is precisely one of the dividing lines between this fascicle’s author and Saṅghabhadra. Second, on the definition of the coexistent cause, Saṅghabhadra says plainly, “the causal character stated here is too meager,” and again, “one should not say that only being one another’s results makes a coexistent cause,” establishing instead that “conditioned dharmas having one result may be coexistent causes.” Third, on the answer that the homogeneous cause does not exist in the future, Saṅghabhadra defends the covert statement of the Treatise on the Development of Wisdom and rebukes: “Yet the Sūtra-master says: that is not a good explanation.” Fourth, on the sense of maturation, Saṅghabhadra says, “the Vaibhāṣikas do not state decisively that everything obtained by the six causes is called ripening,” refuting the author on the ground that “merely different” does not cover the sense exhaustively. Fifth, on the general dispute over the real existence of the unconditioned, Saṅghabhadra announces for himself, “I now refute the Sūtra-master’s slander of causes,” and concludes, “Thus the Sūtra-master’s slander of causes has been refuted, and it is established that nirvāṇa is real in its entity.” The words of both parties are preserved in the Han transmission; which prevails is not adjudicated.
The joint with the Yogācāra line. Fabao already drew this line out at the end of the section on the six causes: he sets this treatise’s six causes beside the Mahāyāna ten causes and twenty causes, and appends a question of his own — from what scriptural text does the sense of the Mahāyāna ten causes, six causes, and four conditions come? The ancient masters did not answer this question, and this fascicle does not answer it on their behalf; yet three joints may be noted in advance. First, the opening out of the enabling cause into ten causes and twenty causes. Second, the names of the five results, taken over entire by the Yogācāra lineage without the change of a single word. Third, the requirement of a continuum between the maturation cause and its result, while this treatise posits no separate entity to carry that stretch — the Sarvāstivādins posit acquisition, the Sautrāntikas posit seeds, and thereafter comes the establishing of the maturation consciousness. One and the same question, two generations of answers; that reading Yogācāra requires reading back into the Abhidharmakośa is nowhere more direct than in this fascicle.
四緣·十二心Four Conditions · Twelve Minds
全文五層 →Full five layers →讀這一卷之前
這一卷開頭只有八個字——「廣說因已。緣復云何」。上一卷把六因五果講完了,論主立刻追一句:因既然說盡,緣又是什麼?初讀的人會覺得多此一問:因與緣不是一回事嗎?正是這一問,把整部阿毘達磨最細的一道工序打開了。
神泰疏一開卷就替我們數過本卷的頌:「自下有十二行半頌辨四緣,於中有三」。五言頌二十字為一行,十二行半就是二百五十字——本卷正頌八塊,恰是這個數。所以「半行」不是零頭,而是承上一卷而來的半首頌:上一卷末尾那首頌的後半,正好落在『因訖/緣起』的關節上,玄奘分卷時捨頌界而從義界,於是這半首頌成了本卷的開端。讀本卷,等於從那個關節接下來。
泰疏又把這十二行半分成五段:一行半立四緣之體,一行明四緣的作用時位,一行明諸法由幾緣生,一行明大種所造互為因,最後「自下第五有八行頌廣明心義,重辨等無間緣」——八行頌全用在心上。這個比例本身就是提示:四緣之中,論主最在意的是等無間緣;而等無間緣一旦講深,就必須把『一念心之後能接哪些心』的全譜攤開來,於是有十二心、二十心、得心多少三段。四緣是綱,心是場。
還有一件事要先說:本卷中段有一段少見的破外道。阿毘達磨向來是自家清點法數,很少對外交鋒;但講到『諸法由幾緣生』時,論主忽然轉身,用整整一段破『一切世間由自在天一因所生』之說,並且引了一首外道自己的頌。這一段是全論難得一見的護法文字,下文會逐節教清。
一、四緣:為什麼是四個,以及每一個管什麼
〔一之一〕四緣不是論主的發明。 論一開口便自問「於何處說」,自答「謂契經中」——四緣是經中所說,論只是加以整理。這一步不可略過:阿毘達磨的體例,凡立法數必先交代出處,出處在經則其名不可改。經中作「四緣性」,論隨即解釋這個「性」字:「此中性者是緣種類」——「性」在這裡不是某種本質,只是『這一類』的意思。易誤處正在此:讀者常把「因緣性」讀成『因緣的體性』,於是四緣變成四樣東西;其實它是『因緣這一類』。眾賢在《順正理》裡把這一層說得更白:「此中緣性即是四緣,如四所居即所居性,為顯種類故說性言」——如同說『四個住處』與『住處這一類』,並不多出一物。落到讀法上:四緣是四種分類,不是四件實物;記住這一點,下文『一切法都是所緣緣』『一切法都是增上緣』這類話才不會嚇著人。
〔一之二〕因緣:把六因減去一個。 「於六因內除能作因,所餘五因是因緣性」——俱有、同類、相應、遍行、異熟五因合為因緣,唯獨能作因被挑出去,改配增上緣。先問:為什麼偏偏是能作因出局?因為能作因的定義是「不障礙」,它的範圍寬到把一切法都收進去;一個寬到無所不包的因,放在「親生」這一格裡就沒有分別力了。所以論把它挪去作增上緣,讓因緣專管「親能生」的五因。易誤處:以為六因四緣是兩套不相干的清單,於是死背兩遍。其實它們是同一批作用的兩種切法。寶疏把這層關係說得最省力:「因是親稱、緣是疎名」,又說「六因之中五是親故以親名同,四緣之中三是疎故以疎名同」——六因裡五個親、一個疎,四緣裡三個疎、一個親,親疎交叉,所以名字要分兩套。落地上,往後凡遇『此由幾因生、由幾緣生』的問答,先把親疎二字擺在心上,數目就不會亂。
〔一之三〕等無間緣:為什麼只有心能當。 定義是「除阿羅漢臨涅槃時最後心心所法」以外,一切已生的心心所。名字則出於「此緣生法等而無間,依是義立等無間名」——所生之法前後相「等」,中間沒有間隔,故名等無間。先問:為什麼色法不能當?論答得極巧:色法生起是不等的。同一念可以有欲界無表色與色界無表色一起現前,也可以有欲界無表色與無漏無表色一起現前——「以諸色法雜亂現前,等無間緣生無雜亂」。色法可以幾樣並排,心卻不能:一念只有一個受、一個想,不會一受生二受。這就是「等」字的實義。
論還記了兩位古德的補充。世友說:同一身中一分長養色相續不斷,又有第二分長養色生起,二者「不相違害」——能並存的東西,就沒有『讓位』可言。大德法救則說色法前後多少不定,並舉了兩個對稱的譬喻:燒一大堆稻稈只成一小堆灰,是從多生少;一粒細種長成諾瞿陀樹,「根莖枝葉漸次增榮,聳幹垂條多所蔭映」,是從少生多。易誤處:把這兩個譬喻讀成論主在談植物與火。它們是在證一件事——色法的量沒有「等」的保證,所以不堪立為等無間緣。
接著論主自設難題:心所不也有多少不等嗎?善心與不善心所具的心所數目就不同。答案分得很細:那是異類相望才有的多少,「然自類中無非等義」——不會有一受生多受。再進一步問:那麼是否只有自類前法才作後法的緣?論答「不爾」,並給出正解:「前心品法總為後品等無間緣,非唯自類」——是一整個心品讓位給下一個心品,不是受讓給受、想讓給想。落地上:等無間緣說的是位置的讓渡,不是同類的傳承;把它讀成「同類相續」,正是論主在下一段要破的執。
〔一之四〕唯執同類者的失誤在哪裡。 有一類人主張唯自類才有等無間緣,「心唯生心、受唯生受」。他們為此付出的代價是:從無染心無間生起染心時,這個染心中的煩惱只好用「先滅煩惱」作等無間緣——中間隔了一段無染,也硬要接回同類去;他們還舉出滅盡定為例,說出定之心是用入定前那個心作緣的。論主一句話破之:「彼說非善,初無漏心應闕此緣而得生故」。先問:這一破為何致命?因為最初生起的無漏心,此前根本沒有同類的無漏心可接;若只有自類能作緣,這一念就缺了四緣中的一緣而仍然生起——而心心所定由四緣生,是他們自己也承認的宗義。易誤處:以為論主在此否定滅盡定出心接入定心的說法。不是。那個模型論主自己也用(見下文四句分別),他只是不許把它推廣成「唯自類」。落地上:這是全論常見的破法——不破你的例子,破你把例子當成通則。
〔一之五〕未來為什麼沒有等無間緣,而佛又如何知未來。 有人問:未來世為何不許有等無間緣?論答「以未來法雜亂而住無前後故」——未來諸法還沒有排隊,沒有前後,就談不上誰接誰。這一答立刻引出一個更大的問題:既然未來無前後,佛如何知道「此法無間、此法應生」?論在此連錄三說而後取一。第一說是「比過現法而現知故」,佛比類過去現在的因果次第而於未來現前了達,並補一句「是願智攝故非比智」;論主難之曰若如此,「世尊未見前際,於後際法應不能知」。第二說是有情身內有未來果的「因先兆」,屬不相應行蘊之差別,佛只觀此先兆便知,「非要現遊靜慮通慧」;論主難之曰那就成了「於未來占相故知,非為現證」。第三說是經部:「世尊舉意遍知諸法非比非占」,論主判「此說為善」,並引世尊自語作結——諸佛境界不可思議。
先問:這一段為何要放在四緣章裡?因為它其實是在守住「未來無前後」這條線。若承認佛靠推比或占相,未來就得先排好隊,等無間緣就要伸進未來,前面的定義即壞。易誤處:把三說讀成佛學的認識論爭。它們是為了保住一條法數上的界線而發。落地上:讀阿毘達磨要習慣這種筆法——一個看似神學的插曲,往往是為了不讓某條定義漏水。
〔一之六〕阿羅漢最後一念心:是「意」,卻不是「緣」。 論問:羅漢最後心心所為何不是等無間緣?答「無餘心等續此起故」——後面沒有心接了。難者立刻反問:無間滅的心都名為「意」(作後識所依),最後心之後既不生識,豈不是連「意」也不該叫了?論的分判極漂亮:「意是依所顯非作用所顯」,而等無間緣是「作用所顯」。意是就『可作依』而立名,最後心仍然具備可作依的資格,只是其餘助緣缺了,所以後識不生;等無間緣則是就『實際起了讓位之用』而立名,凡被此緣取為果的法,「定無諸法及諸有情能為障礙令彼不起」——一取果就必生,沒有例外。所以「故最後心雖得名意,而不可說等無間緣」。
先問:這一字之辨有什麼用?它區分了資格與效力。易誤處:把「意」與「等無間緣」當成同一件事的兩個名字——本論確實常說『無間滅心名意』,容易滑過去。落地上:往後凡遇兩個名字看似同指一物,先問一句『這一個是就依而立,還是就用而立』,多半就解開了。
〔一之七〕兩重四句:把「等無間」與「無間」拆開。 論設二問,各答四句。第一問:與心作等無間(果)的,是否也都是接在心後起的?第一句是前者非後者:無心定出時的心心所,以及第二剎那以後的二定剎那——它們是心的等無間果,卻不是緊接著心而起。第二句是後者非前者:最初生起的二定剎那之生住異滅四相,以及有心位中諸心心所之生住異滅四相——接在心後起,卻不是心的果。第三句俱是,第四句俱非。第二問把「無心定無間」換進來,答案只是把前四句對調——「前第三第四句為今第一第二句」。
先問:這樣繞來繞去為了什麼?為了逼出一個結論:「等無間」是果的名字,「無間」是位置的名字,二者可以分離。所以論末後補了一問:從二定出來的心,回望入定之心中間隔了那麼久,怎麼還算無間?答「中間不隔心心所故」——中間隔的不是心,就不算隔。易誤處:把「無間」讀成時間上的緊接。它是心的序列上的緊接,時間可以拖很長。落地上:這一條解了後世讀者最常卡住的一關——無想定五百劫之後出定,那一念心的等無間緣仍是入定前的心。
〔一之八〕所緣緣:不被緣的時候,仍然是所緣。 定義是「所緣緣性,即一切法望心心所,隨其所應」:眼識與相應法以一切色為所緣緣,乃至意識與相應法以一切法為所緣緣。真正的教學處在後面一句:「若法與彼法為所緣,無時此與彼非所緣」,即使在沒有被緣的時位,它仍然算所緣所攝,因為「被緣、不緣其相一故」,並設喻——「譬如薪等,於不燒時亦名所燒,相無異故」。
先問:這算什麼道理?柴不燒也叫柴薪,是因為『可燒』這件事屬於它的相,不屬於火的臨在。同理,『可作所緣』是法自身的相,不因為此刻沒人緣它而失去。易誤處:以為所緣緣要等心去緣它才成立——那樣就把緣說成心造的了。論還順帶點出所緣有「處、事、剎那三皆決定」,並問所依(根)是否亦然,答亦然,唯現在世「親附自所依」而過去未來相離,另存一說「在過去亦親附所依」。頌疏為這一節配了一個極好的譬喻:「心、心所法其性羸劣,執境方生,猶如羸人非杖不起」——心是虛弱的人,境是拐杖,沒有杖便站不起來。落地上:所緣緣不是心的附屬品,是心得以生起的支撐;這一句往後在唯識學裡還要被反覆掂量。
〔一之九〕增上緣:最寬的一格。 「增上緣性即能作因」,體最寬,因為一切法都是增上緣。難者立刻抓住把柄:既然所緣緣也是一切法,憑什麼說增上緣獨寬?論答兩路。一路是舉反例:與此念心同時俱起的那些法,「俱有諸法未嘗為所緣」——同一剎那的伴侶做不成自己的所緣,卻仍是增上緣,可見增上緣的範圍確實更大。另一路是換角度:「或所作廣名增上緣」,一切法各除自性,對一切有為都能作增上緣,是就『所作之廣』而說。
先問:哪一路是正解?論兩存不判,這正是本論的體例。易誤處:把「增上」讀成『加強』。它的實義是不障礙——它什麼也不做,只是不擋路;而正因為不擋路的資格最容易滿足,它的範圍才最寬。末後論還設一問收尾:有沒有哪個法對某法完全不作四緣中任何一緣?有——「自性於自性」,自己對自己一緣不作;對他性也有,就是有為對無為、無為對無為。落地上:這一問是四緣章的封口。它告訴讀者,四緣雖寬,仍有邊界;無為法不生,所以不受任何緣。
二、作用落在哪一剎那:正滅時與正生時
〔二之一〕同樣是因,出手的時候不一樣。 頌曰「二因於正滅,三因於正生,餘二緣相違,而興於作用」。五因之中,俱有因與相應因的作用在「正滅時」,而「正滅時言顯法現在,滅現前故,名正滅時」;同類因、遍行因、異熟因三因的作用在「正生時」,即未來法「於正生位生現前故」。先問:因不是應該在生果的時候起作用嗎,怎麼會有因在「滅」的時候出手?關鍵在於這二因所生的是同時之果:俱有、相應是與果同一剎那的,果與因一起現在、一起趨滅,所以說它們「於法滅位方興作用」——不是因先滅了才生果,而是它們的作用只在現在這一剎那顯出來。反之,同類、遍行、異熟三因所生的是後時之果,果還在未來將生之位,因的牽引之力就落在那個「將生」上。
〔二之二〕二緣為什麼相反。 論說「二緣作用與此相違」:等無間緣在「法生位」起作用,「以彼生時前心心所與其處故」——它的工作就是讓位,位子讓出來的那一刻,正是新法生起之時;而所緣緣在「能緣滅位」起作用,「以心心所要現在時方取境故」——取境必須是現在的心,現在的心正在趨滅,所以它的作用落在滅位。至於增上緣,「於一切位皆無障住」,生位滅位都不遮。
易誤處:把這一頌背成四個時間點的口訣。它其實只有一條原理——作用之位隨果之位而定:果與因同時,作用就在現在;果在未來將生,作用就在生位;緣的工作是讓位,就落在生位;緣的工作是被取,就落在滅位。落地上,這一節是全論談「取果、與果」的樞紐;往後讀業品、賢聖品遇到『取果與果同時不同時』的問答,都要回到這裡。
三、何法由幾緣生:一張最短的檢核表
〔三之一〕三行清單。 頌曰「心心所由四,二定但由三,餘由二緣生」。心心所四緣具足;滅盡定與無想定只有三緣,「除所緣緣,非能緣故」——無心之定不緣境,自然沒有所緣緣;其餘的色法與不相應行只有因緣與增上緣二緣。先問:二定既然無心,為什麼還有等無間緣?因為二定是被入定前那一念心引生的,所以入定心與相應法就是它的等無間緣。但論隨即補上一句極要緊的話:「如是二定,心等引生。礙心等起故,與心等但為等無間,非等無間緣」——二定是心的「等無間法」,卻不是心的「等無間緣」。
易誤處:把這兩個名字看成一個。二定由心引生,所以它接在心後(是等無間法);但它的職能是擋住心不讓心起,一個擋路的東西不能反過來作讓位之緣。眾賢在《順正理》中就這一點特別追問「二定何緣是心等無間,而不說是心等無間緣」,並答以「與心等起定相違害,故」——本論此處只給結論,眾賢把所以然補足了。落地上:這一條是入定與出定之心如何接續的關鍵,往後定品全靠它。
〔三之二〕四緣之學的用處在哪裡。 這張表看似瑣碎,其實是把前面所立的四緣拿去逐類驗算:心具四、二定具三、餘法具二。凡立一套法數,必須能回頭對一切法逐項核對而不留例外——這是阿毘達磨的自我檢驗機制。落地上:讀者往後遇到任何一法,可以自己先問『它是心嗎、是無心定嗎、是色或不相應嗎』,答案一出,緣數即定。
四、破一因:三條理路
〔四之一〕論主為何忽然轉身。 頌末一句「非天次等故」,語極簡而含二事。頌疏拆得清楚:「此有兩意:一正非、二立理」——「非天」是所破(自在天等),「次等」是能破之理(次第等)。所破共三家:執大自在天為作者的、執「我」為作者的、執「勝性」為因的。論主先設一總問:憑什麼說不是一因所生?答得極利落——「若一切成許由因者,豈不便捨一切世間由自在等一因生論」:你若承認任何一事的成立要別的因幫忙,你的「一因論」自己就垮了。
〔四之二〕第一理:次第。 「謂諸世間若自在等一因生者,則應一切俱時而生非次第起;現見諸法次第而生,故知定非一因所起。」先問:這一破的力道在哪裡?在於單一而不變的因,推不出有先後的果。對方的救法是加一個「欲」:自在天欲此法今起、彼法後起。論主連追四步:若靠欲,就不是一因了;若說欲有差別,那些差別的欲既然同出於無差別的自在,也該一時俱生;若說差別欲另待他因,那就不是「唯用自在一法為因」;若說所待之因又待他因,則「所待因應無邊際」——而承認無邊際就是承認無始,「不越釋門因緣正理」,繞了一圈回到佛法自己的因緣說。
易誤處:以為論主在證明世界沒有創造者。他破的是一因——「故無有法唯一因生」。落地上:這一路推理的形式很值得記住:凡主張單一恆常之因者,都要面對『不變之因如何生出變異之果』這一關。
〔四之三〕第二理:無用。 「又彼自在作大功力,生諸世間得何義利?」若說為了發喜,那麼喜若離其餘方便便發不起來,可見他在發喜這件事上還要靠別的——「是則自在於發喜中既必待餘,應非自在」。論主接著寫下全段最重的一句:「或若自在生地獄等無量苦具逼害有情,為見如斯發生自喜。咄哉!何用此自在為?」先問:這句是情緒還是論證?是論證。它逼出對方立場的內在後果:若造苦具只為自娛,則所立之神與「自在」二字自相矛盾。落地上:這一破的方法不是外加價值判斷,而是把對方的設定推到底,讓它自己說出結論。
〔四之四〕第三理:違世間。 「又若信受一切世間唯自在天一因所起,則為誹撥現見世間所餘因緣人功等事。」先問:這算不算訴諸常識?它訴的是現見——種田要人耕、造車要人作,這些是眼前可驗的因緣。對方若說自在天要待人功助發,論主答「但是朋敬自在天言,離所餘因緣不見別用故」——那不過是敬語,不是道理。對方若退守『最初一起以自在為因,其後才待餘因』,論主答:那麼最初所起者不待餘因,「應無始成,猶如自在」。「我」與「勝性」二家,「隨其所應,如自在天應廣徵遣」。末後論主歎息:「奇哉世間不修勝慧,如愚禽獸,良足可悲」——人各自造業、各自受異熟果與士用果,卻要把帳算到別人頭上。落地上:破一因不是為了辯勝,是為了把因果的責任還給造業的人;接著論主便說「且止破邪,應辯正義」,轉身回到法數。
五、一首外道的頌:論主為什麼說「誠為善說」
〔五之一〕頌與它的來歷。 論主在「咄哉!何用此自在為」之後說「依彼頌言,誠為善說」,然後引出四句:「由險利能燒,可畏恒逼害,樂食血肉髓,故名魯達羅。」先問:這首頌是誰的?不是本論的頌——泰疏繫之於「彼事天婆羅門說」,是事奉自在天者自己所誦。所以本卷雖有此頌,卻不入本頌之數,這也是泰疏把本卷正頌數作十二行半的緣故。
〔五之二〕頌裡說的是什麼。 古德把頌中四事一一落到事相上:火箭險利而燒盡三國土,故曰「險利能燒」;以龍貫人髑髏繫於首、殺象取皮帶血反披,故曰「可畏恒逼害」;末句直說所食。至於名字,泰疏記玄奘的口義最直接——「魯達羅者,奘法師言:此云暴惡」;頌疏作「魯達羅者,此云暴惡,自在天有一千名,此是一號」;光記則作「此云瀑惡,大自在天異名。大自在天總有千名,今現行世唯有六十,魯達羅即一名也」。三家所傳的字與數目小異,而訓為暴惡則同。
〔五之三〕排誤:「誠為善說」四個字怎麼讀。 這是本卷最容易讀錯的一句。字面像是論主稱讚外道的頌;但上文剛剛說「咄哉!何用此自在為」,何以立刻轉為稱讚?古德在此分成兩路,本節先說論文自身給出的線索:論主所贊者不是那位天,而是這首頌所描述的形象與他所立的『以他苦自喜』正相稱——你既說他造地獄以自娛,那麼你們自己頌中「恒逼害」「食血肉髓」的形容,正好把這位神說準了。所以「善說」是就描述之準確而言,不是就所描述者之可敬而言。至於這一句究竟是反諷還是順取,四家讀法不同,錄在承衍。落地上:讀論遇到語氣忽然翻轉之處,先回頭看上一句的立場,多半就不會誤判。
六、大種與所造:五個因,卻不是俱有因
〔六之一〕四路對望。 頌曰「大為大二因,為所造五種,造為造三種,為大唯一因」。大種與大種互望,只作俱有因與同類因;大種對所造色,作生、依、立、持、養五因;所造色互望,可作俱有、同類、異熟三因;所造色對大種,唯作異熟因。先問:為何四路的數目全不相同?因為每一路能成立的「因義」不同,論逐一給了理由:所造色互望之中,俱有因限於「隨心轉身語二業,非餘造色」,同類因是「一切前生於後同類」,異熟因是身語業能招「異熟眼根等果」;而所造色對大種只剩異熟因,也正是因為身語二業能招大種之果。
〔六之二〕五因的實義,與最要緊的一句限定。 五因各有取譬:從大種而起故名生因;生已隨逐大種而轉,「如依師等」故名依因;能任持故,「如壁持畫」故名立因;令不斷故名持因;令增長故名養因。合起來即「如是則顯大與所造為起、變、持、住、長因性」。頌疏把五名與五義一一對配:「為起者,是生因也。為變者,是依因也。為持者,是立因也。為任者,是持因也。為長者,是養因也」。
但全節最要緊的是這一句限定:「如是五因,但是能作因之差別。」先問:這句話為什麼重要?因為讀者最自然的誤解,就是把「大種生所造色」讀成大種是所造色的親因(俱有因或同類因)。論在此明言:這五因只是能作因底下的五種分工,屬於「不障礙」那一格,不是六因中的親生之因。易誤處還有一層:五因既名為「生」「養」,聽起來親密無比,卻仍屬疎緣。落地上:這一條保住了前文「因親緣疎」的架構不被打亂——名字可以取得親切,格位不能亂放。
七、十二心:把一切心先數清楚
〔七之一〕怎麼數出十二。 論說「前已總說諸心心所前能為後等無間緣,未決定說何心無間有幾心生」,於是先立一張心的清單。欲界四心:善、不善、有覆無記、無覆無記;色界、無色界各三心,「謂除不善」——上二界沒有不善心;如是十種都是有漏心;無漏心唯二:學與無學。合成十二。
〔七之二〕排誤與落地。 先問:為什麼上二界沒有不善?因為不善心的體是能感惡趣異熟的煩惱相應心,上二界已離欲界之染,此類心在彼不起——這一條是承前品而來的舊義,本卷直接取用。易誤處:把「無覆無記」與「有覆無記」混作一類。二者同屬無記(不感異熟),差別在「覆」——有覆者為煩惱所覆而障聖道,無覆者不障。落地上:十二心是本卷後半一切數字的座標軸;下文所有「生九」「從八生」,數的都是這十二格。泰疏還替讀者做了一個橫向的檢核:「就十二心中,六心命終不受生」——十二格中哪些心可以在命終時現起、哪些可以在結生時現起,是相生表背後的真正機關。
八、十二心相生:一張表,兩個機關
〔八之一〕表怎麼讀。 四行頌把十二心的相生盡數列出:欲界善心生九、從八生;欲界染心從十生、生四;欲界無覆從五生、生七;色界善生十一、從九生;色界有覆從八生、生六;色界無覆從三生、生六;無色界善生九、從六生;無色界有覆生七也從七生;無色界無覆同色界之例;學心從四生、生五;無學心從五生、生四。先問:這些數字是怎麼算出來的?靠兩個機關。
〔八之二〕機關一:入定與出定。 欲界善心能生色界二心,論註明其一是「於入定時」;而它又從色界善心而來,是「於出定時」。這一條把定的進出納入相生表。其中有一段最堪玩味:色界的染心也能生欲界的善心——論說「彼染污定所逼惱時,從彼染心生於下善,為依下善防彼退故」。修定者被染污定所惱,退回下地起善心以自防,這是修行中的實況,論把它算進了法數。
〔八之三〕機關二:結生(續生)。 論一再說「於續生位」。結生的那一念心必是染污,所以三界任何心命終之後都能無間生起欲界染心——這就是「染從十生」的來歷(十二心中除學無學)。反過來,欲界染心只能生自界四心,「餘無生理」,因為染心不能直接躍上定地或他界。
〔八之四〕排誤與落地。 易誤處之一:以為「不能生」是被禁止。不是,是沒有那條路——如欲界善心可生無色界染心(結生時)卻不能生無色界善心,論給的理由是「以極遠故」,並列出四種遠:所依遠、行相遠、所緣遠、對治遠。易誤處之二:把這張表當成記憶題。它其實是一張心的交通圖:哪一念之後可能接哪一念,決定了修行的可能路線與退墮的可能路線。落地上:後文賢聖品講入觀、出觀、退法,全部要回到這張圖上取路。
九、二十心:把善與無記再切細
〔九之一〕為什麼要再切。 「三界善心各分二種,謂加行得、生得別故」——善心有靠功用修來的,也有生來即有的,二者的力用不同,不能同格。欲界無覆無記分為四:異熟生、威儀路、工巧處、通果心;色界除去工巧處,「上界都無造作種種工巧事故」;無色界更少。於是「善分六,無覆分八」,合前學無學二心,成二十。
〔九之二〕四種無覆無記是什麼。 異熟生是酬前業而生的心;威儀路是行住坐臥時所起的心;工巧處是造作技藝時所起的心;通果心是定所引發的變化與神通之心。論交代其所緣:「威儀路等三無覆心,色香味觸為所緣境,工巧處等亦緣於聲,如是三心唯是意識」,而「威儀路、工巧處加行亦通四識五識」;另錄一家異說:有由威儀路、工巧處所引的意識,「能具足緣十二處境」。
〔九之三〕相生為何忽然變複雜。 二十心的相生表比十二心繁得多,因為加行善與生得善分了家,通果心又只與定心相出入。最能說明問題的是那一組問答:加行善心無間能生異熟、工巧、威儀三無記,那三者卻不能無間生加行善心。理由是「勢力劣故,非作功用所引發故」;而反過來加行善心可以生它們,是因為「出心不由功用轉故」。緊接著又是一個排誤:既然如此,染污心與加行善心更不相順,何以染污無間能生加行善?論答:「雖爾,厭倦煩惱現行,為欲了知容起加行」——厭倦煩惱的那一刻,正是起加行的機會。落地上:這幾句是本卷少見的直接關涉修行的文字——功用心接得住不由功用之心,而不由功用之心接不住功用心;煩惱現行之際反而可以起觀。泰疏於此也做了與前段對稱的檢核:「二十心中八心命終不受生」。
〔九之四〕三種作意與聖道的出入。 論在二十心之末插入作意三種:自相作意(觀色以變礙為相,乃至觀識以了別為相)、共相作意(十六行相相應的作意)、勝解作意(不淨觀、四無量、有色解脫、勝處、遍處等)。三種作意無間都能引聖道現前,聖道無間也能起三種——如此則順於經說「不淨觀俱行修念等覺分」。另有二家:一家說唯共相作意能入聖道而聖道能出三種,一家說出入唯共相。論主為第三家設難:若依第二、三、四靜慮入正性離生,聖道無間能起哪一地的共相作意?欲界的太遠,自地未曾得的共相作意其實就是聖道,順決擇分又不可能得果後重起。若說另有一種與順決擇分同時已修、繫屬於彼的共相作意可被引起,「毘婆沙師不許此義,違正理故」。末後論還列出得阿羅漢果後出觀心的地:依未至定得果者,出觀心或即彼地或是欲界;依無所有處得果者,或即彼地或是有頂;依餘地得果者唯自地。並列三界作意之數:欲界三(聞所成、思所成、生所得),色界三(聞、修、生得,無思所成,「舉心思時即入定故」),無色界二(修、生得);八種之中「五種作意無間聖道現前,除生所得」,而聖道無間也能生欲界生得作意,「以明利故」。
先問:這一大段為什麼要放在二十心裡?因為作意正是心的分位之一,而聖道的出入即是心與心的相生——這一段其實是相生表在修道上的兌現。落地上:讀者若把它與前段的相生表對讀,便會看出本卷後半的真正主題是『一念心的來路與去路』。
十、現前得心:一念之中,會「得」到什麼
〔十之一〕「得」是什麼意思。 頌曰「三界染心中,得六六二種,色善三學四,餘皆自可得」。論釋得心之義只用一句:「彼先不成今得成故」——先前不成就,如今成就了,這叫「得」。先問:現起一心,怎麼會連帶得到別的心?因為「成就」與「現起」是兩件事:一個人可以成就某心而此刻不起它。當某些關節被跨過時(結生、入定、離染、退、續善),一整批心的成就狀態會同時改變。
〔十之二〕逐位算數。 欲界染心現前時得六:由疑心續善根、或從上界退還而得欲界善心;由起惑退與界退還而得欲界不善、有覆二心並色界一有覆心;由起惑退得無色界一有覆心並學心。色界染心現前時亦得六:由界退還得欲界一無覆與色界三心,色界染心自身亦由退而得;由起惑退得無色界一有覆並學心。無色界染心現前時唯得二:由起惑退得彼染心及學心。色界善心現前時得三:彼善心與欲色二界無覆無記,「由昇進故」。有學心現前時得四:有學心與欲色二界無覆無記並無色界善心,由初證入正性離生及由聖道離欲色染。其餘諸心現前時「唯自可得」。
〔十之三〕排誤與落地。 易誤處:把「退」讀成失敗的意外。在這張表裡,退與昇進是對稱的兩個機關——昇進使人得上地之心,退使人重新得回下地之心;得心之數的多寡,正記錄著一個人在三界階梯上移動了多遠。落地上:這一節把前面兩張相生表從『能不能接』推進到『接了之後成就狀態如何變』,是本卷最後一層。讀者若問阿毘達磨為何要算得這樣細,答案就在這裡——修行的進退是可以逐格記帳的。
十一、他家的一頌,與論主的補正
〔十一之一〕引頌。 論說「有餘於此總說」,引出一頌:「慧者說染心,現起時得九,善心中得六,無記唯無記。」先問:這一頌與本論前文的數目為何不同?前文三界染心分別得六、六、二,合為十四;此頌只說九。差別在算法:本論是逐界分算而容許重複計數,那一頌則除去重複而只算單數。同理善心,本論分算為七(色善三、學四),彼頌合為六。
〔十一之二〕論主的補正。 論主接著說「於善心中應言得七」,並逐一列出七個關節:由正見續善根時得欲界善心;離欲界染究竟位頓得欲色二界無覆無記;得色無色三摩地時得彼二善心;初入離生位與證阿羅漢時得學、無學心。先問:論主為何要補這一心?因為那一頌漏了「正見續善」這一位——一個斷善根的人重新續起善根,正是「先不成今得成」的典型,不該不算。
〔十一之三〕排誤與落地。 易誤處:以為論主在指摘他家錯了。論主的用語是「應言得七」,是補足而非推翻;同一組事實在不同算法下得出不同的數,本來就不相違。至於這一頌出於何家、以及眾賢如何為它辯護,錄在承衍。落地上:本論常引他家之頌而後補正,這是它『收攝而後抉擇』的體例——讀者遇到論中忽然出現一首不合前文數目的頌,第一步不是判對錯,而是先問『兩邊的算法是不是同一種』。
十二、五門攝義:一頌收全卷之末
〔十二之一〕頌與五門。 「為攝前義,復說頌言」:「由託生入定,及離染退時,續善位得心,非先所成故。」五門即託生(結生)、入定、離染、退、續善——凡「得心」,不出這五個時位;而所以稱為得,只因「非先所成」。
〔十二之二〕這一頌的作用。 先問:前文已逐位算過,何必再來一頌?因為前文是逐心而算(某心現前得幾心),這一頌是逐門而收(得心不出五門)。同一批事實,換一個軸重排一次,讀者才能記得住、用得上。易誤處:把它當作重複而跳過。它是本卷唯一的一張總表。
〔十二之三〕落到全卷。 回頭看,本卷從「廣說因已。緣復云何」起,先立四緣之體,次定四緣之用,再核諸法之緣數,中間破一因之執以護因緣正理,末後以八行頌把等無間緣落實成一張心的交通圖,並以五門收之。四緣之中,其餘三緣管的是『憑什麼生』,唯獨等無間緣管的是『接在誰後面生』——而修行所爭的,恰恰就是下一念心接在哪裡。本卷之所以把八行頌都給了心,理由在此。
承衍:四疏之鏡
以上是本卷論文自身之義。此下另立一節,收四事:古德之判釋與四疏互異、眾賢之反破、真諦舊譯之異、可對讀之座標。鏡非論,只是換一種讀法看同一段文;並錄不判,各還其位。
一、四疏互異之處
四緣的四個譬喻。 三疏皆引婆沙為四緣配喻。寶疏所引作「因緣者,如種子法。等無間緣者,如開避法。所緣緣者,如任杖法。增上緣者,如不障礙法」;光記同引而文小異,作「因者,如種子法。等無間者,如開避法。所緣者,如任杖法。增上者,如不障礙法」。寶疏又於引後加一句自出的簡別:「准此四義攝法不盡。如有力能作,非唯不障」——四喻雖巧,仍不能盡攝諸法之相。此四喻是古德所傳,非論文所有。
「等」字究竟屬誰。 頌疏出三解:或前後心心所體各一故名等,或前心心所齊等與後為緣,或後心心所等用前為緣而「此等字通緣及果」。光記出六解,並補一路「等通前後兩處」,末後斷定四緣之名「並不得作有財釋」,唯持業、依主二釋可通。眾賢於《順正理》中另出數釋,泰疏總其數為五,並判「此五釋中,前三及第五是薩婆多」——是以五釋分屬二宗。四家解數不同而所爭者一:「等」是說緣,還是說果。並錄不判。
因與緣的分際。 寶疏取「親疎」為綱:「因是親稱、緣是疎名」;光記則取「約體」與「據用相似」二門,先引婆沙二說(因緣互攝/緣攝因而因不攝緣)而斷「此論同《婆沙》後說」,再以體用二門通之。二疏取徑不同,所解之論文則一。至於生等五因究竟屬因緣攝或增上緣攝,光記兩存其解而以前解為正——此為光記之判,論文本身未判。
「誠為善說」是反諷還是順取。 此為本卷四疏分歧最顯處。光記讀為反語,直下斷曰「論主調弄彼外道也」,並謂外道說此頌的本意在顯自在天「教化眾生種種變現」,論主是借他的話反刺。泰疏則讀為順取:「今論主云:生地獄等苦,發生自喜。故知彼頌亦是報身天事,成為善說」——彼頌所頌本是化身天,而論主所舉的是報身天之事,二相既合,故曰善說。頌疏但釋事相與名義,不判其為調弄或順取。並錄不判。
自在天三身之說。 泰疏記「彼事天婆羅門說自在天有三身」,一法身遍周法界、二報身居自在天宮為大梵王或摩醯首羅天王、三化身在世間護國土;光記亦作三身而第二作受用身,並記其相為「即佛法中說摩醯首羅天,三目八臂」;頌疏作法身、報身、化身。三家所傳大同而配屬小異。
魯達羅之訓與其名數。 泰疏記玄奘口義「魯達羅者,奘法師言:此云暴惡」;頌疏作「自在天有一千名,此是一號」;光記則作「此云瀑惡」,並記「大自在天總有千名,今現行世唯有六十」。字與數之異,並錄不判。泰疏又於同處記真諦之說:「真諦師云:有三阿脩羅,將三國土飛行空中,從摩醯首羅天上過」——是則此段事相之傳,泰疏兼存奘、諦二家。
大種五因之總結一字。 論文作「起、變、持、住、長」,而頌疏所牒之論文作「起變持任長」,並依之配名「為任者,是持因也」。一字之異,繫於所傳之本,唯錄不判。
末後引頌出於何家。 頌疏判為「此是論主引雜心師頌,明得心多少也」;光記同軌,作「此即論主敘雜心師說染心得九」,並進而斥之曰「雜心論師不說前一正見續善,但言得六,太少過也」。泰疏則別為一說:「餘說有十一。心師總說此頌,雜心論主以此頌頌十二心」——是以「有餘」為主張心有十一之師(學無學合為一無漏心),雜心論主乃以此頌配十二心者。三說並錄,不判。
光記之自標存疑。 於威儀路等三心之成就,光記會通本論與識身足論之異而備數解,末後自云「仍冀高明詳茲拙見」——古德於未安處明標存疑,此亦體例,據實錄。
二、眾賢之反破與補釋
眾賢於《順正理》中稱世親為「經主」。本卷相應段中明標經主者唯二,餘為正面立宗,並錄如下。
其一,緣性之訓。眾賢補云「此中緣性即是四緣,如四所居即所居性,為顯種類故說性言」——所對即論文「此中性者是緣種類」。此為補釋而非破。
其二,因相之增列。眾賢於四緣之前先列因相二二相對凡六重(生因與了因、定因與不定因、共因與不共因、近因與遠因、前生因與俱起因、自他相續因與非有情數因),並自造一頌收之:「無少成立不由因,一切由因佛所說;諸法因多細難了,世迷便謂總無因」。此為眾賢所增,本論無。
其三,破上座之舊隨界,並及經主之種子。眾賢記上座之說:「然上座言因緣性者,謂舊隨界,即諸有情相續展轉能為因性」,隨即破云「此亦同前經主所執種子義破,此舊隨界即彼種子名差別故」——是眾賢逕以上座之舊隨界與經主之種子判為一義而並破。此條是本卷系內對辯最密之處,其正破在後品,此錄其所在。
其四,未來前後之詰。眾賢曰「若執未來有定前後,如世第一於苦忍等,彼據何緣說定前後」——與本論「以未來法雜亂而住無前後故」同其結論而立論之路不同。
其五,二定何以非緣。眾賢設問「二定何緣是心等無間,而不說是心等無間緣」,答以由心力所引生、與心等起相違害;本論此處止言結論,眾賢廣其所以。
其六,破自在天段之開合。二本三理相同,而至極破之處,本論作「咄哉!何用此自在為」而下引外道之頌,眾賢則不引彼頌,逕作「咄哉何用事斯暴惡自在天為」——「暴惡」二字即泰疏所記玄奘於「魯達羅」之訓。二本開合之異,並錄不判。
其七,得心之數。眾賢為那一頌辯護:「如經主難,應言得七,然學無學同無漏故總說一心,言六無失」——學無學同是無漏,合說一心,故言得六不算失。寶疏引其文而不加斷語。此為一義二宗並錄,勝負不判。
附《顯宗論》之因緣八別。 《顯宗論》先立「六因四緣體雖無別而義有異」,下出八重分別:「因謂能生,緣能長養,猶如生養二母差別」;因一而緣多,如種子與糞土;「又因不共,共者是緣,如眼如色」;作自事名因、作他事名緣;能引起名因、能任持名緣,如花如蔕;「又近名因,遠者名緣,如珠如日」;能生名因、能辦名緣,如酪出生酥;正有義名因、能助顯發名緣,如字界與字緣。此八重是眾賢一系之整理,非本論之文,故居此節;寶疏於此亦全引顯宗之文,字同而句讀小異。
三、真諦舊譯之異
真諦《俱舍釋論》於本卷相應段譯名自成一系。四緣之名,諦本作因緣類、次第緣類、緣緣類、增上緣類——今之「等無間緣」,彼作「次第緣」,而彼本又以「等無間」釋「次第」之名,是以奘之譯名為彼之訓詁。六因之中,能作因彼作隨造因、異熟因彼作果報因;無表色彼作無教色、無漏彼作無流、尋伺彼作覺觀。二十心中,通果心彼作變化心(同段下文亦用通果心,二名互用)、異熟生彼作果報生心。修道諸名,作意彼作思惟、共相作意彼作通相思惟、勝解作意彼作欲樂思惟、正性離生彼作正定聚、未至定彼作非至定、續善根彼作接善根。
開合亦有異。「性」與「類」二字,奘作「此中性者是緣種類」,諦作「此中類者,是緣自性」,位置適反。色不立等無間之譬,諦本於諾瞿陀樹之前多出「貝多核中人」一節。破一因所引之頌,奘存音寫而作「故名魯達羅」,諦則兼義譯與音寫作「令啼稱律他」;奘之「頌」字,諦作音寫「首盧柯」。大種五因之總結,奘作「起、變、持、住、長」,諦作「生、變異、持、住、長」。末後攝義之五門,奘作託生、入定、離染、退、續善,諦作託生、入觀、離欲、退定、接善。
卷界亦異:玄奘於根品分五(之一至之五),真諦只分四;本卷全落真諦「分別根品之四」之後段,而真諦以「分別四緣義究竟」結其卷第五——收界與玄奘卷七之終同處,且彼本逕以「分別四緣義」名此一段,與本卷之題正相當。異譯之取捨屬譯者之事,此節唯並錄不判。
四、可對讀之座標
本卷所立者,是心與心相續的全譜,也是四緣之名的第一張定義表。四緣之名為後世法相之學所承用,而所配之體不同——本論以六因中之五因為因緣體,後世則繫之於種子與現行,一名兩系,可以對讀。等無間緣「唯心心所」而「色等皆不可立等無間緣」之制,於立多識並行之後如何安放,是一處必經之關。眾賢在本卷中逕以上座之舊隨界與經主之種子並判為一義而破,則本論主所懷之種子義,其對辯的明文即在此段,是經部種子一路可以繫錨之處。大種對所造色之五因「但是能作因之差別」一句,與後世色法之開合亦可對讀。至於十二心開為二十心的分位圖——三界各分善、不善、有覆無記、無覆無記,無覆再開異熟生、威儀路、工巧處、通果——則是心分位之學的底圖。此節唯列可對讀之座標,關係之定性不在此節。
Before reading this fascicle
This fascicle opens with only eight characters — “The causes have been stated at length. And what of conditions?” The previous fascicle finished the six causes and five results, and the author at once presses a further question: since causes have been stated to the end, what then are conditions? A first-time reader will feel the question superfluous: are cause and condition not the same thing? It is precisely this question that opens the finest piece of workmanship in the whole of Abhidharma.
Shentai’s Commentary, at the very head of the fascicle, counts its stanzas for us: “Below there are twelve and a half lines of stanzas analyzing the four conditions, and within them three parts.” A five-character stanza-line of twenty characters makes one line, so twelve and a half lines are two hundred fifty characters — and the eight root-stanza blocks of this fascicle come to exactly that. The “half line,” then, is not an odd remainder but the half-stanza carried over from the previous fascicle: the latter half of that fascicle’s closing stanza falls exactly on the joint where causes end and conditions begin, and in dividing the fascicles Xuanzang gave up the stanza boundary and followed the doctrinal one, so that this half-stanza became the opening of the present fascicle. To read this fascicle is to pick up from that joint.
Shentai’s Commentary further divides the twelve and a half lines into five parts: a line and a half establishing the entities of the four conditions, one line setting out the times at which the four conditions operate, one line setting out how many conditions each class of dharma arises from, one line setting out how the great elements and derived form are causes for one another, and finally “from here the fifth part has eight lines of stanzas setting out at length the sense of mind, taking up the immediately antecedent condition once more” — eight lines of stanzas given entirely to mind. The proportion is itself a hint: of the four conditions, the one the author cares most about is the immediately antecedent condition; and once that condition is treated in depth, the whole register of which minds can follow a given moment of mind must be spread out, whence the three sections on the twelve minds, the twenty minds, and how many minds are acquired. The four conditions are the net-cord; mind is the field.
One more thing should be said in advance: the middle of this fascicle contains a rare passage refuting the non-Buddhists. Abhidharma habitually takes stock of its own enumeration of dharmas and seldom engages an outside party; but when the discussion reaches how many conditions each dharma arises from, the author suddenly turns and devotes a whole passage to refuting the doctrine that all the world arises from the single cause Īśvara, quoting a stanza of the non-Buddhists’ own. This passage is a rare piece of doctrinal defense in the whole treatise, and it is taught through section by section below.
I. The Four Conditions: Why Four, and What Each Governs
〔1.1〕The four conditions are not the author’s invention. The treatise’s first words ask, “Where is this stated?”, and answer, “In a sūtra” — the four conditions are stated in scripture, and the treatise only puts them in order. This step is not to be skipped: it is the rule of Abhidharma that whenever an enumeration of dharmas is established its provenance must be stated first, and that where the provenance is scripture the name may not be altered. Scripture has “the nature of the four conditions,” and the treatise at once explains that word “nature”: “nature here means the class of a condition” — “nature” is here no kind of essence but merely “this class.” The easy error lies exactly here: readers often read “the nature of causal condition” as “the intrinsic being of a causal condition,” whereupon the four conditions turn into four things; in fact it means “the class of causal condition.” In the Treatise Conforming to Correct Principle Saṅghabhadra says it more plainly still: “the nature of a condition here is just the four conditions; as ‘four dwellings’ is the same as ‘the nature of a dwelling,’ the word ‘nature’ is used in order to display the class” — like saying “four dwellings” and “dwellings as a class,” with no extra thing added. In terms of reading: the four conditions are four classifications, not four real objects. Keep this in mind and such statements below as “all dharmas are object conditions” and “all dharmas are dominant conditions” will not alarm.
〔1.2〕The causal condition: the six causes minus one. “Within the six causes, excluding the enabling cause, the remaining five causes are the nature of the causal condition” — coexistent, homogeneous, associated, all-pervading, and maturation, five causes together, make up the causal condition, while the enabling cause alone is taken out and matched instead to the dominant condition. First ask: why should it be the enabling cause that is dropped? Because the enabling cause is defined by not obstructing, and its range is wide enough to gather in every dharma; a cause so wide as to leave nothing out has no discriminating force if left in the square marked “producing intimately.” So the treatise moves it over to serve as the dominant condition, leaving the causal condition to the five causes that intimately produce. The easy error is to take the six causes and the four conditions as two unrelated lists and to memorize both by rote. In fact they are two ways of cutting one and the same set of operations. Fabao’s Commentary states the relation with the least effort: “cause is the name for what is intimate, condition the name for what is remote,” and again, “among the six causes five are intimate and so share the name of the intimate; among the four conditions three are remote and so share the name of the remote” — five intimate and one remote among the six causes, three remote and one intimate among the four conditions, the intimate and the remote crossing over, and hence two sets of names. In practice, whenever a later question asks how many causes and how many conditions a given dharma arises from, set the words intimate and remote in mind first and the numbers will not go astray.
〔1.3〕The immediately antecedent condition: why only mind can serve as it. The definition is: all already arisen mind and mental factors, “excluding the last mind and mental factors of an arhat about to enter nirvāṇa.” The name comes from “this condition produces dharmas that are equal and without interval, and the name immediately antecedent is established on this sense” — what it produces is “equal” before and after, with no interval between, and hence the name. First ask: why can form not serve? The treatise answers with great skill: form arises unequally. In one and the same moment nonmanifest form of the desire realm may be present together with nonmanifest form of the form realm, and nonmanifest form of the desire realm together with nonmanifest form without outflows — “since forms become present mixed together, while what the immediately antecedent condition produces is without mixture.” Forms can stand side by side; mind cannot: one moment has one feeling and one perception, and one feeling does not produce two feelings. This is the real sense of the word “equal.”
The treatise also records the additions of two ancient masters. Vasumitra says that within one and the same body a portion of nourished form continues unbroken while a second portion of nourished form arises, and the two “do not injure or contradict each other” — where things can coexist there is no question of handing over a place. The Venerable Dharmatrāta says instead that form is indeterminate in quantity before and after, and gives two symmetrical similes: burning a great heap of rice straw yields only a small heap of ash, which is many producing few; a single fine seed grows into a banyan tree, whose “root, trunk, branches, and leaves increase and flourish by degrees, the tall trunk letting fall its boughs and casting shade far and wide,” which is few producing many. The easy error is to read these two similes as the author discussing plants and fire. They are proving one thing — that the quantity of form has no guarantee of equality, and that form therefore cannot be established as an immediately antecedent condition.
The author then sets himself a difficulty: do not mental factors too vary in number? A wholesome mind and an unwholesome mind have different numbers of mental factors. The answer distinguishes finely: that variation obtains only between different kinds, and “within one’s own kind there is no absence of the sense of equality” — one feeling never produces many feelings. Pressing further: is it then only a preceding dharma of one’s own kind that serves as condition for the later? The treatise answers, “It is not so,” and gives the correct account: “the dharmas of the preceding class of mind as a whole are the immediately antecedent condition of the following class, and not only what is of their own kind” — a whole class of mind hands over its place to the next class of mind; it is not feeling handing over to feeling and perception to perception. In practice: the immediately antecedent condition speaks of the handing over of a place, not of succession within a kind; and reading it as “continuity within a kind” is precisely the position the author refutes in the next passage.
〔1.4〕Where those who admit only one’s own kind go wrong. There is a class of people who hold that only what is of one’s own kind can be an immediately antecedent condition, that “mind produces only mind and feeling produces only feeling.” The price they pay is this: when a defiled mind arises immediately after an undefiled mind, the affliction within that defiled mind has to take “the affliction that ceased earlier” as its immediately antecedent condition — a stretch of the undefiled lies in between, and they must still force the connection back to the same kind. They also adduce the absorption of cessation as an example, saying that the mind emerging from it takes as its condition the mind that preceded entry. The author refutes them in one sentence: “their statement is not good, for the first mind without outflows would then have to arise lacking this condition.” First ask: why is this refutation fatal? Because before the first arisen mind without outflows there simply is no mind without outflows of the same kind to connect with; and if only one’s own kind can serve as condition, that moment arises while lacking one of the four conditions — whereas that mind and mental factors are definitely produced by four conditions is a tenet they themselves grant. The easy error is to suppose that the author here denies the account of the mind emerging from the absorption of cessation connecting to the mind before entry. He does not. That model the author himself uses (see the fourfold analysis below); he only refuses to let it be generalized into “only one’s own kind.” In practice: this is a mode of refutation common throughout the treatise — he does not refute your example, he refutes your taking the example for a general rule.
〔1.5〕Why there is no immediately antecedent condition in the future, and how the Buddha nonetheless knows the future. Someone asks: why is an immediately antecedent condition not allowed in the future time-period? The treatise answers, “because future dharmas abide mixed together and have no before and after” — future dharmas have not yet formed a queue, and where there is no before and after there is no question of which succeeds which. This answer at once raises a larger question: since the future has no before and after, how does the Buddha know that “this dharma will be immediately followed by that dharma which is to arise”? Here the treatise records three views and then adopts one. The first is “because he knows the present by comparison with past and present dharmas,” the Buddha comparing the causal sequences of past and present and so seeing the future manifestly, with the added remark that “this is included in the knowledge of aspiration and is not inferential knowledge”; the author objects that if so, “since the World-Honored One has not seen the prior limit, he ought to be unable to know dharmas of the later limit.” The second is that within the continuum of a sentient being there is a “prior sign of the cause” of the future result, belonging to the differentiations of the aggregate of formations not associated with mind, and that the Buddha knows simply by observing this sign, “without needing to range through the meditative absorptions and the supernormal knowledges at the moment”; the author objects that this makes it “knowing by reading signs in the future, and not direct realization.” The third is the Sautrāntika view: “the World-Honored One, on directing his intention, knows all dharmas everywhere, neither by inference nor by reading signs,” and the author judges, “this statement is good,” closing with the World-Honored One’s own words — the domain of the Buddhas is inconceivable.
First ask: why does this passage stand in the chapter on the four conditions? Because it is in fact defending the line that the future has no before and after. If it were granted that the Buddha relies on inference or on reading signs, the future would have to be queued up in advance, the immediately antecedent condition would reach into the future, and the definition just given would collapse. The easy error is to read the three views as a dispute in Buddhist epistemology. They are advanced in order to preserve a boundary line in the enumeration of dharmas. In practice: a reader of Abhidharma must get used to this manner of writing — an apparently theological incidental discussion is often there to keep some definition from leaking.
〔1.6〕The arhat’s last moment of mind: it is “mind-faculty,” yet not a “condition.” The treatise asks: why are the last mind and mental factors of an arhat not an immediately antecedent condition? The answer: “because no further mind and the rest continue on from them” — there is no mind after them to connect. The objector at once asks in return: every mind that has ceased without interval is named “mind-faculty” (as the support of the subsequent consciousness), and since no consciousness arises after the last mind, ought it not to lose even the name of mind-faculty? The treatise’s division is beautifully made: “mind-faculty is displayed by way of support and not by way of operation,” whereas the immediately antecedent condition is “displayed by way of operation.” Mind-faculty is named with respect to being available as a support, and the last mind still qualifies as available for support; it is only that the remaining assisting conditions are lacking, and so no subsequent consciousness arises. The immediately antecedent condition, by contrast, is named with respect to actually having performed the handing over of a place, and of any dharma taken as a result by this condition, “there are definitely no dharmas and no sentient beings that can obstruct it so as to keep it from arising” — once a result is taken it must arise, with no exception. Hence “the last mind, though it obtains the name of mind-faculty, may not be called an immediately antecedent condition.”
First ask: what is the use of this distinction over a single word? It separates qualification from efficacy. The easy error is to take “mind-faculty” and “immediately antecedent condition” as two names for one and the same thing — the treatise does often say that a mind ceased without interval is named mind-faculty, and one slips past it easily. In practice: whenever two names later appear to designate one thing, first ask whether the one is established with respect to support or with respect to operation, and the knot will usually come undone.
〔1.7〕Two fourfold analyses: prying apart “immediately antecedent” and “without interval.” The treatise sets two questions, each answered in four alternatives. First question: is whatever is an immediately antecedent result of mind also something that arises directly after mind? The first alternative is the former without the latter: the mind and mental factors on emerging from a mindless absorption, and the moments of the two absorptions from the second moment onward — these are immediately antecedent results of mind, yet do not arise directly after mind. The second alternative is the latter without the former: the four marks of arising, abiding, change, and cessation belonging to the first arisen moment of the two absorptions, and the four marks of arising, abiding, change, and cessation belonging to mind and mental factors in a state possessed of mind — these arise directly after mind, yet are not results of mind. The third alternative is both, the fourth neither. The second question substitutes “directly after a mindless absorption,” and its answer merely transposes the four alternatives — “the third and fourth alternatives above become the first and second here.”
First ask: what is all this circling for? To force out a conclusion: “immediately antecedent” is the name of a result, and “without interval” is the name of a position, and the two may come apart. Hence the treatise adds a question at the end: when the mind emerging from the two absorptions looks back to the mind before entry, so long a stretch lies between — how can it still count as without interval? The answer: “because no mind or mental factor intervenes” — if what intervenes is not mind, it does not count as an interval. The easy error is to read “without interval” as immediate succession in time. It is immediate succession in the sequence of minds, and the time may stretch very long. In practice: this settles the point on which later readers most often stick — that when one emerges from the absorption without perception after five hundred aeons, the immediately antecedent condition of that moment of mind is still the mind before entry.
〔1.8〕The object condition: it remains an object even when it is not being taken as one. The definition is: “the nature of the object condition is all dharmas with respect to mind and mental factors, each as applicable” — visual consciousness and its associated dharmas take all visible form as object condition, and so on up to mental consciousness and its associated dharmas taking all dharmas as object condition. The real teaching lies in the sentence that follows: “if a dharma is an object for that dharma, there is no time at which this is not an object for that” — even at a time and place where it is not being taken as an object, it still counts as included among objects, because “being taken as object and not being taken as object, its character is one”; and a simile is set: “as firewood and the like, even when not being burned, are still called what is burned, since their character is not different.”
First ask: what sort of reasoning is this? Firewood is called what is burned even when unburnt, because being burnable belongs to its character and not to the presence of fire. In the same way, being available as an object is the character of the dharma itself and is not lost merely because at this moment nobody is taking it as object. The easy error is to suppose that an object condition is established only when a mind comes to take it — which would make the condition something manufactured by mind. The treatise also notes in passing that an object is “determinate in all three respects, place, entity, and moment,” and asks whether the support, the faculty, is likewise, answering that it is, save that only in the present time-period does it “intimately adhere to its own support” while past and future are separated from it; and it preserves another view that “in the past too it intimately adheres to its support.” Yuanhui’s Verse Commentary fits this section with an excellent simile: “mind and mental factors are feeble in nature and arise only by grasping an object, like a feeble man who cannot rise without a staff” — mind is the feeble man, the object is the staff, and without the staff he cannot stand. In practice: the object condition is not an appendage of mind but the support by which mind is able to arise; and this sentence will be weighed again and again in Yogācāra later on.
〔1.9〕The dominant condition: the widest square of the four. “The nature of the dominant condition is just the enabling cause,” and its entity is the widest, since every dharma is a dominant condition. The objector at once seizes the handle: since the object condition too is every dharma, on what ground is the dominant condition said to be uniquely wide? The treatise answers along two routes. One is to give a counter-example: those dharmas that arise together with this moment of mind “have never been its object” — companions in the same moment cannot become one’s own object, yet they are still dominant conditions, which shows that the range of the dominant condition really is greater. The other is to shift the angle: “or, because what it does is broad, it is named the dominant condition” — every dharma, each excluding its own intrinsic nature, can be a dominant condition for every conditioned dharma, and this is said with respect to the breadth of what it does.
First ask: which route is the correct account? The treatise preserves both without adjudicating, and this is precisely its rule. The easy error is to read “dominant” as reinforcing. Its real sense is not obstructing — it does nothing at all, only keeps out of the way; and just because the qualification of keeping out of the way is the easiest to satisfy, its range is the widest. At the end the treatise sets a closing question: is there any dharma that serves as none of the four conditions whatever for some dharma? There is — “an intrinsic nature with respect to itself,” which serves as not one condition for itself; and there is also the case of another nature, namely the conditioned with respect to the unconditioned, and the unconditioned with respect to the unconditioned. In practice: this question seals off the chapter on the four conditions. It tells the reader that wide as the four conditions are, they still have a boundary; the unconditioned does not arise, and so receives no condition at all.
II. On Which Moment the Operation Falls: The Moment of Ceasing and the Moment of Arising
〔2.1〕They are causes alike, yet they act at different times. The stanza says, “Two causes at the moment of ceasing, three causes at the moment of arising; the other two conditions, contrariwise, exercise their operation.” Among the five causes, the coexistent and associated causes operate “at the moment of ceasing,” and “the words ‘the moment of ceasing’ display the dharma as present, since its ceasing is before us, and hence the moment of ceasing”; the three causes homogeneous, all-pervading, and maturation operate “at the moment of arising,” that is, a future dharma “at the stage of imminent arising, because its arising is before us.” First ask: ought not a cause to operate when it produces its result — how can a cause act at the moment of ceasing? The key is that what these two causes produce is a simultaneous result: coexistent and associated causes are in the very same moment as their result, and result and cause are present together and tend toward ceasing together, so it is said that they “exercise their operation at the stage of the dharma’s ceasing” — not that the cause first ceases and then produces the result, but that their operation is displayed only in this present moment. Conversely, what the three causes homogeneous, all-pervading, and maturation produce is a later result, the result still standing in the future at the stage of being about to arise, so that the cause’s drawing force falls upon that “about to arise.”
〔2.2〕Why the two conditions are the reverse. The treatise says, “the operation of the two conditions is contrary to this.” The immediately antecedent condition operates “at the stage of a dharma’s arising,” “because at the time it arises the preceding mind and mental factors have given it their place” — its work is to yield a place, and the moment the place is yielded is precisely the moment the new dharma arises. The object condition operates “at the stage of the ceasing of what takes it,” “because mind and mental factors must be present in order to grasp an object” — grasping an object requires a present mind, and a present mind is just then tending toward ceasing, so its operation falls at the stage of ceasing. As for the dominant condition, “at every stage it abides without obstructing,” barring nothing at either the stage of arising or the stage of ceasing.
The easy error is to memorize this stanza as a formula of four points in time. It has in fact only one principle — the position of the operation is fixed by the position of the result: where the result is simultaneous with the cause, the operation is in the present; where the result lies in the future about to arise, the operation is at the stage of arising; where the condition’s work is to yield a place, it falls at the stage of arising; where the condition’s work is to be grasped, it falls at the stage of ceasing. In practice, this section is the pivot of everything the treatise says about taking and giving a result; whenever the chapters on action and on the noble persons later raise questions about whether taking and giving a result are simultaneous, one must come back here.
III. From How Many Conditions Each Dharma Arises: The Shortest Checklist
〔3.1〕A list of three lines. The stanza says, “Mind and mental factors from four, the two absorptions from three only, the rest arise from two conditions.” Mind and mental factors have all four conditions; the absorption of cessation and the absorption without perception have only three, “excluding the object condition, since they do not take an object” — a mindless absorption does not take an object, and so naturally has no object condition; the remaining forms and formations not associated with mind have only two, the causal condition and the dominant condition. First ask: since the two absorptions are mindless, why do they still have an immediately antecedent condition? Because the two absorptions are drawn forth by the moment of mind before entry, and so that mind of entry together with its associated dharmas is their immediately antecedent condition. But the treatise at once adds a sentence of the first importance: “these two absorptions are drawn forth by mind and the rest; because they obstruct the arising of mind and the rest, they are for mind and the rest merely immediately antecedent, and not an immediately antecedent condition” — the two absorptions are “immediately antecedent dharmas” of mind, but not the “immediately antecedent condition” of mind.
The easy error is to take these two names for one. The two absorptions are drawn forth by mind, and so they follow directly after mind (they are immediately antecedent dharmas); but their function is to block mind from arising, and something that blocks the road cannot conversely serve as the condition that yields a place. In the Treatise Conforming to Correct Principle Saṅghabhadra presses precisely this point — “on what ground are the two absorptions immediately antecedent to mind and yet not said to be the immediately antecedent condition of mind?” — and answers that “they are injuriously contrary to the arising of mind and the rest.” Here the treatise gives only the conclusion, and Saṅghabhadra supplies the reason. In practice: this is the key to how the minds of entering and emerging from absorption are joined, and the whole chapter on absorption later rests upon it.
〔3.2〕What the study of the four conditions is good for. This table looks fussy, but it is in fact taking the four conditions established above and checking them class by class: mind has four, the two absorptions three, the rest two. Whenever an enumeration of dharmas is set up, one must be able to turn back and verify it item by item against all dharmas with no exception left over — this is Abhidharma’s mechanism of self-verification. In practice: on meeting any dharma hereafter, the reader can first ask, “is it mind, is it a mindless absorption, is it form or a formation not associated with mind?”, and once the answer is out, the number of conditions is fixed.
IV. Refuting the Single Cause: Three Lines of Reasoning
〔4.1〕Why the author suddenly turns. The last line of the stanza, “not from a god, because of sequence and the rest,” is extremely terse and contains two things. Yuanhui’s Verse Commentary takes it apart clearly: “this has two senses: first the denial, second the establishing of the reason” — “not from a god” is what is refuted (Īśvara and the rest), and “because of sequence and the rest” is the reasoning that refutes. Three parties in all are refuted: those who hold Maheśvara to be the maker, those who hold a self to be the maker, and those who hold the primal nature to be the cause. The author first sets a general question: on what ground is it said that things are not produced by a single cause? The answer is briskly made — “if you allow that anything whatever is brought about by a cause, have you not thereby abandoned the doctrine that all the world arises from the single cause Īśvara and the like?”: if you grant that the establishing of any one thing requires other causes to help, your own doctrine of a single cause collapses.
〔4.2〕The first reason: sequence. “That is, if the worlds arose from the single cause Īśvara and the like, then everything ought to arise all at once and not in sequence; yet we plainly see dharmas arising in sequence, and so we know they definitely do not arise from a single cause.” First ask: where is the force of this refutation? In this, that a single, unchanging cause cannot yield results that come earlier and later. The opponent’s defense is to add a “wish”: Īśvara wishes this dharma to arise now and that one later. The author presses on through four steps: if it depends on a wish, then it is no longer a single cause; if the wishes are said to differ, then, since those differing wishes issue alike from an undifferentiated Īśvara, they too ought to arise all at once; if the differing wishes are said to depend on some further cause, then it is not “taking Īśvara alone as the cause”; and if the cause depended upon depends in turn on yet another cause, then “the causes depended upon would have no limit” — and to grant that they have no limit is to grant beginninglessness, which “does not transgress the correct principle of causes and conditions in the Buddha’s school,” so that the circle comes back round to Buddhism’s own doctrine of causes and conditions.
The easy error is to suppose that the author is proving that the world has no creator. What he refutes is the single cause — “therefore there is no dharma produced by a single cause alone.” In practice: the form of this reasoning is well worth remembering — anyone who maintains a single permanent cause must face the question of how an unchanging cause produces changing results.
〔4.3〕The second reason: it serves no purpose. “And when that Īśvara exerts great effort to produce the worlds, what benefit does he gain?” If it be said that it is for the sake of arousing delight, then, since delight cannot be aroused apart from other means, he must rely on something else for the arousing of delight — “so that Īśvara, since he must depend on another in the arousing of delight, ought not to be sovereign.” The author then writes the weightiest sentence in the passage: “Or if Īśvara produces the hells and other measureless instruments of suffering to oppress and harm sentient beings, and arouses his own delight at the sight of it — enough! What use is such an Īśvara?” First ask: is this sentence emotion or argument? It is argument. It forces out the internal consequence of the opponent’s position: if instruments of suffering are made merely for the maker’s own amusement, then the god he sets up contradicts the very name of Sovereign. In practice: the method of this refutation is not to add an external value judgment but to push the opponent’s own premises to the end and let them state the conclusion themselves.
〔4.4〕The third reason: it contradicts the world. “And if one accepts that all the world arises from the single cause Īśvara, this is to deny the other causes and conditions and the human labor and the rest that we plainly see in the world.” First ask: is this an appeal to common sense? What it appeals to is what is plainly seen — farming requires that someone plow, making a cart requires that someone make it, and these are causes and conditions verifiable before one’s eyes. If the opponent says that Īśvara must await human labor to assist and elicit his act, the author answers, “this is merely words of partisan reverence for Īśvara, since apart from the other causes and conditions no distinct function of his is seen” — that is deference, not reasoning. If the opponent falls back on holding that only the very first arising has Īśvara as its cause and that only afterwards are other causes awaited, the author answers: then what first arose awaited no other cause, and “it ought to have been accomplished beginninglessly, just like Īśvara.” As for the two schools of the self and of the primal nature, “each as applicable is to be thoroughly examined and dismissed just as Īśvara was.” At the end the author sighs: “Strange, that the world does not cultivate excellent discernment, but is like foolish birds and beasts — truly this is to be pitied” — each acts for himself and undergoes his own maturation result and result of human effort, and yet people would put the account in another’s name. In practice: refuting the single cause is not for the sake of winning an argument but in order to hand the responsibility for cause and result back to those who act; and the author immediately says, “enough of refuting error; the correct doctrine should now be set out,” and turns back to the enumeration of dharmas.
V. A Stanza of the Non-Buddhists: Why the Author Says “This Is Truly Well Said”
〔5.1〕The stanza and where it comes from. After “enough! what use is such an Īśvara?” the author says, “in the words of their own stanza, this is truly well said,” and then quotes four lines: “Because he is sharp as a precipice and can burn, fearsome and constantly oppressing and harming, delighting to feed on blood, flesh, and marrow, he is therefore named Rudra.” First ask: whose stanza is this? It is not a stanza of this treatise — Shentai’s Commentary assigns it to “the brahmins who serve that god,” recited by the servants of Īśvara themselves. So although this stanza stands in the fascicle it does not enter the count of the root stanzas, which is why Shentai counts the fascicle’s root stanzas as twelve and a half lines.
〔5.2〕What the stanza says. The ancient masters bring each of the stanza’s four matters down to concrete detail: his fire-arrows are sharp as a precipice and burn up three lands, whence “sharp as a precipice and can burn”; he strings serpents through human skulls and ties them at his head, and slays elephants and takes their hides, wearing them inside out still bloody, whence “fearsome and constantly oppressing and harming”; and the last line states outright what he feeds on. As for the name, Shentai’s Commentary records Xuanzang’s oral gloss most directly — “as for Rudra, the Dharma Master Xuanzang says: this means Violent and Cruel”; Yuanhui’s Verse Commentary has “as for Rudra, this means Violent and Cruel; Īśvara has a thousand names, and this is one title”; while Puguang’s Record has “this means Fierce and Cruel, an alternative name of Maheśvara. Maheśvara has a thousand names in all, of which only sixty are current in the world today, and Rudra is one of them.” The graph and the number transmitted by the three differ slightly, while the gloss “violent and cruel” is the same.
〔5.3〕Clearing a misreading: how the four words “this is truly well said” are to be read. This is the sentence in the fascicle most easily misread. On its face it looks as though the author were praising the non-Buddhists’ stanza; but he has just said, “enough! what use is such an Īśvara?”, so how does he turn at once to praise? The ancient masters divide into two routes here, and this section states first the clue given by the treatise’s own text: what the author praises is not that god but the exact correspondence between the figure this stanza describes and the position they themselves maintain, that he takes delight in others’ suffering — since you say he makes the hells for his own delight, then the descriptions in your own stanza, “constantly oppressing and harming” and “feeding on blood, flesh, and marrow,” have caught this god exactly. So “well said” is said with respect to the accuracy of the description, and not with respect to the worthiness of what is described. Whether the sentence is finally irony or straightforward assent the four commentaries read differently, and this is recorded under Further Resonances. In practice: when the tone of the treatise turns abruptly, look back at the position taken in the preceding sentence, and one will usually not misjudge.
VI. The Great Elements and Derived Form: Five Causes, Yet Not the Coexistent Cause
〔6.1〕Four directions of relation. The stanza says, “The great elements are two causes for the great elements, five kinds for derived form; derived form is three kinds for derived form, and for the great elements one cause only.” Great elements with respect to great elements are only coexistent causes and homogeneous causes. Great elements with respect to derived form are five causes: producing, supporting, establishing, upholding, and nourishing. Derived forms with respect to one another may be coexistent, homogeneous, and maturation causes. Derived form with respect to the great elements is a maturation cause only. First ask: why should the numbers in the four directions all differ? Because the senses of causality that can be established in each direction differ, and the treatise gives a reason for each: among derived forms with respect to one another, the coexistent cause is confined to “bodily and verbal action that follows mind, and not the other derived forms”; the homogeneous cause is “all that arises earlier with respect to what is homogeneous and later”; and the maturation cause is that bodily and verbal action can call forth “the maturation result of the eye faculty and the rest.” And that derived form has only the maturation cause with respect to the great elements is likewise because bodily and verbal action can call forth a result that is a great element.
〔6.2〕The real sense of the five causes, and the one restriction that matters most. Each of the five causes has its analogy: because derived form arises from the great elements it is named the producing cause; because once arisen it proceeds in dependence upon the great elements, “as one depends on a teacher and the like,” it is named the supporting cause; because they can uphold it, “as a wall upholds a painting,” it is named the establishing cause; because they keep it unbroken it is named the upholding cause; because they make it increase it is named the nourishing cause. Taken together, “thus is displayed the causal nature of the great elements with respect to derived form as arousing, altering, holding, maintaining, and increasing.” Yuanhui’s Verse Commentary matches the five names to the five senses one by one: “arousing is the producing cause; altering is the supporting cause; holding is the establishing cause; sustaining is the upholding cause; increasing is the nourishing cause.”
But the most important thing in the whole section is this one restriction: “these five causes are only differentiations of the enabling cause.” First ask: why does this sentence matter? Because the reader’s most natural misunderstanding is to read “the great elements produce derived form” as making the great elements the intimate cause of derived form (a coexistent or homogeneous cause). The treatise states plainly here that these five causes are only five divisions of labor beneath the enabling cause, belonging to the square marked “not obstructing,” and are not among the six causes that intimately produce. There is a further layer of easy error: the five causes are named producing and nourishing, which sound as intimate as can be, and yet they remain remote conditions. In practice: this restriction keeps the framework of the earlier sections, cause intimate and condition remote, from being thrown into disorder — names may be chosen for their warmth, but the squares may not be misfiled.
VII. The Twelve Minds: Counting All Minds Out First
〔7.1〕How the twelve are counted. The treatise says, “it has been stated in general above that mind and mental factors earlier are the immediately antecedent condition of what is later, but it has not been determinately stated how many minds may arise directly after which mind,” and so first sets up an inventory of mind. The desire realm has four minds: wholesome, unwholesome, obscured-indeterminate, and unobscured-indeterminate. The form realm and the formless realm have three each, “that is, excluding the unwholesome” — the two higher realms have no unwholesome mind. These ten are all minds with outflows; minds without outflows are only two, that of one in training and that of one beyond training. Together they make twelve.
〔7.2〕Clearing misreadings, and where it lands. First ask: why do the two higher realms have no unwholesome mind? Because the entity of an unwholesome mind is a mind associated with the afflictions that can call forth maturation in the evil destinies, and the two higher realms have already left behind the defilements of the desire realm, so that such a mind does not arise there — this is an established doctrine carried over from the preceding chapter and simply taken up here. The easy error is to confuse the unobscured-indeterminate with the obscured-indeterminate. Both are indeterminate (they do not call forth maturation); the difference lies in “obscured” — the obscured is covered by afflictions and obstructs the noble path, while the unobscured does not obstruct. In practice: the twelve minds are the coordinate axis of every number in the second half of this fascicle, and all the “produces nine” and “arises from eight” below are counted over these twelve squares. Shentai’s Commentary also makes a lateral check for the reader: “among the twelve minds, six minds do not undergo birth at death” — which of the twelve squares can become present at death and which can become present at rebirth-linking is the real mechanism behind the table of mutual arising.
VIII. The Twelve Minds Arising from One Another: One Table, Two Mechanisms
〔8.1〕How the table is read. Four lines of stanza list in full how the twelve minds arise from one another: the wholesome mind of the desire realm produces nine and arises from eight; the defiled mind of the desire realm arises from ten and produces four; the unobscured mind of the desire realm arises from five and produces seven; the wholesome mind of the form realm produces eleven and arises from nine; the obscured mind of the form realm arises from eight and produces six; the unobscured mind of the form realm arises from three and produces six; the wholesome mind of the formless realm produces nine and arises from six; the obscured mind of the formless realm produces seven and also arises from seven; the unobscured mind of the formless realm follows the pattern of the form realm; the mind of one in training arises from four and produces five; the mind of one beyond training arises from five and produces four. First ask: how are these numbers arrived at? By two mechanisms.
〔8.2〕Mechanism one: entering and emerging from absorption. The wholesome mind of the desire realm can produce two minds of the form realm, and the treatise notes that one of these is “at the time of entering absorption”; and it also comes from the wholesome mind of the form realm, which is “at the time of emerging from absorption.” This brings entry into and emergence from absorption into the table of mutual arising. One passage here is especially worth turning over: the defiled mind of the form realm can also produce the wholesome mind of the desire realm — the treatise says, “when one is distressed by a defiled absorption, from that defiled mind there arises a wholesome mind of the lower realm, in order to rely on that lower wholesome mind to guard against falling back from it.” One who cultivates absorption is troubled by a defiled absorption and retreats to a lower level to arouse a wholesome mind for his own protection: this is an actual circumstance of practice, and the treatise reckons it into the enumeration of dharmas.
〔8.3〕Mechanism two: rebirth-linking. The treatise says again and again, “at the stage of rebirth-linking.” The moment of mind at rebirth-linking is necessarily defiled, and so any mind in any of the three realms, at death, can be directly followed by a defiled mind of the desire realm — this is the source of “the defiled arises from ten” (the twelve minds excluding those of one in training and one beyond training). Conversely, a defiled mind of the desire realm can produce only the four minds of its own realm, “there being no principle by which it produces the rest,” since a defiled mind cannot leap directly to a level of absorption or to another realm.
〔8.4〕Clearing misreadings, and where it lands. The first easy error is to suppose that “cannot produce” means forbidden. It does not; it means there is no such road — thus the wholesome mind of the desire realm can produce a defiled mind of the formless realm (at rebirth-linking) yet cannot produce a wholesome mind of the formless realm, and the reason the treatise gives is “because they are extremely far apart,” listing four kinds of distance: distance of support, distance of mode of apprehension, distance of object, and distance of antidote. The second easy error is to treat this table as a memory exercise. It is in fact a traffic map of mind: which moment may be followed by which decides the possible routes of practice and the possible routes of falling back. In practice: when the chapter on the noble persons later treats entering contemplation, emerging from it, and falling back, it must return to this map to find its roads.
IX. The Twenty Minds: Cutting the Wholesome and the Indeterminate Finer
〔9.1〕Why cut further. “The wholesome mind of each of the three realms divides into two kinds, namely acquired through preparation and acquired by birth” — some wholesome minds are won by applied effort and some are had from birth, and the two differ in force and cannot occupy one square. The unobscured-indeterminate of the desire realm divides into four: maturation-born, mode of deportment, field of craft, and supernormal-result mind. The form realm drops the field of craft, “since in the higher realms there is no making of the various crafts”; the formless realm has fewer still. Thus “the wholesome divides into six and the unobscured into eight,” and with the two minds of one in training and one beyond training added, they make twenty.
〔9.2〕What the four kinds of unobscured-indeterminate are. The maturation-born is the mind that arises in requital of former action; the mode of deportment is the mind arising while walking, standing, sitting, and lying; the field of craft is the mind arising while making things by skill; the supernormal-result mind is the mind of transformation and supernormal power drawn forth by absorption. The treatise states their objects: “the three unobscured minds of the mode of deportment and the rest have visible form, odor, taste, and the tangible as their objects; the field of craft and the rest also take sound as object; and these three minds are mental consciousness alone,” while “the preparatory stages of the mode of deportment and of the field of craft extend also to the four consciousnesses and the five consciousnesses.” It also records another master’s divergent view: that there is a mental consciousness drawn forth by the mode of deportment and by the field of craft which “can take all twelve sense fields as its object.”
〔9.3〕Why mutual arising suddenly becomes complicated. The table of mutual arising for the twenty minds is far more intricate than that for the twelve, because the wholesome acquired through preparation and the wholesome acquired by birth have parted company, and the supernormal-result mind moves in and out only with minds of absorption. Nothing illustrates the matter better than this exchange: a wholesome mind acquired through preparation can be directly followed by the three indeterminate minds, maturation-born, field of craft, and mode of deportment, whereas those three cannot be directly followed by a wholesome mind acquired through preparation. The reason is “because their force is weak and they are not drawn forth by applied effort”; while conversely a wholesome mind acquired through preparation can produce them because “the mind of emerging proceeds without applied effort.” And immediately there follows another misreading to clear: if that is so, a defiled mind accords still less with a wholesome mind acquired through preparation, so how can a defiled mind be directly followed by a wholesome mind acquired through preparation? The treatise answers: “even so, when one is wearied by the present activity of the afflictions, and wishes to know them, it is possible for preparation to arise.” In practice: these few sentences are among the rare passages in the fascicle bearing directly on practice — a mind of applied effort can be caught by a mind that proceeds without applied effort, while a mind without applied effort cannot catch a mind of applied effort; and the very moment the afflictions are active is a moment when contemplation may be aroused. Shentai’s Commentary makes here a check symmetrical with the earlier one: “among the twenty minds, eight minds do not undergo birth at death.”
〔9.4〕The three kinds of attention and the going in and out of the noble path. At the end of the twenty minds the treatise inserts three kinds of attention: attention to an individual characteristic (contemplating form as having the character of resistant deformation, and so on to contemplating consciousness as having the character of discerning), attention to a common characteristic (attention associated with the sixteen modes of apprehension), and attention through resolve (the contemplation of impurity, the four immeasurables, the liberations possessed of form, the bases of mastery, the totalities, and the rest). All three kinds of attention can be directly followed by the manifesting of the noble path, and the noble path can be directly followed by all three — so that this accords with the sūtra’s statement that “one cultivates the awakening-factor of mindfulness and the rest in company with the contemplation of impurity.” Two further masters hold otherwise: one says that only attention to a common characteristic can enter the noble path while the noble path can issue in all three; the other says that both entering and issuing belong to attention to a common characteristic alone. The author sets a difficulty for the third master: if one enters the certainty of the noble path in dependence on the second, third, or fourth absorption, of which level is the attention to a common characteristic that the noble path can be directly followed by? That of the desire realm is too far; attention to a common characteristic of one’s own level not previously obtained just is the noble path; and the factors conducive to penetration cannot possibly be aroused again after the fruit has been obtained. And if it be said that there is another attention to a common characteristic, already cultivated together with the factors conducive to penetration and bound up with them, which can be drawn forth, then “the Vaibhāṣikas do not allow this sense, since it contradicts correct principle.” At the end the treatise also lists the levels of the mind of emerging from contemplation after the fruit of an arhat is obtained: for one who obtains the fruit in dependence on access concentration, the mind of emerging is either of that same level or of the desire realm; for one who obtains it in dependence on the sphere of nothingness, either of that same level or of the summit of existence; for one who obtains it in dependence on the other levels, of his own level alone. And it lists the number of kinds of attention in the three realms: three in the desire realm (formed through hearing, formed through reflection, and acquired by birth); three in the form realm (hearing, cultivation, and acquired by birth, with nothing formed through reflection, “since as soon as the mind sets itself to consider, it enters absorption”); and two in the formless realm (cultivation and acquired by birth). Of these eight, “five kinds of attention can be directly followed by the manifesting of the noble path, excluding what is acquired by birth,” while the noble path can also be directly followed by the attention of the desire realm acquired by birth, “because it is bright and keen.”
First ask: why is this long passage placed among the twenty minds? Because attention is one of the stages of mind, and the going in and out of the noble path just is the arising of mind from mind — this passage is in fact the redemption of the table of mutual arising in the practice of the path. In practice: if the reader collates it with the table of mutual arising in the preceding section, he will see that the real theme of the second half of this fascicle is the road by which a moment of mind comes and the road by which it goes.
X. Minds Acquired When One Is Present: What Is “Acquired” in a Single Moment
〔10.1〕What “acquisition” means. The stanza says, “When a defiled mind of the three realms is present, six, six, and two are acquired; three with the wholesome of the form realm, four with that of one in training; for the rest only their own may be acquired.” The treatise glosses the sense of acquiring a mind in a single sentence: “because what was not accomplished before is now accomplished” — what was not accomplished before and is accomplished now is what acquisition means. First ask: when one mind becomes present, how does one incidentally acquire other minds? Because accomplishment and becoming present are two different things: a person may accomplish a given mind and not be arousing it at this moment. When certain joints are crossed (rebirth-linking, entering absorption, becoming free from defilement, falling back, restoring wholesome roots), the accomplished status of a whole batch of minds changes at once.
〔10.2〕Counting position by position. When a defiled mind of the desire realm is present, six are acquired: by restoring wholesome roots through doubt, or by falling back from a higher realm, the wholesome mind of the desire realm is acquired; by falling back through the arising of an affliction and by falling back from a realm, the unwholesome and the obscured minds of the desire realm and one obscured mind of the form realm are acquired; and by falling back through the arising of an affliction, one obscured mind of the formless realm and the mind of one in training are acquired. When a defiled mind of the form realm is present, six are likewise acquired: by falling back from a realm, one unobscured mind of the desire realm and three minds of the form realm are acquired, the defiled mind of the form realm itself being also acquired by falling back; and by falling back through the arising of an affliction, one obscured mind of the formless realm and the mind of one in training are acquired. When a defiled mind of the formless realm is present, only two are acquired: by falling back through the arising of an affliction, that defiled mind and the mind of one in training. When a wholesome mind of the form realm is present, three are acquired: that wholesome mind and the unobscured-indeterminate minds of the desire and form realms, “by way of advancing upward.” When the mind of one in training is present, four are acquired: the mind of one in training, the unobscured-indeterminate minds of the desire and form realms, and the wholesome mind of the formless realm, by first entering the certainty of the noble path and by becoming free, through the noble path, from the defilements of the desire and form realms. When the remaining minds are present, “only their own may be acquired.”
〔10.3〕Clearing misreadings, and where it lands. The easy error is to read “falling back” as an accident of failure. In this table, falling back and advancing upward are two symmetrical mechanisms — advancing upward makes one acquire the minds of a higher level, and falling back makes one acquire again the minds of a lower level; and how many minds are acquired records just how far a person has moved on the ladder of the three realms. In practice: this section carries the two tables of mutual arising forward from “what can be connected to what” to “how the accomplished status changes once the connection is made,” and is the last layer of the fascicle. If the reader asks why Abhidharma reckons so finely, the answer is here: progress and regress in practice can be entered in the ledger square by square.
XI. Another School’s Stanza, and the Author’s Correction
〔11.1〕The quoted stanza. The treatise says, “Others state this in general,” and quotes a stanza: “The wise say that when a defiled mind becomes present nine are acquired, with a wholesome mind six are acquired, and with the indeterminate only the indeterminate.” First ask: why do this stanza’s numbers differ from those in the earlier part of the treatise? Earlier, defiled minds of the three realms acquire six, six, and two respectively, fourteen in all, whereas this stanza says only nine. The difference is in the method of counting: the treatise counts realm by realm and allows the same item to be counted more than once, while the stanza removes the duplicates and counts each only once. Likewise for the wholesome mind, where the treatise’s separate reckoning gives seven (three with the wholesome of the form realm, four with that of one in training) while the stanza combines them into six.
〔11.2〕The author’s correction. The author goes on to say, “with a wholesome mind one should say that seven are acquired,” and lists the seven joints one by one: on restoring wholesome roots through right view, the wholesome mind of the desire realm is acquired; at the culminating stage of becoming free from the defilements of the desire realm, the unobscured-indeterminate minds of the desire and form realms are acquired all at once; on obtaining the concentrations of the form and formless realms, the wholesome minds of those two are acquired; and on first entering the certainty of the noble path and on realizing arhatship, the minds of one in training and of one beyond training are acquired. First ask: why does the author add this one mind? Because the stanza omits the position of restoring wholesome roots through right view — a person whose wholesome roots have been cut off and who arouses them anew is the very type of “what was not accomplished before and is accomplished now,” and should not go uncounted.
〔11.3〕Clearing misreadings, and where it lands. The easy error is to suppose that the author is charging the other school with error. His wording is “one should say that seven are acquired”: he supplements rather than overturns, and one and the same set of facts yielding different numbers under different methods of counting is no contradiction at all. From which school the stanza comes, and how Saṅghabhadra defends it, are recorded under Further Resonances. In practice: the treatise often quotes another school’s stanza and then corrects it, and this is its rule of gathering in and only then discriminating — when a reader meets in the treatise a stanza whose numbers suddenly do not agree with what precedes, the first step is not to judge right and wrong but to ask whether the two sides are counting in the same way.
XII. The Five Gates That Gather the Sense: One Stanza Closes the Fascicle
〔12.1〕The stanza and the five gates. “In order to gather in the preceding sense, a stanza is stated again”: “At taking birth, at entering absorption, at becoming free from defilement, at falling back, and at the position of restoring wholesome roots, a mind is acquired, because it was not accomplished before.” The five gates are taking birth (rebirth-linking), entering absorption, becoming free from defilement, falling back, and restoring wholesome roots — every acquiring of a mind falls within these five positions, and the reason it is called acquiring is simply that “it was not accomplished before.”
〔12.2〕What this stanza does. First ask: the reckoning has already been made position by position, so why one more stanza? Because the earlier reckoning went mind by mind (how many minds are acquired when a given mind becomes present), while this stanza gathers gate by gate (the acquiring of a mind falls within five gates). One and the same set of facts rearranged once on a different axis is what allows a reader to remember it and put it to use. The easy error is to take it for repetition and skip it. It is the fascicle’s only comprehensive table.
〔12.3〕How it lands on the whole fascicle. Looking back: this fascicle begins from “the causes have been stated at length; and what of conditions?”, first establishes the entities of the four conditions, next fixes their operation, then audits how many conditions each class of dharma arises from, midway refutes the grasping of a single cause in defense of the correct principle of causes and conditions, and at the end uses eight lines of stanza to make the immediately antecedent condition concrete as a traffic map of mind, gathering it under five gates. Among the four conditions, the other three govern what a thing arises on the basis of, and only the immediately antecedent condition governs what a thing arises after — and what practice contests is precisely where the next moment of mind will connect. That this fascicle gives eight lines of stanza to mind has its reason here.
Further Resonances: A Mirror of Four Commentaries
The above is the sense of this fascicle’s own text. What follows is a separate section gathering four matters: the judgments of the ancient masters and the divergences among the four commentaries, Saṅghabhadra’s counter-refutation, the divergences of Paramārtha’s older translation, and coordinates for collateral reading. A mirror is not the treatise, only another way of reading the same text; the items are recorded together without adjudication, each returned to its own place.
1. Where the Four Commentaries Diverge
The four similes for the four conditions. All three commentaries cite the Mahāvibhāṣā in matching similes to the four conditions. Fabao’s Commentary cites it as, “the causal condition is like the way of a seed; the immediately antecedent condition is like the way of opening and standing aside; the object condition is like the way of taking up a staff; the dominant condition is like the way of not obstructing”; Puguang’s Record cites the same with slight differences of wording, as “cause is like the way of a seed; immediately antecedent is like the way of opening and standing aside; object is like the way of taking up a staff; dominance is like the way of not obstructing.” Fabao’s Commentary adds after the citation a discrimination of his own: “inferring from this, the four senses do not gather in dharmas exhaustively, since there is such a thing as having the power to act and not merely not obstructing” — deft as the four similes are, they still cannot gather in the characters of all dharmas. These four similes are transmitted by the ancient masters and are not in the treatise’s text.
To which side the word “equal” belongs. Yuanhui’s Verse Commentary gives three explanations: that mind and mental factors before and after are each one in entity and so are called equal; or that the preceding mind and mental factors serve equally as condition for what follows; or that the following mind and mental factors equally make use of the preceding as condition, so that “this word ‘equal’ extends to both the condition and the result.” Puguang’s Record gives six explanations and adds a route in which “equal extends to both places, before and after,” concluding that the names of the four conditions “admit of no possessive-compound analysis,” only the appositional-determinative and the dependent-determinative being applicable. Saṅghabhadra in the Treatise Conforming to Correct Principle gives several further explanations, and Shentai’s Commentary reckons them as five in all, judging that “among these five explanations the first three and the fifth are Sarvāstivāda” — assigning the five explanations to two schools. The four commentaries differ in the number of explanations while what is contested is one: whether “equal” speaks of the condition or of the result. All are recorded together without adjudication.
The boundary between cause and condition. Fabao’s Commentary takes intimacy and remoteness as its cord: “cause is the name for what is intimate, condition the name for what is remote.” Puguang’s Record takes instead two gates, that of entity and that of similarity of function, first citing the Mahāvibhāṣā’s two views (that cause and condition gather each other in; that condition gathers in cause while cause does not gather in condition) and ruling that “this treatise agrees with the latter view of the Mahāvibhāṣā,” and then reconciling them by the two gates of entity and function. The two commentaries take different routes while the text they explain is one. As for whether the five causes beginning with producing are gathered under the causal condition or under the dominant condition, Puguang’s Record preserves both interpretations while taking the former as correct — this is Puguang’s own judgment, and the treatise’s text itself does not judge.
Whether “this is truly well said” is irony or straightforward assent. This is where the four commentaries diverge most plainly in this fascicle. Puguang’s Record reads it as irony, ruling outright that “the author is making sport of that non-Buddhist,” and holding that the non-Buddhists’ intent in reciting the stanza was to display Īśvara’s “teaching sentient beings by manifold manifestations,” the author borrowing their words to prick them in return. Shentai’s Commentary reads it instead as straightforward assent: “now the author says that he produces the sufferings of the hells and the rest and arouses his own delight; hence one knows that their stanza too concerns the reward-body god, and so it becomes well said” — the stanza as recited concerns the manifestation-body god, while what the author adduces is a matter of the reward-body god, and since the two figures agree, it is called well said. Yuanhui’s Verse Commentary explains only the concrete detail and the sense of the name, without judging it either mockery or assent. Both readings are recorded without adjudication.
The doctrine of Īśvara’s three bodies. Shentai’s Commentary records that “the brahmins who serve that god say Īśvara has three bodies”: first a dharma body pervading the whole realm of dharmas; second a reward body dwelling in the palace of Īśvara as the great Brahmā king or as Maheśvara; third a manifestation body in the world guarding the lands. Puguang’s Record likewise gives three bodies, with the second as an enjoyment body, and records its appearance as “the Maheśvara spoken of in the Buddha’s teaching, with three eyes and eight arms.” Yuanhui’s Verse Commentary gives dharma body, reward body, and manifestation body. What the three transmit is broadly the same with small differences of assignment.
The gloss on Rudra and the number of his names. Shentai’s Commentary records Xuanzang’s oral gloss, “as for Rudra, the Dharma Master Xuanzang says: this means Violent and Cruel”; Yuanhui’s Verse Commentary has “Īśvara has a thousand names, and this is one title”; Puguang’s Record has “this means Fierce and Cruel,” recording that “Maheśvara has a thousand names in all, of which only sixty are current in the world today.” The differences of graph and of number are recorded together without adjudication. Shentai’s Commentary at the same place also records Paramārtha’s account: “Master Paramārtha says: there were three asuras who carried three lands flying through the sky and passed above the heaven of Maheśvara” — so that for the concrete detail of this passage Shentai preserves both Xuanzang’s and Paramārtha’s transmissions.
One character in the summary of the great elements’ five causes. The treatise’s text has “arousing, altering, holding, maintaining, and increasing,” whereas the text restated in Yuanhui’s Verse Commentary has “arousing, altering, holding, sustaining, and increasing,” and he matches the names accordingly with “sustaining is the upholding cause.” The difference of one character is bound to the recension transmitted, and is here recorded without adjudication.
From which school the stanza quoted at the end comes. Yuanhui’s Verse Commentary judges that “this is the author quoting a stanza of the masters of the Miscellaneous Heart, setting out how many minds are acquired”; Puguang’s Record runs on the same track with “this is the author reporting the Miscellaneous Heart masters’ statement that with a defiled mind nine are acquired,” and goes on to fault it: “the Miscellaneous Heart masters do not state the first item, the restoring of wholesome roots through right view, but say only that six are acquired, which is too few and is a fault.” Shentai’s Commentary gives a separate account: “the ‘others’ are those who hold there are eleven; the master of the Heart states this stanza in general, and the author of the Miscellaneous Heart fits this stanza to the twelve minds” — taking the “others” to be the master who holds mind to be elevenfold (the minds of one in training and one beyond training combined into a single mind without outflows), and the author of the Miscellaneous Heart to be the one who matched the stanza to the twelve minds. The three accounts are recorded together without adjudication.
Puguang’s own marking of a doubt. On the accomplishment of the three minds of the mode of deportment and the rest, Puguang’s Record reconciles the difference between this treatise and the Treatise on the Body of Consciousness and provides several interpretations, and then says of himself, “I still hope that the discerning will examine this clumsy opinion of mine” — that an ancient master should plainly mark a doubt where he is uneasy is itself part of the tradition’s manner, and it is recorded as found.
2. Saṅghabhadra’s Counter-Refutation and Supplementary Explanations
In the Treatise Conforming to Correct Principle Saṅghabhadra calls Vasubandhu “the Sūtra-master.” In the passages corresponding to this fascicle he expressly names the Sūtra-master only twice, the remainder being positive statements of his own position; all are recorded below.
First, the gloss on the word “nature” of a condition. Saṅghabhadra supplements: “the nature of a condition here is just the four conditions; as ‘four dwellings’ is the same as ‘the nature of a dwelling,’ the word ‘nature’ is used in order to display the class” — answering to the treatise’s “nature here means the class of a condition.” This is supplementary explanation and not refutation.
Second, an added list of causal characters. Before the four conditions Saṅghabhadra first lists causal characters in six opposed pairs (producing cause and revealing cause, determinate cause and indeterminate cause, common cause and uncommon cause, near cause and remote cause, previously arisen cause and co-arisen cause, cause within one’s own or another’s continuum and cause not counted among sentient beings), and composes a stanza of his own to gather them: “Nothing however small is established but by a cause; that all is by causes the Buddha has said. The causes of dharmas are many and subtle and hard to know; the world in its confusion then says there is no cause at all.” This is Saṅghabhadra’s addition and is not in the treatise.
Third, the refutation of the Elder’s old accompanying element, and with it the Sūtra-master’s seeds. Saṅghabhadra records the Elder’s statement: “yet the Elder says that the nature of the causal condition is the old accompanying element, that is, the capacity of the continua of sentient beings to be causes for one another in turn,” and at once refutes it: “this too is refuted as the doctrine of seeds held by the Sūtra-master was refuted above, since this old accompanying element is only a different name for those seeds” — Saṅghabhadra thus judges the Elder’s old accompanying element and the Sūtra-master’s seeds to be one doctrine and refutes them together. This item is the densest place of intra-lineage debate in this fascicle; the refutation proper is in a later chapter, and its location is recorded here.
Fourth, the challenge concerning before and after in the future. Saṅghabhadra says, “if you hold that the future has a determinate before and after, as with the highest worldly dharma with respect to the receptivity concerning suffering and the rest, on what condition do they say the before and after are determinate?” — reaching the same conclusion as the treatise’s “because future dharmas abide mixed together and have no before and after,” while arguing along a different route.
Fifth, why the two absorptions are not a condition. Saṅghabhadra sets the question, “on what ground are the two absorptions immediately antecedent to mind and yet not said to be the immediately antecedent condition of mind?”, and answers that they are drawn forth by the force of mind and are injuriously contrary to the arising of mind and the rest; the treatise here stops at the conclusion, and Saṅghabhadra widens the reason for it.
Sixth, the divisions of the passage refuting Īśvara. The three lines of reasoning are the same in the two works, but at the culminating point of the refutation this treatise has “enough! what use is such an Īśvara?” and then quotes the non-Buddhists’ stanza, whereas Saṅghabhadra does not quote that stanza and writes directly, “enough! what use is it to serve such a violent and cruel Īśvara?” — and the two words “violent and cruel” are exactly Xuanzang’s gloss on “Rudra” recorded by Shentai’s Commentary. The difference in how the two divide and join is recorded without adjudication.
Seventh, the number of minds acquired. Saṅghabhadra defends that stanza: “as the Sūtra-master objects, one should say that seven are acquired; yet since one in training and one beyond training are alike without outflows, they are stated together as a single mind, and to say six is no fault” — one in training and one beyond training being alike without outflows, they are combined into one mind, and so saying six is not an error. Fabao’s Commentary cites the passage without adding a ruling. This is one meaning and two schools recorded together, with neither judged to prevail.
Appended: the eightfold distinction of cause and condition in the Treatise Revealing the Doctrine. The Treatise Revealing the Doctrine first establishes that “the six causes and four conditions do not differ in entity though they differ in sense,” and then sets out eight distinctions: “cause means what produces, condition what nourishes, like the difference between the mother who bears and the mother who rears”; cause is one and conditions are many, as with a seed and manure and soil; “again, cause is uncommon and what is common is condition, as with the eye and with visible form”; what does its own work is called cause and what does another’s work is called condition; what can draw forth is called cause and what can uphold is called condition, as with the flower and the calyx; “again, what is near is called cause and what is far is called condition, as with the jewel and the sun”; what can produce is called cause and what can accomplish is called condition, as curds bring forth ghee; and what properly has the sense is called cause while what assists in displaying it is called condition, as with a verbal root and its accompanying condition. These eight are the ordering made by Saṅghabhadra’s line and are not the text of this treatise, and so they stand in this section; Fabao’s Commentary also cites the whole of the Treatise Revealing the Doctrine’s text here, with the same characters and slight differences of punctuation.
3. Divergences of Paramārtha’s Older Translation
Paramārtha’s Expository Treatise on the Treasury forms a lineage of renderings of its own in the passages corresponding to this fascicle. For the names of the four conditions, his version has the class of causal condition, the class of sequential condition, the class of the condition-that-is-an-object, and the class of dominant condition — what is now the immediately antecedent condition he renders as the sequential condition, while explaining the name “sequential” by “equal and without interval,” so that Xuanzang’s rendering is his gloss. Among the six causes, the enabling cause he renders as the facilitating cause and the maturation cause as the retribution cause; nonmanifest form he renders as uninstructive form, without outflows as without flows, and applied and sustained thought as examining and pondering. Among the twenty minds, the supernormal-result mind he renders as the transformation mind (though the same passage below also uses supernormal-result mind, the two names being used interchangeably), and the maturation-born as the retribution-produced mind. Among the terms of the path of cultivation, attention he renders as consideration, attention to a common characteristic as general-character consideration, attention through resolve as consideration through wish and delight, the certainty of the noble path as the class fixed in rightness, access concentration as not-yet-reached concentration, and the restoring of wholesome roots as the joining of wholesome roots.
The dividing and joining also differ. For the two words “nature” and “class,” Xuanzang has “nature here means the class of a condition” while Paramārtha has “class here is the intrinsic nature of a condition,” with the positions exactly reversed. In the similes showing that form cannot be established as immediately antecedent, Paramārtha’s version has an extra item, “the kernel within a palmyra nut,” before the banyan tree. In the stanza quoted in the refutation of the single cause, Xuanzang keeps the transcription and has “he is therefore named Rudra,” while Paramārtha gives both a rendering of the sense and a transcription, “he is called Litya who makes them cry out”; and Xuanzang’s word “stanza” Paramārtha transcribes as śloka. For the summary of the great elements’ five causes, Xuanzang has “arousing, altering, holding, maintaining, and increasing,” Paramārtha “producing, transforming, holding, maintaining, and increasing.” For the five gates that gather the sense at the end, Xuanzang has taking birth, entering absorption, becoming free from defilement, falling back, and restoring wholesome roots, while Paramārtha has taking birth, entering contemplation, becoming free from desire, falling back from absorption, and joining wholesome roots.
The fascicle boundaries also differ: Xuanzang divides the Chapter on the Faculties into five parts, Paramārtha into only four; this whole fascicle falls in the latter portion of Paramārtha’s “Analysis of the Faculties, part four,” and Paramārtha closes his fifth fascicle with “the analysis of the sense of the four conditions is complete” — a closing boundary at the same place as the end of Xuanzang’s Fascicle Seven, and his version names this section simply “Analysis of the Sense of the Four Conditions,” exactly answering to the title of this unit. The choices of an alternative translation are the translator’s own affair, and this section only records them together without adjudication.
4. Coordinates for Collateral Reading
What this fascicle establishes is the full register of mind succeeding mind, and also the first table of definitions for the names of the four conditions. Those names were taken over by the later study of dharma-characteristics, while the entities matched to them differ — this treatise takes five of the six causes as the entity of the causal condition, whereas later ages attach it to seeds and manifest activity: one name and two systems, and they may be read against each other. The rule that the immediately antecedent condition is “mind and mental factors alone” and that “form and the rest may none of them be established as an immediately antecedent condition” raises a joint that must be passed through once several consciousnesses running in parallel have been established. Since Saṅghabhadra in this fascicle judges the Elder’s old accompanying element and the Sūtra-master’s seeds to be one doctrine and refutes them together, the explicit text of the debate over the doctrine of seeds held by the author of this treatise is in that very passage, and it is a place where the Sautrāntika line of seeds can be anchored. The sentence that the five causes of the great elements with respect to derived form “are only differentiations of the enabling cause” may likewise be read against the later dividing and joining of form. As for the map of stages by which the twelve minds are opened out into twenty — each of the three realms divided into wholesome, unwholesome, obscured-indeterminate, and unobscured-indeterminate, and the unobscured opened further into maturation-born, mode of deportment, field of craft, and supernormal-result — it is the base map for the study of the stages of mind. This section only lists coordinates for collateral reading; determining the nature of the relations does not belong here.